This is a reproduction of a library book that was digitized

by Google as part of an ongoing effort to preserve the

information in books and make it universally accessible.

https://books.google.com
 DUPL
B 656,546
 6
9/ st-

1817

ARTES SCIENTIA
VERITAS
LIBRARY OFCHTHEIGAN
N I V E RSITY OF MI
U

TUEHOR

31- QUR RISPENINS

ULAM AMO NAM
CIRCUMSPIGE
 A

GRAMMAR

OF THE

TELOOGOO LANGUAGE .
 A

GRAMMAR

OF THE

TELOOGOO LANGUAGE ,

COMMONLY TERMED THE GENTOO,

PECULIAR TO THE HINDOOS INHABITING THE NORTH EASTERN PROVINCES

OF THE

INDIAN PENINSULA.

BY A. D. CAMPBELL,

OF THE

HONORABLE EAST INDIA COMPANY'S CIVIL SERVICE

ON THE

MADRAS ESTABLISHMENT,

MEMBER OF THE BOARD OF SUPERINTENDENCE

FOR THE

COLLEGE OF FORT ST. GEORGE .

MADRAS.

Printed at the College Press.

By M. Sashachellum ,

1816.
 PL
4773
.019
 6 3 7 3 5 7 234

TO HIS EXCELLENCY

THE RIGHT HONORABLE FRANCIS RAWDON HASTINGS ,

EARL OF MOIRA, K. G.

GOVERNOR GENERAL AND COMMANDER IN CHIEF IN INDIA.

&c. &c. &c .

MY LORD,

In dedicating to your Lordship the following

elementary work, in elucidation of the principles ofone

of the most ancient, useful, and elegant languages of

India, permit me, most respectfully, to express my

grateful acknowledgements for the honor which it de-

rives from being permitted to appear under the sanc-

tion of so illustrious a name.

Public utility, the chief object ofthis work, constitu-

tes also its chief claim to the patronage ofa Statesman

whose liberal and enlightened mind deems nothing be-

neath its notice which may be calculated, however re-

motely, to promote the interests of the great Empire

entrusted to his care. If, by diffusing among the civil

and military servants on the Coast a more extended

knowledge of the language of Telingana, and an im-

proved acquaintance with the character, customs, and

manners ofthe fine race ofmen who inhabit that coun-

try, the work here presented to your Lordship should

contribute in any degree to the convenience of indivi-

duals, to the service of the Government, or to the se-

curity and happiness of its subjects , I shall have the

satisfaction to reflect that, however imperfect its exe-

cution, it will not have proved altogether unworthy of

the distinguished patronage with which it has been ho

nored.

I have the honor to be,

My Lord,

with the greatest respect,

your Lordship's obliged and

very obedient humble servant

A. D. CAMPBELL.
 ADVERTISEMENT.

Since the establishment of the College of Fort

William by Marquis Wellesley, the labors of many

distinguished individuals have added much valua-

ble information to the knowledge before possessed

of oriental literature, and afforded many facilities

to the attainment of an improved acquaintance with

the several dialects peculiar to the provinces imme-

diately subject to the Supreme Government. A si-

milar Institution (on a modified and less extensive

scale) has more recently been established at Fort St.

George, and may be expected , in course of time, to

produce the same favorable results as regards the lan-

guages ofthe South of India , respecting which very

little has as yet appeared before the public through

the medium ofthe press , though the languages them-

selves had, even before the establishment ofthe Col-

lege, been cultivated with considerable success by

many individuals.

For the establishment of the College of Fort St.

George, and for the encouragement afforded in ma-

 ny other respects to the advancement of the litera-

ture of Southern India, the Public are in a great de-

gree indebted to Sir George Barlow ; and the follow-

ing is one of several works which owe their rise to

this source .

The Author , having been nominated to a seat at

the Board of Superintendence for the College, had

frequent opportunities of observing the disadvantage

under which the Teloogoo Students laboured from

the want ofa work on the elements ofthat language .

An attempt to remove this impediment was a duty

which the author's situation in some degree imposed ;

and actuated by this motive , as well as by a desire to

rescue the Teloogoo from the undeserved neglect

in which its great difficulty had involved it, and to

extend among his countrymen the knowledge of

a language spoken by a large portion of the native

subjects of the British Government in the South of

India, he proceeded to arrange the notes on the na-

tive grammars of the language , which he had taken

to assist his own studies , in the form which they have

assumed in the following pages .

The manuscript, thus prepared , was submitted to

the Government of Fort St. George , whose approba-

tion it having been so fortunate as to obtain , the copy

right was purchased on the public account, and the

Right Honorable the Governor in Council was pleas-

ed to direct that the work should be printed at theCol-

lege Press, whence it now issues to the Public .

Every first attempt to illustrate the principles of

a foreign language is attended by peculiar difficul-

ties ; but to do justice to a language so highly cul-

tivated as the Teloogoo required advantages to

which the author makes no pretension : nevertheless

he hopes that in essential respects the work will not

be found deficient. He does not expect that it will

remove all the difficulties which have hitherto op-

posed the acquisition ofthe Teloogoo : if, by ena-

bling the European Student to overcome the chief

obstacles in his way, it lightens his labour, and faci-

litates his access to that eminence which all should

endeavour to attain who seek distinction in the pub-

lic service, the author's utmost wishes will be accom-

plished : at some future period , perhaps, the track

which he has opened may be followed by others pos-

sessing more ability and leisure than himself, who ,

correcting those errors into which he has fallen ,

may give to the world improved works on one of the

most useful and polished languages of India.

aporing
 INTRODUCTION.

The language of which a Grammar is now offered to the Pub-

lic is commonly, but improperly, termed by Europeans the Gen.

too . It is the Andhra of Sanscrit authors, and , in the country

where it is spoken, is known by the name of the Trilinga, Telin-

ga, Teloogoo, or Tenoogoo ,

This language is the vernacular dialect of the Hindoos, inha-

biting that part of the Indian Peninsula, which, extending from
the Dutch settlement of Pulicat on the Coast of Coromandel, in-

land to the vicinity of Bangalore, stretches northwards, along the

coast as far as Chicacole, and in the interior to the sources of the

Tapti ; bounded on the east by the Bay of Bengal, and on the

west by an irregular line , passing through the western districts be-

longing to the Soubahdar of the Deccan, and cutting off the most
eastern provinces of the new state of Mysore: -a tract including the
five Northern Circars of Ganjam, Vizagapatam, Rajahmundry,

Masulipatam , and Guntoor, -the greater portion of the Nizam's ex-

tensive territories, -the districts of Cuddapah and Bellari ceded by

him to the British, -the eastern provinces of Mysore- , andthe north-

ern portion of the Carnatick ; nor is this language unknown in
the more Southern parts of India, for the descendants of those Te-

loogoo families which were deputed by the Kings of Vidianagara

ii INTRODUCTION.

to controul their Southern conquests, or which occasionally emigra-

ted from Telingana to avoid famine or oppression , are scattered
all over the Dravida and Karnataca provinces ; and ever retain-
ing the language of their forefathers, have diffused a knowledge
of it throughout the Peninsula.†

A tradition current in Telingana, and noticed by many of it's

best native * Authors, states the original name of this language, as
well as that of the country in which it is spoken, to have been

+ Among numerous authorities which may be quoted in support of the concluding part of
this statement, I subjoin the following passages from the Travels of Dr. Francis Buchan-
an, a work con taining much statistical information , regarding the provinces in the inte-
rior of the Peninsula " Every where in Karnata the palanquin-bearers are of Telinga
" descent, and in their own families speak the language of their original country " -
" The Woddas or Woddaru are a tribe of Telinga origin, and in their families retain
" that language ; although they are scattered all over the countries where the Tamil and
" Karnataca tongues are prevalent" -Speaking of a cast known by the name of Bayda.
ru, he observes-" Those in the Northeastern parts of the Mysore Rajah's dominions
66 are of Telinga descent, and retain that language -They seem to be the true Sudra cul.
❝ tivators and military of Telingana, and to have been introduced in great numbers in.
" to the southern countries of the Peninsula, when these became subject to Andray or
" Telingana princes."
See the Preface of Maumidi Vencayah, a learned native inhabitant of Masulipatam,
to his Teloogoo Dictionary, the copy right of which has been purchased by the Madras
Government ; and the original authorities therein referred to. Among others, the Ad-
hurvana Vyacurnum , as given in the Andhra Cowmudi, from which the following is a

quotation . శ్రీ శైలభీమ కా కేశమ హేంద్ర పరిసంయుతం ప్రాకారంతు

మహత్కృత్వా త్రీణి ద్వారాణిచాకర్ త్ త్రిలోచ హెమ హేరస్స

త్రిశూలంచక రెవహ ౯ |త్రిలింగరూపీన్యవసత్ త్రిద్వా రేపుగ దైవృనా

“ తః | ఆంధ్ర విష్ణుస్సరయుతోదను జేననిశంభునా యుధ్వాత్రయోద

శముగా హత్వాతంరాయు ఘోత్తమంత్రవస్తత్త త్రఋషిభియుక్తా తో

గోదావరిత టె| తత్కాలప్రభృతి క్షేత్రం త్రిలిం X మితివి శ్రుతం ॥

He (alluding to Andhra Vishtnoo the son of Soochundra hereafter mentioned) having
built an immense wall, connecting Shri Shuelum, Bheemeswaram, and Caleswaram,
with the Mahendra hills, formed in it three gates, in which the three.eyed Ishwara,
bearing the trident in his hand, and attended by a host of divinities , resided in theform
of three lingums. Andhra- Vishtnoo , assisted by angels, havingfought with the great
giant Nishumboo, for thirteen yoogs, killed him in battle, and took up his residence
with the sages on the banks ofthe Godavery, since which time, this country has been
named Trilingum. Then follows the passage given in the last Teloogoo quotation in the
Botes to this introduction,
 INTRODUCTION. iii

Tri- lingum, orin pure Teloogoo Modoga-lingum ; namely the lan-

guage or country of the three lingums : a name derived from the

three lingums, or mystic symbols of the divinity, in the form of

which Shiva, the destructive and re-producing power in the In-

dian Trinity, is reported to have descended upon the mountains

of Shri Shuelum or Purvatum, Caleswarum, and Bheemeswarum

or Dracharamum, where he is supposed still to hold his awful abode,

and is worshipped under the respective names of Mullecarjoona,
Calanadha, and Bheemeswara.

These three lingums are said to have marked the chief bounda

ries of the country known in modern times by the name of Telin-

gana. The first, that of Shri Shuelum , still celebrated in the Dec-

can, is particularly described in the extract from Captain Colin

McKenzie's journal inserted in the fifth volume of the Asiatic

Researches, of which a part is subjoined in a note below.* It is ro-

mantically situated in an unfrequented spot, surrounded by an

almost impenetrable forest, among the wild mountains through

which the impetuous current of the Kistna forces it's passage from

+ Tri in Sanscirt, and Moodoo in the inferior, or Modo or Modoga in the superior
dialect of the pure Teloogoo , all mean three.
"On entering the south gate," says Captain McKenzie, we descended by steps through
a small door to the inner court, where the temples are. In the center was the Pagoda
" of Mallecarjee, the principal deity worshipped here. It is square, and the roof is ter-
" minated by a pyramid of steps , the whole walls and roof on the outside are covered
" with brass plates, which have been gilt, but the gilding is worn off. From hence I was
" conducted to the smaller and more antient temple of Mallecarjee, where he is adored
" in the figure of a rude stone, which I could just distinguish, thro' the dark vista of the
" front buildings, on pilars. Behind this building, an immense fig tree covers with it's
❝ shade the devotees and attendants, who repose on seats placed round it's trunk, and
❝carpeted, among these was one Byragy who had devoted himself to a perpetual resi
" dence here, his sole subsistence was the milk of a cow which I saw him driving before
❝him, an orange colored rag was tied round his loins, and his naked body was besmear.
❝ed with ashes." " It appears that the Gop Mallekarjee is no other than the Lingum
" to which such reverence is paid by certain casts of Gentoos. " Captain McKenzie
adds a curious account of the manner in which the lingum was shewn to him, by means
ofa mirror reflecting the rays ofthe sun upon it, and describes it as " a small oblong
“ roundish white stone, with dark rings, fixed in a silver case.”
iv INTRODUCTION .

the high table land to the plains, and forms the termination of
that chain of hills, which, from the vicinity of the great temple at

Tripetty , winds to the north in irregular and separate ranges .

In Arrowsmith's Map of 1804, it is placed near the Nalmul hills

in Canoul (Kurnool ) under the name of Parrawottum , upon the

Kistna, just before that river takes a sudden but short direction to
the north. It is the second of the twelve Jyotee lingumas mention-

ed, as peculiarly holy , in the 38th Adhyaye of the Sheev Pooran ;

and, in the Brahmanda Pooran, it is also mentioned as the eighth

of the second class of mountains . In the year 1677, we find Seva-

jee, the celebrated founder of the Mahratta Empire, performing

penance at this shrine ; and, on the annual recurrence of the Shi-

varatree, or the night sacred to Shiva , immense crowds of people

still flock thither from all parts of Hindoostan .*

The second lingam at Caleswarum, visited occassionally by a

great concourse of pilgrims, is situated on the spot where Arrow-

smith places Callysair Ghaut on the Godavery, and is the same

that is described by Captain Blunt, in the seventh volume of the

Asiatic Researches, under the name of a Pagoda sacred to Cali,

standing on the very boundary of Telingana, where the Baun Gunga

joins the Godavery .†

see Wilkes' South of India.

Thepresent Nabob of Kurnool , a tributary of the East India Company, in whose ter-
ritory this Pagoda is situated , collects on this occasion a considerable revenue from the
pilgrims ; to secure which, he deputes an officer with a certain number of Sepoys : but,
with that intolerant bigotry, which more or less influences all who profess the faith of
Mahomed, he has resisted every application from the Hindoos to be permitted to repair this
very ancient temple, which is now fast falling to decay.
" I might now" says Captain Blunt " be said to have entered upon those parts of
" India known by the name of Telingana-The inhabitants of which are called Tel.
"
66 lingahs and speak a language peculiar to themselves- This dialect appears to bear
a strong resemblance to what in the Circars is called Gentoos-- After the heat ofthe
66 day,, and length ofthe march, our situation close to the river had a very refreshing and
C6
pleasing effect--I was highly delighted with the romantic view which the confluence
 INTRODUCTION.

I have not yet succeeded in establishing to my satisfaction the

site of the third lingum , worshipped under the name of Bheemes-

wara, which I am inclined to believe is the same as Bheema

Shenker, the sixth of the twelve Jyotee lingums, enumerated in

the Sheev Pooran , and there stated to be situated in the Deccan.
The best informed natives give a very vague account of the site of

this temple, some asserting it to be in the Northern Circars,

where it is known by the name of Dracharamum, others inthe
western Ghauts, or, as they describe it, " towards Poona"- A Tem-

ple of this name is cursorily mentioned by Dr. Francis Buchanan

as standing in the immense chain of hills which runs along the

western side of the Peninsula ; and, as this is near the southwest

junction ofthe Mahratta, Mysore, and Telingana territories , it is

perhaps the third lingum *-Be this as it may, the situations of the

other two lingums sufficiently evince the correctness of the tradi

tion which describes them as the boundaries ofthe country termed

Tri-lingum , subsequently known to the Mahommedan conquerors

of the Deccan under the modified name of Telingana ; for the north-

ern and southern limits of Telingana proper, as exhibited in our

best maps, will be found to coincide very nearly with the sites of
these two temples.

❝ofthe Godavery and Baun Gunga rivers now presented- I could see quite up to the
" fort Suruncha, and an opening beyond it likewise shewed the junction of the In-
derwotty river with the latter- The blue mountains and distant forests which termi-
" nated the prospect rendered the whole a very sublime and interesting scene..There is
66 a small Pagoda sacred to the Hindoo Goddess Cali, situated on the north east bank
" of the river, at the confluence, which imparts it's name to this passage over the Gunga
" Godavery, called Calesair Ghaut, and annually draws a greatconcourse of pilgrims, who
" from ideas of purification come to wash in the waters of the confluent streams. "

* " Dr. Buchanan's travels Vol . III Chapter XVI Page 134- " At Sheraly is a river
" called Sheraly-tari-which comes from a temple on the Ghauts that is termed Bhimes-
" ara" -N. B. Sheraly is placed by Arrowsmith to the South of Onore on the Coast
of Canara, under the name of " Serowly" -in the latitude of which the boundaries of the
three countries abovementioned meet.
 vi INTRODUCTION .

In further confirmation of this tradition , it may be noticed that

Ptolemy mentions " Triglyphon vel Trilingum regia" but places

it beyond the Ganges; and that Pliny, alluding to the same region
under it's purer name of Modogalingum‡ makes it an island in the

Ganges-"Insula in gange est magnæ amplitudinis, gentem conti-

nens unam, Modogalingum nomine."

Inaccuracies respecting situation are not uncommon in the wri-

tings of the ancients relative to Indian geography, and those

which have just been mentioned, with some other similar incon-
sistencies, may perhaps be reconciled ; by supposing that under the

name of the Ganges, either the Ganges proper, or the Godavery,

may occasionally be understood - In the Peninsula , each ofthese

rivers is known by the name of the Gunga ; they are looked upon
as sister streams ; ** the Godavery is there considered the elder of

the two, perhaps from it's being the first known to the inhabitants

of these regions ; and the Ganges proper is deemed the more holy,

apparently from the present religion of India, having originated ,

or been more early established , on its banks . The ancient books *

+ He adds, in hac galli gallinacei barbati esse dicuntur , et corvi et psittaci albi- 35
, the Sicacollum of Arrowsmith, which stands in the Masulipatam district, a
little above the mouth of the Krishna , is the Sanscrit name for a peculiar red or whitish
crow.
It has been already stated that Tri and Modoga are synonimous terms.-
** So intimate is the connexion between these two rivers, that those who carry the
the sacred water of the Ganges to the south of India, when they arrive on the banks of
the Godavery, invariably replace the water of the Ganges, evaporated on the journey,
by water taken from it's sister stream the Godavery. The whole is notwithstanding con
sidered to be the pure water of the Ganges, and this ceremony is never omitted . If it
were, it is believed, and perhaps with reason, that the water would disappear before it
could reach Rameswarum,
* In the Vayu Puran the course of the Ganges is thus described" The Ganges flows
through the Gand,harvas, Cinnaras, Yaçshas, Racshasas, Vidyad,haras, Uragas (or
large snakes ; these are tribes of demons good and bad in the hills) Calapagrámacas ,
" Paradas, Sviganas, Svasas Ceratas, Pulindas, Curavas in Curu about Tanehsar, Sam
" Bharatas, Panchalas, C'asi or Benares, Matsyas, Magadhas ( or South Behar) Brah .
" mottaras, Angas, Bangas, Calingus, " &c. Asiatic researches Vol . 8th. Essay on the
" sacred isles in the west.
 INTRODUCTION. vii

ofthe Hindoos, indeed ,bear testimony that, even in the most remote
times , these two rivers have occasionally been considered as one ;

for, in more than one place in the Poorans, the Ganges proper is
described as passing through Calinga, a country which we know

to be the region watered by the Godavery * -So far therefore as re-

gards the course of the Ganges through Calinga, described in these

ancient books, it must be the Godavery to which they allude .

From the adjective Trilinga, by a general grammatical rule‡ is

derived Tilinga, or as it is more generally written Telinga-From

Telinga also, by corruption, the Native Grammarians derive the
words Tenoogoo and Teloogoo which is the name now generally
given to the language in the country where it is spoken . -The lits
tle resemblance between Tenoogoo or Teloogoo, and Telinga, may

induce an English reader to question this derivation : but, as I

have remarked in a subsequent part of this work, great deference

is due by a foreigner to the testimony of Native Authors ; and
when it is considered that many words have passed into Teloogoo,

through the medium of the Pracrit, or other corrupted dialects of

the Sanscrit, and have been naturalized in it for ages, the little
connexion now to be traced between some original words, and
their corruptions, ought not alone to invalidate the established

etymologies ofsuccessive Grammarians . — It may not be irrelevant,

In the Brahmanda Pooran, also , the course of the Ganges is thus described . " The
❝ southern branch goes to Gadhamandana from hill to hill, from stone to stone ; it encir
" cles the forest of Gadhamandana or Deva-nandana, whence it is called Alacananda .
" it goes to the Northern lake, called Manasa, thence to the king of mountains with
" three summits, thence to the Mountains of Calinga," Asiatic Researches Vol : 8th,
66 Essay on the sacred isles in the west.
Asiatick Researches Vol. III article 3d .
. The reader is requested to refer to the conclusion of the second Chapter of the
Grammar.
Telinga is mentioned in the Brahmanda Puran as an inland Country, situated between
Casicosala or Benares , and Magadha. Vol. 8th, of the Asiatic Researches. Essayon the
acred isles in the west.
viii INTRODUCTION .

however, to observe, that Teloogoo may possibly be derived from

the adjective Teliu, fair, white, an appellation which might

with much propriety be applied to the people of Telingana, com-

pared with the neighbouring nations ; and that Tenoogoo may be
translated sweet, from Tene, honey, a denomination by no means
inapplicable to a language that has often been termed the Italian
ofthe East.

The Country known by the name of Modogalingum or Tri-

lingum appears to have been subdivided , at a very early period ,

into the Calinga and Andhra provinces. Calinga * stretched north-

wards along the coast, from the Godavery towards the Ganges ; in-
cluding those regions which are situated in the vicinity of the se-

cond lingum at Caleswarum , from which it probably took it's

name, Calingum** —Thenation is mentioned by Pliny as " Calinge

proximi mari " and " Gentes gangaridum Calingarum " and the
people and language of Telingana are still known to the inhabitants

of the Eastern islands by no other name than Caiing or Keling.

Andhra , whence the first ancient dynasty of Hindoo Emperors

appearto havederived their name , *** seems to have been an inland'

The participle ( the same as I) may be added to each of these words,

used adjectively, which thus became Tellugoo and Tenugoo respecti
vely These derivations, however, are not free from objection, for they are not in strict
conformity to the grammatical rules for Sund ,hi.
It has been already noticed that Telinga is mentioned in the Brahmunda Pooran , as
situated between Casi-cosala and Magadha, that is between Benares and Pahar proper
Calinga is mentioned in the same Pooran, as situatad between Cosala and Banga ; in other
words, between Benares andBengal proper- 8th Vol : of the Asiatic Researches . Essay on
the sacred isles of the west-This proves the two to have been at least contiguous, but the
one is generally understood to have been a subdivision of the other.-
** Caleswarum is one of the names of the God Shiva, Culingum is the same name for
the same deity, only under a different form,namely the form of the mystic lingum.
Marsdens Malay Grammar.-
*** See article VII Vol : 2d of the Asiatick Researches.
 INTRODUCTION. ix

subdivision to the south of the Godavery, greater in extent than

Calinga-Pliny, after specifying the names of several Indian na-

tions, alludes to the Andhræ as a superior people " Validior de.

" inde gens Andhra plurimis vicis XXX oppidis, quæ muris tur-

" ribusque muniuntur ; regi præbet peditum C. M. equitum M. M.

" elephantos M." - and Andhra , which is the name given to the
Teloogoo by all Sanscrit Grammarians who have written respecting
it, continues to be the current appellation of the language in many

parts of the Country.

The most ancient Teloogoo Grammarian of whom mention is

made in the native books is the sage Kunva, who is said to have

been the first that composed a treatise on the principles of the lan-
guage. It is stated that he executed this work by command of

a king of Andhra , named Andhraroyoodoo, son of Soochundra

who reigned at Siccacollum on the banks of the Krishna . On the

death of Soochundra, Andhraroyoodoo quitted the capital of Sic-

cacollum, and established his residence on the banks of the God-

avery possibly at Rajahmundry , which we afterwards find men-

tioned as the capital of the Kings of the Chalookia race. Many

+ కణ్వస్తయదాహ : ఆంధ్ర విష్ణోరను జ్ఞాకృతస్యమద్వ్యాకరణస్య

Bugs to Bro హీతి |
2011
ద్రపీ గురు మ్రో
Kunva said " Ile who speaks irreverently of my Grammar, composed by the command
of Andhra Vishtnoo, shall be considered as guilty of irreverence to his Priest."
And,hra Cowmudi.

ನಿ
శ్రీ ఆంధ్ర నాధోమహావిష్ణుని శంభుదనుజాపహా | పురాస్వాయంభువ
మమోః శా రేకలియు గేహరిః | కాకు లేరాజవర్యస్య సుచంద్ర స్వత

నూభవః| అభవత్సర్వ దేవైశ్చ వేష్టితో లోకపూజిత ః ॥

Hari The King of Andhra, the great Vishtnoo , the destroyer ofthe giant Nishumb-
hoo, formerly, in the Caliyoog of the grand period called Swayumbhoova, was born as
the son of the chief of kings Soochundra, ruling at Cacolum. And, hra Cowmudi . Then
follows the passage quoted in the note page ii.
Χ INTRODUCTION .

fabulous accounts of the feats of this prince are current in Telin-

gana, and such has been the veneration of the people for his vir-
tues, that they have deified him as an incarnation of the God

Vishtnoo, in which character he is still worshipped at the ancient

capital of Siccacollum§ near Masulipatam.-

The works of Kunva , of Audharvan Achary, and of several other

ancient Grammarians, are not now to be found . All the treatises

on Teloogoo grammar, at present extant, consist of Sanscrit com-

mentaries, on a series of concise apothegms written in Sanscrit

by a Bramin named Nannapa, or Nunniah Bhutt. The text of Nun-

niah Bhutt, asexplained by his best commentators , has been my prin-

cipal guide in the work which I now offer to the Public - but as the

illustrations, comparisons, and arrangement of these Authors are

borrowed exclusively from the language in which theycompose, and

from a system ofgrammar the most artificial perhaps ever invented

by human ingenuity, I have adhered to them in these respects, so

far only as they are calculated to assist an English Student. I have

often been obliged to deviate from them, and , in imitation of my

guides, to accommodate my illustrations & c . & c. to the grammar of
the language in which I write.

Nunniah Bhutt, the author ofthe apothegms abovementioned , un-

dertook also the herculean labor of translating the voluminous Ma-

habarut from Sanscrit into Teloogoo verse ; and although he did not
live to finish this work, which was subsequently completed by Tick-
una Somiazooloo , he succeeded in immortalizing his memory in this
part of India, by rendering this book the great standard of Teloogoo

In Teloogoo , the name of this place, and of Chicacole in the Ganjam District, are
the same ; but the two must not be confounded .
 INTRODUCTION . xi

poetry . Welearn from the introduction to * the Teloogoo Mahab-

* The following is an extract from the passage here alladed to హి ! నిజమహీ మం

డల ప్రజఁ బ్రీతిఁ చెంచుచుఁబరమండలంబులధరణిపతుల 1 నదిమి కప్పం

బులుముదముతోఁగొంచును బలిమినియ్యనిభూమివలయపతులు నుక్క

ణం గెంపుచుదిక్కులఁదనయాజ్ఞవెలిఁగించుచునువి ప్రకులము నెల్ల IC

బ్రోచుచుశరణన్నఁ గాఁచుచుభీతులన గ్ర జమ్మలకుననుగ్రహమున |

I
ఁజారుతరమహాగ్రహారంబులిచ్చుచు | దేవభోగములమహావిభూతి 1

దనరఁజేయుచిట్లుమనుమా గు F ఁడగువిష్ణు । వధనా నుఁడువఁశవధగా

నుఁడువచనము ॥ అఖిలజలధి వేలావలయితవసుమతీవనితావిభూష

ణం బైన వేఁ ౧ దేశంబునకునాయకరత్నంబునుంబోనిరాజమ హేంద్ర

పురంబు నందుమ హేంద్రమహిమతో ఁబరమానందంబునననవరతం

బుమహారాజ్యసుఖంబుననుభవింపుచుండి సకలభువనలక్ష్మీనివాసం బై
నరమ్య హర్మ్యతలంబునమంత్రిపురోహిత సేనాపతిదే వారిశ మహాప్ర
ధాన దండ నాయకసామంత విలాసినీపరివృతుం డైయపాఠశబ్దశాస్త్ర పా
రగులయిన వైయాకరణులును । భారతరామాయణ నేకపురాణ ప్రవీ
ణులయినపౌరాణికులును 1 మృదుమధురభావభాసుర సర సవచనరచ
నావిశారదులయినమహాకవులును । వివిధవితకళాసాగరవి శాహిత సమ

స్తప్రానశాస్త్ర గరిష్ఠులయినతాకికాకులును నాది గాఁ గల విద్వజ్జనంబులు

పరి వేష్టించికొలి చియుండ విద్యావిలా సందును సుఖో పవిష్ణుండును నై

యిష్టక ధావి ూదంబులంద గెలి యొక్క నాడు || || తనకులబ్రాహ్మణున

నురక్తున విరళజప హేమతత్పగువిపులశబ్ద శాసను సంహితాభ్యాసు బ్ర

హ్మాండాదినానాపురాణవిజ్ఞాననిరతుఁబాత్రు నా పస్తంబసూత్రు ముద్గల

గోత్రజాతుసద్వినుతావదాతచరితుఁలోకజ్ఞునుభయభాషా కావ్యరచ

నాభి శతాభినిజప్రతిభాభియోగ్యు | నిత్యసత్యవచనుమత్యమరాధిపా |

చార్యుసుజనునున్న సార్యుఁజూచి | పరమధమ విదుఁడు వర చళుక్యాన్వ

యా 1 భరణుఁదిట్టులనియెఁగరుణతోడ II
Affectionately protecting the inhabitants of his Empire -receiving, with satisfaction,
the tribute of foreign Sovereigns, whose kingdoms had been subdued by him, and
humbling the pride of those princes who haughtilywithheld paynent - illuminating the
corners ofthe world with his commands-protecting the whole race ofBramins -shield.
xii INTRODUCTION .

harut that Nunniah Bhutt was cotemporary with the King Vishtnoo

Vurdhana , ** of the Shiva sect and Chalookia race, who reigned at

Rajahmundry on the banks of the Godavery- Colonel Wilkes, Sin

his Historical Sketches of the South ofIndia , makes the Chalookia race

more ancient than the Cadumba kings of Bunawassi , whose dynasty

is stated to have been subverted in the second century of the christ-

an æra . If this be admitted,the works of Nunnia Bhutt may boast

of great antiquity.

Although the Teloogoo would thus appear to have been a cul-

tivated language at a very early period , it is hardly to be expected ,

ing the timidwho solicited shelter_compassionately bestowing the most excellent and ex-
tensive Agraharams on thefirst bornmen ( Bramins ) – enlightening vast wealth by ce.
lestial enjoyment- and thus following the precepts of Menu, lived Vishtnoo Vurdhana,
the increaser of his race. He, the ornament of the Chalookia family, constantly en-
joying the glory ofhis vast empire -residing, with excessive delight, and with the splen.
dour of the great Indra, in his capital of Rajahmahendra, which is the chiefgem ofthe
Vegu Empire, the great ornament of the goddess of the Earth, (encompassed by the
waters of all the oceans ) - attended, in his superb palace, which is the seat of glory of
the whole world, by Ministers, Priests, Generals, Chamberlains , Counsellors, Magis-
trates, neighbouring princes, and beautiful damsels - and surrounded by Grammari
ans, skilled in the boundless doctrines of articulate sounds, Historians, acquainted
with the Bharata , Ramayanum , and all the Poorans, Great Poels, celebrated for
clothing the most pleasing and gentle images in the sweetest verse, famous Philoso.
phers, skilled in all the sublime sciences , and diving into the ocean of abstruse rea.
soning, andmanyotherlearned men - amusing himself with study- deeplyinterested in a
greeable history, and experienced in the rules ofjustice - sitting, with delight, thus af-
fectionately addressed the venerable and virtuous Nannapa, the Brahmin and affecti
onate adherent of his family, incessantly devoted to sacrifice and meditation , author
of a copious grammar, skilled in the Sumhetas, fully versed in various Poorans, such
as the Bramkanda &c. a meritorious man, thefollower of the aphorisms ofApastamba,
born in the gotram of Mudgola, commended by virtuous men, pure in his actions, ex-
perienced in wordly affairs, in wisdom like Broohusputee, celebrated for composing
poetry in both languages, famed for genius, a speaker of truth which is everlasting.
The king then proceeds to request that he will translate the Mahabharut.
** This prince must not be confounded with another Vishtnoo Vurdhana, who reigned
in the eleventh century of our era , but who was neither of the Chalookia race, nor of the
Shiva sect; he was a Telinga king of the Bellal dynasty, and was converted from the Jain
religion to the sect of Vishtnoo, by the famous Rama Anuju chary, the head of the Shri
Vaishnavas or Ayengars, one of the three great sects into which the Hindoos of the Pen.
insula are now divided.
Page 12 of Vol . 1st.
 INTRODUCTION xiii

among the different political and religious convulsions which have

so often violently agitated the Deccan , that many of the productions

of so remote an age should have reached these times -Accordingly,

with the exception of the abovementioned works of Nunnia Bhutt,
and some books composedtowards the close of the twelfth century,

during the reign of Pertaub Rood roo, one of the last kings of the

Bellal dynasty, which succeeded that of Cadumba, we find that near-

ly all the Teloogoo works now current in the country were written
after the dissolution of the ancient government of Telingana, and
the establishment of the more modern empire of Vidianagara .

On the capture of Warunkul,f the capital of the Bellal Kings

of Telingana, by the Pattans, A. D. 1323, certain officers of these
ancient princes are stated to have emigrated to the southern pro-

vinces, where they founded the celebrated city of Vidianagara or

Vizianagara, the Bijanagur of Arrowsmith, and established a new

dynasty of twenty princes* known by the name of Raya or Roya-

loo, who gradually extended their sway all over the South of In-

+ This word is pure Teloogoo, 2 , and signifies a single stone, a solid rock.
or perhaps 2e a touch stone.

*I am indebted to the friendship of that able and distinguished officer Colonel McKenzie
ofthe Madras Enginers, now Surveyor General of India,for the following translation of an
extract from the GutpurteeManuscript in his valuable and extensive collection, containing,
in the form of a prophecy, a chronological account of these kings. Numerous inscriptions,
and grants ofland, in the possesion of Colonel McKenzie confirm the correctness of this
account.

A S. JAD. } Y.MD
12581336 | 1 In the Salleevahan Sakum 1258 , in the year Daatoo , on the 2d off
Vysakum month , on the new moon, Hurryhur Raya will com
mence his reign at Anagoondy ........
The whole of his reign will be… 14
1272 1350 2 After him , his brother BookaRoyaloo will succeed in that king-
........ ...
dom and will reign... [ 29 ] 8
xiv INTRODUCTION.

dia , and reigned from the commencement of the fourteenth to the

close of the sixteenth century. Of these kings, the most celebra-
A.S.A.D. Y.M.D.
13011379 3 Next Hurrykur Royaloo the second will rule .....
13231401 4 After him Keejaya Booka Royaloo will rule .... 17
13101418 5 Upon his death Palia Booka Royaloo will rule 16
13561431 6 After which Gunda Dava Rogaloo will rule ...... 20 "
1376115 After him Rajak Sakar Royaloo will rule .......
7 9
13761155 8 After that Veejayooloo will rule
13781456 9 Proudha or PratapaDuza Royalao will rule ...
13991477 10 After him Veera Royaloo will rule 4
14031481 11 After him Mallicar Royaloo will govers
11091 487 12 Remachundra Royaloo will next rule
14101488 13 Teeroopacha Royaloo will govern ... 26
Narasinga Royaloo will rule .....
14121-190 | 14 5166
66
11171495 15 After him Narasa Royaloo will rule (including 5 years in the 13
1-126 1504 16Lame of) His son Feera Narsimha Royaloo from the Cycle
year Raktachee A. S. 1426……..
1430150917 The second son of Narasa Royaloo, named Krishna Royaloo
will rule from the Cycle year Sookla of the Visaka month... 2166
14521530 18. From the Cycle year Vecerooty Achoota Dava Royaloo will
reign... 12 66
1464 1512 19 From thence Saleca Timma Rauze......
From the beginning of the Cycle year Scobacroot in the Jasta
month, Rama Royaloo will rule 22 years in the name of……….. 221 66
1186 1554 20 Seduseevoo Rajaloo and keeping him in his possession , The
Kingdom of Yeejeyanagur will then end with Rama Royaloo,

The Country will be-in great confusion then for....... 66 66

1451 1569
1451156921 In the Cycle year Pramodoota Teroomal Royaloo will establish
imself as King, at Panooĝonda, and will rule .………………
1494 157222 His son Sree Runga Royaloo will then reign from the Cycle
14 66
year Angeerasa of the 10th of Vysakam ....
After which, from the Cycle Paardeva of the 10th of Mangum
5507 1585 23 of the full moon Fencataputty Royaloo will rule ...………. 28 $ 15

After him, oftheKings ofthe Chundra race none will remain ; and
foreign kings will rule the land , deriving, their authority from
no legal right.....
1536161424 First Chicks Raguloo will rule..
|15521630 25 After him Raina Rauze changing his true name, to that of
Ramodava Rayel for...... 15
After this the Country will be in great disorder for some time
and prodigies and portentous omens will appear between the
year Bahcodanya and Nundana .... 15 ..

(Here the Account terminates in a prophetical annunciation of a Deliverer of the Hin

doo Race. From circumstances , observes Colonel McKenzie, we may infer that this ac
count was written A. D. 1630. )
 INTRODUCTION . XY

ted was Krishna Royaloo, a prince who reigned during the ear
lier part of the sixteenth century. He is highly renowned in Te-
lingana for his piety in repairing the numerous temples in the
*
Carnatick, and for the great personal bravery he displayed in the

course of his extensive conquests in the Peninsula, but chicfly for

his munificent encouragement of Teloogoo literature.

A great number of books, composed during the reign of Krish-

na Royaloo, are still to be found in the libraries of the present
Polygars, of whom many in the Northern Districts , as far as Nel.
lore, and several in the South, are descended from the former offi-
cers of the Vidianagara government : but the intolerant zcal of the

Mahommedans, whose irruptions into the South of India termina-

ted in the overthrow of the Vidianagara Empire, has left of the

more ancient Teloogoo works little else remaining than the name.§

The works still extant, however, are sufficiently numerous and

various to evince the great degree of refinement to which the Te

loogoo has attained. Few languages will be found more copious,

more nervous, or more regular in construction, and it may boast,

in a peculiar manner, of great elegance ofexpression , and melody

of sound . Under the fostering auspices ofthe British Government,
it is confidently hoped that the Teloogoo may recover that place
which it once held among the languages of the East, and that the

* By an inscription on the great tower erected over the grand entrance into the fa.
mous Shiva temple at Conjeveram, which is supposed to be the highest building of the
kind in India, we find that it boasts of this prince as it's founder, --

§ Having heard that a number of poems, engraved on some thousand sheets of copper,
had been preserved by the pious care of a family of Bramins in the temple on the sacred
hill at Tripetty, I deputed a Native for the purpose of examining them ; but , with the
exception of a treatise on Grammar, of which a copy was taken, the whole collection
was found to contain nothing but voluminous hymns in praise of the diety.
 UCTION
xvi INTROD .

liberal policy of the Legislature + may be successful in renewing,

among the Natives of Telingana, that spirit of literature and

science, which formerly so happily prevailed among them, and

still so much endears to their remembrance the days ofthe most
enlightened of their Hindoo Rulers .

Nearly the whole body of Teloogoo literature consists ofPoetry,

written in what may be termed the superior dialect of the language;

but so different is this from the inferior or colloquial dialect, in

common use among all classes of the people, that even to the learn-
ed, the use ofcommentaries is indispensable for the correct under-

standing of many of their best works. This peculiarity of two

dialects is common to theTeloogoo, with theTamil and theKarna
taca. In the course of this work, I propose to give all the rules for
the superior dialect, as being that from which the other is derived ,
but I shall carefully notice the peculiarities of the common dialect.
The reader will bear in mind that in conversation and official busi-

ness , the inferior is used to the entire exclusion of the superior dia-
lect, and that in all books or studied compositions, a contrary rule

obtains.
Such as have acquired a knowledge of the Teloogoo language

merely with a view to colloquial intercourse with the people, or

to the transaction of official business, and have confined their

studies exclusively to the inferior dialect, may accuse me of enter .

ing on an unprofitable and unnecessary task, in treating ofthe

The following is an extract from the act of the British Parliament to which I allude.
" And be it further enacted , that it shall be lawful for the Governor General in Coun-
" cil to direct, that out of any surplus which may remain of the rents revenues and
" profits, arising from the said Territorial acquisitions, after defraying the expenses of the
<< Military, Civil, and Commercial Establishments, and paying the Interest of the Debt,
" in manner herein-after provided , a sum of not less than one Lack of Rupees in each
CC
year shall be set apart and applied to the revival and improvement of literature, and
" the encouragement of the learned Natives of India, and for the introduction and pro-
" motion of a knowledge of the sciences among the Inhabitants of the British Territories
❝ in India.
 INTRODUCTION . xvii

other, which, in their estimation , may be deemed altogether foreign

to the Teloogoo. An attentive examination of the two may possi-

bly lead to a very different conclusion : at all events, as this work
is intended as much to enable the student to understand the rules,

which regulate the classsical compositions ofthe Natives, as to teach

him to speak or write the common Teloogoo, I have deemed it my

duty to follow the Native Grammarians by tracing the language

to it's original sources in the superior dialect- at the same time,

I have not neglected it's more useful branches in the inferior dia-
lect, which, as being vulgar, Native authors have considered be-
neath the notice of the learned .

The Teloogoo is spoken with the greatest purity in the Northern

Circars, and with much of it's native simplicity by the Ratsawars,

Velma vars, and other superior classes in those districts- more con-
versant with arms, however, than with books, the Ratsawars * and

Velmawars are in general ignorant of the principles of their own

tongue . Indeed the three inferior classes ofTelingana, unlike their
neighbours of theTamil Nation , seen to have abandoned the culture
of their language, with every other branch of literature and science,

to the sacred tribe. The Vussoochuritru is the only Teloogoo work

of note not composed by a Bramin . But, with the manners and

habits of their ancestors, the Velmawars , Comtees, and Soodra

casts, descended from the aborigines of the country, retain a great

deal ofthe original language ofTelingana , and are more sparing in

the use of Sanscrit words than the Bramins.

The affecting tale of the Zemindar of Boobily, related by Orme, is one of many that
might be quoted, in elucidation of the nice sense of honor, and romantic bravery, inhe
rent in this fine race of men. Our want of sufficient attention to their habits and cus-
toms, rather than any callous disregard for their prejudices, has occasionally driven
others of this tribe to similar acts of self destruction, which are much to be deprecated,
and which, indelibly imprinted on the minds of the people, materially affect the popu
larity of our Government.
xviii INTRODUCTION.

It has been very generally asserted , and indeed believed , that

the Teloogoo has it's origin in the language of the Vedums, and

many of the most eminent oriental scholars have given their au-
thority in support of this opinion . It is not without much defer-

ence, therefore, that I venture publicly to state my inquiries to have

led me to a contrary conclusion ; but I do so with the less hesitation ,

as I find myself supported by the concurrent evidence ofall Native

Authors who have ever written on the subject of the Teloogoo

language.

On this, and on several other material points connected with the

structure of the Teloogoo, I regret that my sentiments should be

entirely at variance with those of so celebrated an orientalist as Dr.
Carey, one of the learned Professors in the College of Fort William ,

to whom the Public are indebted for a very copious Grammar cf

the Sanserit language, and for a series of works on the elements of

the spoken dialects of India. In the preface to a Telinga Gram-

mar, which issued from the press after the present work had been

completed and submitted to Government, Dr. Carey writes as fol-

lows, " The languages of the South of India i. e . the Telinga,

" Karnata, Tamil, Malayala, and Cingalese, while they have the
66 same origin with those ofthe North" (viz . the Sanscrit) differ

" greatly from them in other respects : and especially in having

a large proportion of words the origin of which is unascertained ;

❝or, as he afterwards terms them, words current in the country,

66
S , of which the derivation is uncertain .”

While I coincide in opinion with Dr. Carey that, " among these

" five languages, the Telinga appears to be the most polished ,

and though confessedly a very difficult language, it must be

numbered with those which are the most worthy of cultivation ,
 INTRODUCTION . xvix

" it's variety of inflection being such as to give it a capacity of ex-

pressing ideas with a high degree of facility, justness, and ele-

gance" ; with deference, I submit that he has given an errone-

ous view ofthe structure and derivation of the Teloogoo. In com-

mon with every other tongue now spoken in India , modern Teloo-

goo abounds with Sanserit words, perhaps it has a greater propor-

tion of them than any of the other southern dialects ; nevertheless

there is reason to believe that the origin of the two languages is

altogether distinct,

With the exception of a few letters peculiar to Sanscrit words,

and evidently taken from the Nagree alphabet, the round and

flowing characters ofthe Teloogoo bear no resemblance to the square

Devanagree : and even if the Teloogoo alphabet were found to be
derived from the Nagree, it would only prove that the people of

Telingana had borrrowed the invention of a more civilized nation .

The origin oftheir language might still be as different from that

oftheir alphabet, as the origin of our present Roman characters

from that of our Saxon words.

It has already been mentioned that all the Native Teloegoo

Grammars are written by Bramins, in the Sanserit tongue ; and

that their arrangement of the alphabet &c their illustrations, and

their comparisons, are necessarily borrowed from the language in

which they write. This circumstance might justify the supposition

that the Bramins were the first who cultivated the Teloegoo, and

brought it under fixed rules : but it cannot be urged in proof of

any radical connexion between the Teloogoo and the Sanscrit.

It has also been noticed that, in speaking the Teloogoo, the Sood-

ras use very few Sanscrit words : among the superior classes of
Vysyus, and pretenders to the Rajah cast, Sanscrit terms are
 xx INTRODUCTION .

used only in proportion to their greater intimacy with the Bramins,

and their books ; and, when we find even such Sanscrit words as

these classes do adopt, pronounced by them in so improper and

rude a manner as to be a common jest to the Bramins, who, at the

same time, never question their pronounciation of pure Teloogoo

words, Ithink we may fairly infer it to be probable at least that these
Sanscrit terms were originally foreign to the language spoken by

the great boly of the people.

Some Native Grammarians+maintain that, before theKing And

hraroyadoo * established his residence on the banks of the Goda-

very, the only Teloogoo words were those peculiar to what is

emphatically termed the pure Teloogoo , now generally named the

language of the land, which they consider coeval with the people,
or as they express it " created by the God Brimha " The followers

of this prince, saythey, for the first time began to adopt Sanscrit

terms with Teloogoo terminations , and by degrees corruptions from

the Sanscrit crept into the language, from the ignorance of the peo-

ple respecting the proper pronounciation of the original words,

+ See thẻ Adhurvana Výacúrnum , as given in the Audhra Cowmudi. I I IS N

తృమాలాపాస్తత్కాలీనాహ రేఖ నాటాః । కా లేనమహతా సర్వంత

స్సమం స్వల్పబుద్ధినిః ' అస్ఫుటోచ్చార్యమాణం సత్తద్భవంచేతి సమ్మ

త
తం ' వికష వ్యత్యయాభ్యాంచపాదాధారా క్తి విశేషతః ! తద్భవా ఇ

తిశథ్య దేశా లేనమహతాసమాః | బ్రహ్మణానిర్మితావాచఃపూర్వ

మాంధ్రశరుహణ రేః | అచ్ఛా ఇతిచరథ్య నేను ప్కృద్ధాతుసమన్వి రాజ

The adherents of And,hraVisht noo (before mentioned) who then resided on the banks of
the Godavery spoke Tutsama words. (Sanscrit derivatives) In the course of time, these
words, not being properly articulated by the unlearned, by the change or obliteration of
letters, or by being contracted, a fourth, or a half, became Tudbhacas. (Sanscrit cor-
ruptions) Those words consisting ofnouns, verbals, and verbs , created by the God Brim-
ha, before the time of Hari , the Lord of And,hra, are called Uch, ha. (pare)
This is the prince who is now worshiped as a divinity at Siccacollum on the river
Krishna , and who was the patron of Kunva, the first Teloogoo Grammarian.
 INTRODUCTION . xxi

This would imply that the nation still retain some faint remem-
brance ofthose times,in which their language existed independent

of the Sanscrit ; and it is certain that every Teloogoo Grammari-

an, from the days of Nunnia Bhutt to the present period , considers
the two languages as derived from sources entirely distinct; for each
commences his work by classing the words of the language under
four seperate heads, which they distinguish bythe respective names

of ES language ofthe land, Sanserit derivatives,

3 Sanscrit corruptions, and provincial terms .

To these, later authors have added foreign words or

those from other lands.

As this arrangement is essential to a proper illustration ofthe struc-

ture of the Teloogoo language, it will be adhered to in the following

work. Of the different classes of words specified above, the three

first only are mentioned in the Telinga Grammar by Dr. Carey; the
first is there stated to comprize " words current in the country of
" whichthe derivation is uncertain", a"large proportion " ofwhich

are allowed to be included in the language; the second is stated to

contain "pure Sungskrista words;" and the third " words derived

" from the Sungskrita, but written and pronounced differently ."

The words included in the first class, which I have denominated

the language of the land, are not only a" large proportion " of words,
but the most numerous in the language, and the model by which
those included in the other classes are modified and altered , from

the different languages to which they originally belong. Why the

origin of this class of terms is supposed to be unascertained has not
been stated ; nor can I conceive how so erroneous a conclusion

could have been adopted ; for the name given to them by all San-
scrit Grammarians, by the whole body of the people, and by
xxii INTRODUCTION.

Dr. Carey himself, at once points out their derivation . This name is
దేశ్యము, a noun used either as a substantive or an adjective, in the
former sense denoting a country or land, in the latter, in which it
is here used , implying that which belongs to the country or land ;
it marks the words in question , not as merely" current in the coun-

try,"but as the growth and produce of the land ; it would be diffi-

cult to define more precisely the origin of any words, and to this
class must we look for the pure Teloogoo -for the true language of
the land.

The second class of words I have termed Sanscrit derivatives ,

and I prefer this denomination to that of " pure Sungskrita words"
given to it by Dr. Carey ; for although the words included in it con-
tain the crude forms of pure Sanscrit words , they cannot appear

in Teloogoo in their original shape, but invariably assume termina-

tions or undergo changes peculiar to the pure Teloogoo , or language

ofthe land.

The third class of words which is generally mentioned by Dr.

Carey as " derived from the Sungskrita," I have named Sanscrit

corruptions; it consists of words which have passed intoTeloogoo , ei-

ther directly from the Sanscrit, or through the medium of some
of it's corrupted dialects , such as the Pracrit, and which , in order

to be assimilated to the language ofthe land, have undergone radi-

cal alterations, by the elision , insertion , addition , or subtraction of
letters . These changes have been sometimes carried so far, that
it is difficult to trace any connexion between the adulterated word

and it's original in Sanscrit.

In the course of this work, it will be obvious to the Sanscrit scholar

that the declension ofthe noun , by particles or words added to it-

the use of a plural pronoun (3 ) applicable to the first and

 INTRODUCTION . xxiii

second persons conjointly-the conjugation of the affirmative

verb- the existence of a negative aorist, a negative imperative and

other negative forms in the verb- the union of the neuter and femi-

nine genders in the singular , and of the masculine and feminine gen-

ders in the plural , ofthe pronouns and verbs- and the whole body
of the syntax , are entirely unconnected with the Sanscrit ; while the

Tamil and Karnataca scholar will at once recognize their radical

connexion with each of these languages . The reader will find all
words denoting the different parts ofthe human frame , the various

sorts of food or utensils in common use among the Natives , the

several parts of their dress, the compartments of their dwellings ,

the degrees ofaffinity and consanguinity peculiar to them, in short all

terms expressive of primitive ideas or of things necessarily named

in the earlier stages of society, to belong to the pure Teloogoo or

language of the land . It is true, (so mixed have the two langua-

ges now become) that Sanscrit derivatives orcorruptions may, with-

out impropriety , be occasionally used to denote some ofthese . This,
however, is not common , the great body of Sanscrit words admitted

into the language consists of abstract terms, and of words connected

with science , religion , or law, as is the case, in a great degree , with

the Greek and Latin words incorporated with our own tongue :
but even such Sanscrit words as are thus introduced into Teloogoo

are not allowed to retain their original forms, they undergo changes ,
and assume terminations and inflections unknown to the Sanscrit ,

and, except as foreign quotations , are never admitted into Teloogoo

until they appear in the dress peculiar to the language ofthe land.

This briefnotice of the structure of the Teloogoo seemed necessary,

in order to explain the principles on which the following chapters are

nouns.
+ The reader is requested to refer to the irregular దేశ్యము
& S
xxiv INTRODUCTION .

founded : the further consideration of the subject I leave to others,

as the prolonged discussion of it is foreign to a work of this nature,

Iam inclined , however, to believe that the Teloogoo will be found to

have it's origin in a source different from the Sanscrit, a source com-
mon perhaps to the Teloogoo, with the superior dialects oftheTamil
and Karnataca , But the introduction of Sanscrit words into this

language must have taken place at so remote a period , as to be now

almost beyond the reach of inquiry. With the religion of the Bra-
mins, the people of Telingana could not fail to adopt much of the

language of that extraordinary tribe; their constant intercourse with

each other for a long series of years has necessarily confirmed this
intermixture of language, and it must be admitted that the Teloogoo

has been as much improved by adopting an indefinite number of

words from the Sanscrit, as our own tongue has been ameliorated by
borrowing from the more refined languages of Greece and Rome.

Having concluded the few introductory remarks which I had to

offer to the reader in explanation of the plan of my work, I avail
myself of this occasion to make my public acknowledgements for
the assistance with which I have been favoured in the course of it's

progress .

To my friend Mr. Stokes of the civil service on this establish-

ment, who did me the favour to peruse the manuscript before it
was submitted to the Government,I owe many valuable suggestions ;

and I am under particular obligations to my colleagues in the Board

of Superintendence for a most laborious and critical examination
of the whole work. Mr. Ellis and Archdeacon Mousely are in a

special manner entitled to my thanks ; for their criticisms enabled

me to correct many imperfections that had otherwise escaped my

notice.
 INTRODUCTION . XXV

In examining the principles inculated by the best native gram-

marians , I was assisted by my Teloogoo instructor Woodiagherry

Vencatanarrain Ayah , a young bramin ofsuperior intelligence and

remarkable acquirements, who, by his own merits alone, subse-

quently rose to the situation ofHead English master at the College

of Fort St. George, and lately to the more honorable office of In-

terpreter to the Supreme Court of Judicature at the Presidency.

He generally sat by me while I wrote the notes from which this
Grammar has been compiled , and I may therefore be said to have

availed myself of his aid and advice throughout the work.

I have only further to add that on all intricate points of gram-

mar I have invariably consulted the learned Pundit Putabhi Rama

Sastry Head Sanscrit and Teloogoo master at the College, and where

I found the native grammarians at variance, have been regula-

ted chiefly by his opinions, in attempting to reconcile their differ-

ences, or in selecting that authority to which the preference has

been given.
6
 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.

In support ofwhat I have ventured to advance, in the preceding intro-

duction, on the subject of the structure and derivation of the Teloogoo
language, it is peculiarly gratifying to me to be allowed to quote the high
authority of my friend Mr. Francis W: Ellis, at the head of the Board

of Superintendence for the College of Fort St. George, us contained in

the following obscrvations with which he has favoured me. The know-
ledge which this Gentleman possesses of the various spoken dialects of the
Peninsula, added to his acquirements as a Sanscrit scholar, peculiarly
qualify him to pronounce ajudgement on this subject.

The real affiliation ofthe Telugu language appears not to have been
known to any writer, by whom the subject has been noticed . Dr. Carey
in the preface to his Sanscrit Grammar says- " The Hindoostanee and the
Tamil, with the languages of Gujarat and Malayala, are evidently derived
from the Sanscrit, but the two former are greatly mixed with foreign
words. The Bengalee , Orissa, Maratta, Kurnata, and Telinga languages
are almost wholly composed of Sanscrit words.” In the preface to a
Grammar of the Telugu lately published by him he, also, says-" The
languages of India are principally derived fromthe Sanserit" ; &c. " The
structure of most of the languages in the middle and north of India, is
generally the same, the chief difference in them lies in the termination
2 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION .

of the nouns and verbs, and in those deviations from Sanscrit orthography
which custom has gradually established in the countries where they are
spoken. The languages ofthe south of India, i . e. The Telinga, Karnatic,
Tamil, Malayala , and Cingalese, while they have the same origin with those
of the north, differ greatly from them in other respects : and especially in
having a large proportion of words, the origin of which is unascertain-
ed . " --To this testimony Dr. Wilkins adds the weight of his authority,
when he says in the preface to his Grammar of the Sanscrit. ” the Tamil,
the Telugu, the Carnatic, the Malabar, together with that " (the idiom)
"of the Marratta states and of Gujarat so abound with Sanscrit, that
scarcely a sentence can be expressed in either of them without it's assis-
tance." Mr. Colebrooke, also, in his dissertation on the Sanscrit and Pra-.
crit languagesin the 7th Volume of the Asiatick Researches, though he has
not given so decided an opinion , yet, by including these under the general
term Pracrit, appropriate only to dialects of Sanscrit derivation and con-
struction, and by the tendency ofhis remarks, appears to favor the received
notion oftheir origin ; he states indeed in express terms that the Tamil ( which
word he writes Támla, deducing it from Támraparnà the Sanscrit name of

the river ofTirunelvéli) is written in a character which is greatly corrupted

from the present Dévanagari, and that both the " Carnata " and Telingana
characters are from the same source. In arrangement the two latter, which
are nearly the same, certainly followthe Nagari, but in the form of the let-
ters, mode of combination, and other particulars, there is no resemblance;
and the Tamil is totally different, rejecting all aspirates, and having many
sounds which cannot be expressed by any alphabet in which the Sanscrit
is written. ?
It is the intent of the following observations to shew that the statements
contained in the preceding quotations are not correct ; that neither the Ta-
mil, the Telugu, nor any oftheir cognate dialects are derivations from the
Sanscrit ; that the latter, however it may contribute to their polish, is not
necessary for their existence ; and that they form a distinct family of lan-

guages, with which the Sanscrit has , in latter times especially, intermixed ,.
but with which it has no radical connexion.
 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION . 3

The members, constituting the family of languages, which may be ap-

propriately called the dialects of Southern India, are the high and low
Tamil ; the Telugu, grammatical, and yulgar ; Carna'taca or Cannadi,
ancient and modern ; Malayalima or Malayalam, which, after Paulinus a
St. Bartholomæo maybe divided into Sanscrit ( Grandonico- Malabarica)
and common Malayalam , though the former differs from the latter only
in introducing Sanscrit terms and forms in unrestrained profusion; and the
Tuluva, the native speech of that part of the country to which in our maps
the name of Canara is confined .

Besides these, there are a few other local dialects of the same derivation ,
such as the Codugu , a variation of the Tuluva spoken in the district of
that name called by us Coorg ; the Cingalese, Maharastra and the Od-
diya, also, though not of the same stock, borrow many of their words and
idioms from these tongues. A certain intercommunication of language may
indeed, always be expected from neighbouring nations, however dissimilar
in origin, but it is extraordinary that the uncivilized races of the north of
India should inthis respect bear any resemblance to the Hindus ofthe south ;
it is, nevertheless, the fact, that, if not ofthe same radical derivation, the
language ofthe mountaineers of Rajmahal abounds in terms common to
the Tamil and Telugu .

The Telugu, to which attention is here more specially directed , is form-

ed from it's own roots, which, in general , have no connexion with the San-
scrit, nor with those ofany other language, the cognate dialects of Southern
India, the Tamil, Cannadi &c excepted , with which, allowing forthe occa-
sional variation of consimilar sounds, they generally agree : the actual dif-
ference inthe three dialects here mentioned is in fact to be found only in the
affixes used in the formation of words from the roots ; the roots them-
selves are not similar merely, but the same.

The roots ofthe Telugu Language, like those of the Sanscrit, are mostly
the themes of verbs, but they may often be used in the crude form, or with
a single affix, as nouns or adjectives, and many of them are used only in
'
the latter acceptation; thus x , as a noun, signifies a blow with the fist
 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.
4

to strike with the fist ; thus also ,

and is the root of the verb x
nadu, with the affix & ca, 35 nadaca , signifies , as a noun, a step,
progress, conduct , manner , and is the root ofthe verb 5 nudava-

damu to walk. In this use of the roots, all the dialects differ ; the root that

is used as a noun only in Tamil and Telugu may serve as the theme of a
verb in Cannadi , and vice versa : thus in Tamil the terஅக்க
ms றை accarei
வில்ல ல
is used as a noun in such impersonals sentences as 25655 wald
yenac accaveiyillei , it is not a want to me - I do not require it ; in

Cannadi అక్కఱియి accariy is the root of the verb అక్క ఆయుడు

accariyudu to be desired - to be endeared to. It frequently happens , also,
that a term occurs which cannot be referred to any root of the tongue to
which it belongs , though it is readily traced to a radical in one of the

cognate dialects ; thus in the compound UX agupadudamu ,

(which signifies in Telugu to take in the sense in which it is used in such
sentences as అడిధూమముగానాకు తన పడింది adi dhimamugd nácu
agupadindi . I take it to be smoke - దాని } న థరా మునాళ గ పడ లేదు

dánikin arthamu nác'agapada lédu, 1 do not take, or comprehend, the

sense of it, but in Tamil to take in general, scize, obtain, as Owe
#86UUL_I_Scurivi yenuc' agapattadu , I have caught the bird) the

first member X aga or & agu has no separate meaning in Telugu ,

in Tamil agam signifies the interior and, in both languages , the

rootpadu to suffer.

To shew that no radical connexion exists between the Sanscrit and Te-

lugu, ten roots in alphabetic order, under the letters A, C, P, and V,

have been taken from the common dhátu- málà or list of roots, and with

them have been compared ten Telugu roots , under the same letters taken
from a Telugu dhátu - málâ compiled by Patáb hi -ráma Sástri, the Head
Sanscrit and Telugu Master at the College ; these will be found în
the following lists , the mere inspection of which will shew, that, among
the forty Telugu roots , not one agrees with any Sanscrit root. To facili-
tate a comparison of the several languages treated on, each ofwhich has a
distinct alphabet, the Roman character is used throughout : the ortho-
 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION. 5

graphy is generally that of Sir Wm. Jones, as explained in the 1st Volume

of the Asiatic Researches, but the grave accent is used instead ofthe acute,
to mark a naturally long syllable when final or formed by Sandhi, and
K, is occasionally substituted for C, before i and e in words belonging to
the southern dialects only : other variations of trifling importance will
be observed. -
ROOTS UNDER THE LETTER
SANSCRIT. TELUGU.
A.

Ac to mark - move - move tor- Accalu to contract the abdominal

tuously. muscles.
· Agalu to separate-break.
Ag to move move tortuously.

Anca)
or to mark. Aggu to worship.
Anga)
Agh to move - despise - begin- Aggalu to be insufferable - be exces-
move quickly. sive.

Agha to sin, Ats to give by compulsion- incur

debt .
Ach to honour- serve. Antu to touch or stick - adhere

anointthe head.

Anch to move - speak unintelli- Adangu to be destroyed - submit - be

gibly - speak intelligibly. subducd, or suppressed.
Adaru to shine-shoot at.
Aj to throw- move- shine.

At or Ath to move. Adalu to weep bitterly.

Ad to occupy - undertake . Adu to slap .

ROOTS UNDER THE LETTER

C.
Cac to hint desire - go. Caccu to vomit.

Cacc to laugh. Cats toplay dice, chess &c.

Crats to want .
Cach to laugh.
Cattu to tie-build - become pregnant.
Cacc,b to laugh.
 6 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.

SANSCRIT. TELUGU.

Cag to move. Cadugu, to wash.

Cadangu
Cach to tie-shine. or to swell, boil.
Canangu
Catacu
Caj to hiccup. or to lick as a dog.
Cadagu
Cat to move - skreen-rain, Cadaru to call aloud- exclaim.
Cath to fear - recollect anxi Cadalu to move or shake.
ously
Cad to eat rejoice- divide-pre-
Cadi to approach - obtain.
serve.
ROOTS UNDER THE LETTER
P.

Pagalu ,
Pach to cook - explain- stretch . or reak makeforked.
to break-
Pangalu
Pad to shine - move. Panchu to divide into shares - send
·
away appoint - divide by
figures,
Path to speak. Pattu to seize -touch - begin - knead
the limbs - understand - con-
tain - unite intimately , as co-
lour with that which is co-
loured, &c .

Pan to traffic - praise. Padu to suffer - fall.

Pat to rule - move. Pandu to reprove-produce-lic down .

Path
1. to move. Padayu to obtain.
Pad to move-be fixed. Pantangu to vow.

Pan to praise. Padaru to act precipitately · speak

nonsense-threaten,
Pamb to move. Pannu to join steers to a plough
prepare.
Parbb to move. Panatsu to send- employ.
 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION . 7

ROOTS UNDER THE LETTER

SANSCRIT. TELUGU.
V.
Vaga
Vak to be crooked - move. · or to grieve -pretend grief- con-
sult.
Vagu
Vag to be lame. Vagir to speak deceitfully - bark as
a dog.
Vach to speak - order. Vangu to stoop .
Vaj to move- renew or repair. Vats to come.

Vat to surround - share -speak. Vantsu to bind a pour water from

a vessel.
Vata to surround- share. Vrats to divide .
Vanta to share . Vatu to become lean.

Vath to go alone-be able. Vattu to dry up .

Vad to shine - surround. Vattru to shine.

Van to sound. Vaddu to serve food. }

To shew that an intimate radical connection exists between the Telu-

gu and other dialects of Southern India, fifteen roots have been taken
in alphabetical order from the Dhátu-mála above mentioned, under the
first vowel and first ,consonant, with which the correspondent roots ofthe
Tamil and Cannadi are compared : the Tamil roots are from a list com-
piled by the Head Tamil Master at the College,, compared with the Sadur
Agarádi and other dictionaries and the Cannadi roots are from an old list
ex plained in Sanscrit ,
TELUGU. CANNADI. TAMIL.
Accarey to feel affection
for love.
This root, in Telugu accara and in
Tamil accarei, is used as a noun,
only in these languages.
Accalu to contract the Accalu as in Telugu.
abdominal mus-
cles:
This root is never used without
the formative syllable intsu in Te-
lugu, isu in Can, which gives an '
active sense to primitive roots, and
a causal sense to the derivative
themes ofVerbs.
 8 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION .

TELUGU. CANNADI. TA MIL.

Aggalu to separate. Agalu as in Telugu- Agal as in Telugu-also,

also , to become to keep at a dis-
extended · to ·
tance pass be-
extend-lament. yond.
Agavu. to call, play.
.......
Agalu to dig …... …………………. Agazh as in Cannadi in
which language

the Tamil zh is
usually convert-
ed into í
Agey to be afraid - be Agei to beat - cut - break
pleased. in two.

Aggalu to become in-

sufferable-be
excessive.
Aggu to worship. Ahgu to decrease.
Angar to gape.
Ats to give by compul- Atchu as in Telugu,
sion - incur debt. The consonant in this root, which
agrees withthe first ofthe second
series ofconsonants inthe Sanscrit
alphabet,is pronounced tsa and
cha in Telugu ; cha in Can. and sa,
sha, cha, and ja in Tam. accord-
ing, as is it final or medial , single
or double.

Anju to be alarmed- Anju asin Can.

fear -frighten.
Antu to touch - stick Antu tojoin - stick toge- Antu to join - adjoin
or adhere- a- ther. approach - befit.
noint the head. This root, spelt with the same
letters in the three dialects, is in
Tamil pronounced Andu.
Adangu to be destroy-
Adagueto be en
contain
closed Adangu as in Can.
d·
Anangu Sed - submit- be or
subdued or subdued or
Aanugu Adangu suppressed -
suppressed.
submit-recede.
 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION . 9

TELUGU. CANNADI. TAMIL.

Adaru to shine-shoot at. Adaru to ascend- climb Adaru to throng - press

In the second sense it takes the ride.
formative iatsu, together-be con-
nected.
Adalu to weep bitterly.
Adu to slap . Adu to cook. Adu to join - be near -
This root with a final e ade, be connected · to kill -
means the same as in Telugu, and ,
also it to obtain-move- fight - cook.
With a final cithis root means,
asin Can, to obtain and, also, to
tie - unile.
NOTE. This root is the primitive of all those in the three languages commencing with the letters ad, in
which the leading idea of nearness-junction , variously modified , is very apparent : the several modes ofform-
ing the secondary root by inserting a nasal before the final syllable, as in Andu or Antu, or by adding the
syllables ei or e, ar, al, gú, angu &c. as here exemplified , is common to them all .This formation of a num.
ber of secondary roots from a primitive by the adjuncts mentioned , is constantly observable under every
letter ofthe alphabet ; the primitive is found sometimes in Tam, sometimes in Can. and sometimes in
Tel. sometimes it exists in all three, sometimes in none ofthem ,

Adugu to ask -beg alms. Į

Addagu to interrupt- Addagu as in Tel.
prevent.
Caccu to vomit, Caccu as in Tel. Caccu as in Tel.
Cangedu to become lean

Cargu to become black, Carugu as in Can.

by fire &c.
Cats to play dice,
chess &c.
Casa to be modest, or
diffident.
Casangu to be bruised
bythe hand-
squeezed.
Casi to bemoist ordamp-
to weep-entreat.
Cachini tojoin together
two things of
the same kind-
pair.
Carchu to bite - wash
rice.
Cada to pass beyond.
10 NOTE TO THE INTODUCTION.

TELUGU. CANNADI TAMIL.

Cadavu to pay - fulfil-

give attention-
reflect-nail up.
Cattu to tie - build - be- Cattu to tie-build. Cáttu as in Can.
come pregnant,
said of cattle on-
ly.
This is root in Tamil is pro-
Cadugu to wash off, as
dust from the nounced Cazhava ; da in Tel : and
la in Can. are constantly substi-
hands · wash
tuted for the Tamil Zhand
out, as stains
roots of which the final is gu in
from a cloth ,
the former end in the latter in vu;
thus the root meaning to stroke
gently-caress is in Tam. Tazhuva
in Tel:. Tadugu &c..
Cadangu Cadangu as in Tel. This root is not in Tam, but it
toswell- boil
or In both languages this verb is pre- is evidently the same in meaning
or bubble. and derivation withthe two follow
marily used ofwater, and second-
Canangu arily of the affections of the mind, ing, the last ofwhich, Cadu, is the
in expressions similar to the sea primative ofallthose commencing
swells, his anger boils, his wealth with Cad in thethree languages..
overflows.
Cadi to cut bite. Cadi to cut-bite-guard-
swell or be angry.
Cadu to cut -
plough-
snatch or seize sudden-
ly · steal be angry.
Cadekey to hurry- Cadagu as in Cun.
Rasten.
Cadé to churn.. Cadei to stir up with a
stick &c.- to turn
by a lath.
Canmalei to think- con- Can as in Can also to
ceive in the mind. & consider -mark-
This is evidently a compound of
the simple rootcan, but the second Cani determine.
member, malei, has no separate
meaning.
 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION . 11

TELUGU. TAMIL.
CANNADI

Cattu to kill. Cattu to call aloud-

roar or below - croak.
Cadadu to dissolve in
liquids.
·
Cadaru to call aloud Cadaru to call or weep Cadaru as in Can.
from any affection of aloud-bellow as
the mind to exclaim . a beast.
Cadalu Cadalu as in Tel. Cadalu as in Tel.
to move or
or
shake.
Cadulu
Cadi to steal. Cadi to sound - make a
noise-be haughty .

Cadiy to approach - ob-

tain.

Cadu to draw gold or

silver.

Cadumu to push away.

Caduvu to be confused
or perplexed.

Cadrucu
Ito
to peck as
or
n c u
Cadru Ja bird.

Candu to fade or decay Candu as in Tel. Candu as in Tel. & Can.

as flowers and It has this meaning in Tan
fruit by heat. when the last- syllable is written
ru but pronounced du ; when writ
ten withthe same final consonant
as in Tel. and Can. it signifies to
bespoiled -toperishgenerallý.

Canam to become ran-

cid · to acquire a bad
taste or smell by smoke
or keeping.
This rootisusedasanoun in Te-
lugu in the same sense.
12 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION .

TELUGU. CANNADI TAMIL.

Canalu to become an- Canalu to kindle asfire- Canal

to become angry . to become an-
gry - fade. and
gry.
Candal
Used as a noun Canai means are,
Canu to see - to bring In the first sense , to see, this root in the present and future ofthe
forth a child. Can , and Tam. is written with a long and with the nasal of the third
series ofconsonants Canand Canu; in the past it is short Canden- Cauleni,
as in Tel : the second sense is peculiar to the latter language ; but
Candu a calfin Tamil is evidently derived from it.

Cappu to cover. Cappu to dig a pit - ex- This root is not used in Tam.
cacate - hollow either in it's Tel. or Can. sense ,
out . but it is evident that from it in the
latter acceptation is derived the
Tamil terms, Cupparu a hollowba
son carried by beggars, and Cap
pel a ship.

But though radical connection may be proved to exist between lan-

guages, their actual connection , as regards terms used for the expression
of ideas, may not be intimate and it becomes necessary, therefore , to es-
tablish this point, to enter further into detail and compare the words of
the three cognate dialects, as well as the roots whence they are derived .
Mámidi Vencaya, the author of the Andhra Dipaca, an excellent Dic-
tionary of the Telugu , has, in the preface to this work, introduced a con-
cise analysis of the language , the substance of which , as affording the
means of making this comparison, is translated in the following para-
graphs.

" The modes of derivation in the Andhra language are four ; they are

Tatsaman, Tad,bhayam, Désyam and Grámyam.

 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION . 13

" OF PURE SANSCRIT TERMS RECEIVED IN TELUGU.

" Tatsamam consists of Sanscrit terms, pure as spoken in heaven , the

Telugu terminations being substituted for those ofthe original language ,

of which the following are examples.

SANSCRIT, TATSMAMAM, SANSCRIT. TATSMAMAM.
Rámah Rámandu aproper name B hub , hrüt B húb hrüttu a king.
Vanam Vanamu a forest. Hanumà, ha-1

Gangà Ganga the river. numantudu

aproper
Hanuman
Harih Hari aproper name. and name.
Bhagavati Bhagavati a Goddess. hanumánuduj
'Srih 'Sri prosperity. Sampadu
Sambuvu and wealth
Sampad
-oper
a proper
Sambuh or . }
"
Sampattu
name.
Sambundu Cshut
and Cshuttu appetite .
Vad huh Vadhu · woman . Cshud....
Gauh Govu a cow . Apah Appu waters.
Glau Glau the moon. Divamu the heavens.
Dyau
Vác Váccu a word. milk.
Payah Payasu
Bishag Bishacu a physician . Anadwàn Anadwáhamu an ox.
“ OF TERMS derived from the SANSCRIT.
39
Tadbhavam consists of terms formed , either from the Sanscrit direct,
or through one ofthe six Pracrits, varied by the interposition of sylla-
bles , and by the substitution , increment, and decrement of letters, as ex-
plained in the Vaicrüta-chundrica : the several modes of derivation, her

indicated, are exemplified in the following lists.

" TAD,BHAVAM TERMS DERIVED IMMEDIATELY FROM SANSCRIT.
SANSCRIT. TADBHAVAM. SANSCRIT. TADBHAVAM.

Samudrah Sandaramu the sea. Yátrà Dzatara pilgrimage.

Átramu hurry.
Chandrah Tsandurundu the moon. Áturam
Banti aline orrow .
Cánanam Cána aforest. Pangtih
Churali Garidì a fencing
Cudyam Góda a wall . school.
14 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.

·TADB, HAVAM TERMS Derived from SANSCRIT THOUGH THE” PACRUTAM

SPOKEN IN THE COUNTRY OF MAHARASTRA.
SANSCRIT. PRACRIT. TELUGU.
Chacravácah Chaccaváyò Dzaccavu a species ofwater foul.

Upád byáyah Ojjbáo Oddza a preceptor.

Brahmà Bamhà Bomma Brahma.

Dwipali Dívo Dívi an island.

Cámsyam Camso Cantsu' bell metal.
Yasah Jaso Asamu fame.
" TADB ,HAVAM TERMS DERIVED THROUGH SAURASENI, TIE LANGUAGE OF
THE COUNTRY OF SURASENA.
SANSCRIT. SAURASENI. TELUGU.
Yejnópavítam Dzannóvídam Dzannidamu the Brahminical thread.

Prátijnyátam Padinnádam Pannidamu avow.

Hintáĺah Hindáĺò Indu
' a date.
Haritalah Haridaíd Aridalamu orpiment .
Dhátu Dádu Dzádu colour.
TADB,HAVAM terms derived through the magad,hi, spoken in the
COUNTRY OF MAGAD,HA.
SANSCRIT MAGAD,HI. TELUGU.
Nédishi ham 'Nédistam Néstamu friendship .
Géhast hah Géhastè Gésta a householder.
Cashfam Castam Casti difficulty .
Rámà Láma Léma
a woman.
“ TAÐB ,HAVAM TERMS DERIVEd through the PAISACHI, SPOKEN IN THE
COUNTRIES OF PANDYA AND CECAYA,
SANSCRIT. PAISACHI. TELUGU.
Alactalı Alatto Latuca lac-dye, prepared for painting the
Sashculì Sack huli Tsackilamu a contorted cake.
[feet.
'
Urnà Unnà Unni wool.

(Telungu)
Trilingah Tilingo Telugu the Telugu Language.
Tenugu
Swernam Sannam Sonna gold.
Nisrénì Nísena Nittsena a ladder.
 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION. 15

" TADB,HAVAM TERMSDFRIVED THROUGH THE CHULICA OR CHULICA - PAI-

SACHI, SPOKEn in the couNTRIES OF GANDARA, NEPALA AND CUNtala.
SANSCRIT. CHULICA. TELUGU.

Bründah Pundo Pindu un assemblage

Bud , hah intelligent Puddo Pedda great; peddavandu
a wise man &c.
Swernam Panno Ponnu gold.
Mrügahi Micò Mécamu a beast.
ne Brad hnah Paddo " Produ & Poddu sun rise.

« TADB,HAVAM TERMS DERIVED THROUGH THE APAB ,HRAMSA SPOKEN IN

THE COUNTRY OF AB,HIRA AND THE COAST OF THE WESTERN OCEAN,
SANSCRIT. APABHRAMSA. TELUGU.

Brahmanah , Bamb ,hadu Bápadu a Brahman.

Abad ham Abadd,hu Baddu an untruth.
Stanam Tanu Tsannu the bosom .
'Srutam heard Sududda Tsaduvu reading or learning.'

NOTE. Apabramsa means, literally, corrupted language ; but the author says
the word is not to be taken in this sense, but as the proper name of the dialect,
and to this purpose quotes a verse from Appacavi , one ofthe commentators on
the Nannayabhattiyam, who states the same, and adds it was the speech of the
goddess Saraswati in her youth, and that it'sterms, therefore, are without excep-
tion, pure. Words which have passed through this dialect to the Telugu are,
however, more frequently used by the 'Súdra tribes than by the Brálimans.

The proportion of corrupt, or, more appropriately, permuted terms in

Telugu of the several derivations above noticed, may be stated as follows ;
Sanscrit Tadb havam one half; Prácrit, one quarter ; Sauraséni one tenth;
Magad bi one twentieth ; the Paisachi, Chúlicà, Apabramsa together one
tenth . Mr. Colebrooke, in his dissertation on the Sanscrit and Pracrit lan-
guages, admits but of three distinctions; these two and the Magad hi, or
Apabramsa, which he considers the same. The six Prácrits here enume-
rated, however, are six distinct dialects, each formed , as to terms, accord-
ing to it's own rules of permutation , but all following the idiom, colloca-
tion and, with special exceptions , the general grammar ofthe Sanscrit: in
16 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION .

the Shadbasha -chandricà by Lacshmid hara, a joint grammar of the six

Prácrits , after general rules applying to all, the Prácrit narekov (Pra-
crütam mahàrástr' ódbhavam) is deduced immediately from the Sanscrit,
the Saurasénì from the Prácrit and Sanscrit and so on ; the Mágadhi, Pai-

sachi, Chúclica - Paisachi, and Apabramsa , each declining a degree in

purity and the last varying more than any ofthe rest from the parent stock;
this, however, the author does not allow to be, as Mr. Colebrooke consi-
ders it, " a jargon destitute of regular Grammar, " for he says-Apabhram-
sas tu bháshà syàd ab hiràdi giránchayah - cavi prayóg’ànarhatwàn
n’àpusabdas sa tu cwachit, Apabramsa is the language spoken in Abhira
and other countries, and, as it is used by the poets, it is not in any respect

corrupted- and he proceeds, accordingly, to detail it's grammatical rules.

The work here noticed is confined to these dialects , as they now exist in

the Nátacas, and treats, therefore, only of Tatsmamam and Tadbhavam

terms of Sanscrit orign; it is expressly stated, however, that each possessed
its proper Désyam,or native, terms, and it is probable, as many ofthese dia-

lects prevailed in countries far distant from each other, that each was con-
nected with Désyam words of various derivations , in conjunction with
which they produced spoken languages differing considerably from each
other ; this in fact is declared to be the case with respect to Paisachi in the
following passage- Pisácha désa niyatam Paisách dwitayum viduh- Pisá-
cha desàstu vrüdd ,hair uctáh- Pándya Cécaya Cháhlica Sahya Népála
Cuntalah Sud, hésha B, hóta Gánd hára Haiva Canójanàs tat,hà-' Etè
paisácha désàs syus tad désyas tad guno bhavati . The two Paisáchi
dialects are said to prevail in all the countries here mentioned, commen-
cing with Pandyam at the southern extremity of India, and extending to
Canoj (Canójana ) in the north, and Siam ( Sahya) to the east, and it is
added - These are the Paisachi countries, and the Désyam terms ofeach
have their own particular quality.
"6
Désyam , in other words 'And hra, or Telugu , is of two kinds; the lan-
guage which originated in the country of Telingana and Anya-désyam, or
the language of foreign countries intermixed with it.
 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION . 17

" OF TERMS WHICH Originated IN TRILINGAM,

" Previously to shewing what part of the language originated in Trilin-

gam, the following stanzas from the Ad • haravana Vyácaranam are here
inserted, to describe the country to which this name applies. "

A quotation from the Adharavana Vyácaranam is omitted : the author

explains that part which relates to the boundaries of Trilingam as follows.

" As it is here said, in the country between Srisailum , the station of

Bhimeswara at Dracharámam, the greater Cálèswaram and , as the fourth ,
the mountain of Mahéndra, in these holy places were thrce Lingams, and
the language which originated in the country known by the name of the
Trilinga Désam, is that now under consideration ; this is the Atsu or pure
Telugu, and is thus described in the Appacaviyam.
VERSE.
" All those words which are in use among the several races who are
aborigines of the Country of Andhra , which are perfectly clear and
free from all obscurity , these shine forth to the world as the pure native
speech of Andhra ( Suddha Andhra Dés'yam . )
66" OF THESE the following are EXAMPLES.

Pálu milk. Nela the moon, a month.

Perugu curdled milk. Vésavi .

and sultry weather.
Ney clarified butter.
Rólu a mortar . Vésaugi .....

Roncali Gudi a temple.

a pestle.
Madi afield.
Utti a long netforholding
pots &c. Puli a tyger.
Pudami the earth. Tsali cold.
Padatuca u woman.
Madugu anatural pool or lake.
Pasidi-paindi gold. U'ru a village.
1
Bangáru gold. a man.
Magavandu
Coducu a son. a woman.
Andadi
Códalu a daughter in- law . Aluca vexation- displeasure .
Tala the head.
18 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION .

66
OF TERMS INTRODUCED INTO TELUGU FROM FOREIGN CONTRIES.

" The following verse is from the Appacaviyam

" O Césava, the natives of Andhra having resided in various countries,

by using Telugu terms conjointly with those ofother countries, these have
become Andhra terms offoreign origin.

" The people of 'And hra , otherwise called Trilingam, have, as Appacavi
states above, frequented other countries and mixed their language with
that of these several countries; of such Anya-dés'yam terms the following
are examples.

The examples are of Anya- dés'yam terms in which aspirates, not belong-
ing to the thirty letters proper to the Telugu , occur : such as, bhalà an
eulogistic exclamation ; avad,háru an exclamation of entreaty ; thavu a
place-station; d, háca a haughty, high spirited man : of those which have a
final long vowel ; such as, anà the sixteenth of a Rupec; navalà an excellent
woman; códì aflag;jirà armour: and, lastly, of difficult words, inappropri-
ately ranked among Anya- dés'yam terms ; such as, calanu battle; toyyeli a
woman;ménu the body; ullamu the mind . Of the list given by the author as
examples of the sveral kinds of Anya-désyam terms, the whole of the words in
the first are ofuncertain derivation : those is the second are either IIindustáni

or they are terms the last syllable of which has been casually lengthened ;
thus códì, is the same as códi, and navalà is either of Sanscrit derivation

from nava new, or a native term from the Tamil navam affection . Most of
those in the last list are common to the southern dialects ; thus calanu , in
Tamil cal, is derived from the root cala to join, common to the three dia-

lects; toyyeli, in Tamil taiyel, from tai to beautify, ménu, in Tamil méni,
from mél upward- outward, and ullumu from ul inward-mind.
" OF TERMS AND FORMS OF RUSTIC OR VULGAR SPEECH.

" Terms which cannot be subjected to the rules of Grammar, and in

which an irregular increment or decrement of letters occur are called
Grámyam ; they are corruptions, and are described in the following verse
from the Appacavíyam .
 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION . 19

VEBSE
" Such Tenugu words as are commonly used by rustic folk are known
as Grámyam terms ; these lose some of their regular letters and are not
found in poetry , unless, as in abusive language, the use of them cannot be
avoided, for example,
Vastádà Hari Somulu

Destádà golladanti diííaca carunan

Tsústádà caungili nid'

Istádà tsepamannan ivi grámyóctul. ”

In this verse vastádà for vatstsunnándà ; testádà for tetstsutsunnánáà ;

tsúsíádà for tsútsutsunnádà; istádà for itstsutsunnándà and tseppamu for
tseppumu are Grámyam terms .
In the preceding extracts, the author, supported by due authority,
teaches, that , rejecting direct and indirect derivatives from the Sanscrit,
and words borrowed from foreign languages, what remains is the pure
native language of the land : this constitutes the great body ofthe tongue
and is capable of expressing every mental and bodily operation , every
possible relation and existent thing; for, with the exception of some reli-
gious and technical terms, no word of Sanscrit derivation is necessary to
the Telugu . This pure native language of the land , allowing for dialectic
differences and variations of termination, is, with the Telugu , common

to the Tamil, Cannadi, and the other dialects of southern India : this may
be demonstrated by comparing the Déśyam terms contained in the list ta-

ken by Vencaya from the Appacaviyam, with the terms , expressive ofthe
same ideas in Tamil and Canadi . It has been already shewn that the radicals.

of these languages, mutatis mutandis , are the same, and this comparison
will shew that the native terms in general use in each, also , correspond.
It would have been easy to have selected from the three dialects a far
greater number of terms, than these, exactly agreeing with each other; but

it is considered preferable to follow a work of known authority, and to

which no suspicion of bias to any system can attach : the author, though
a good Sanscrit scholar, was ignorant of all the dialects of Southern India,

his native tongue excepted .

20 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION .

TELUGU . CANNADI. TAMIL

Pálu milk Hálu Pál.

When Pbegins a word inTamil or
Telugu, it is in Cannadi changed
to H, as Tamil Palli, Tel : Palle,
Can, Halli asmall village; but in
the old Can. all such words may,
also, be written with aP.
Perugu curdled milk Perugu.
Ney clarifiedbutter The Telugu term is not used by Ney.
itself in Can, butis found in com- Of these terms the first and last
pounds as Benne, white ghee-but- are common to the high and low
ter. Tamil , the secoud is confined to
the high dialect.
Rólu a mortar Orulu
Urul , High Tamil .
Roncali a pestle Onake Uroncali. H. Tam.
The Telugu terms are contractions
of these : many similar instances
might be adduced , thus irà night
in Tamil becomes rè in Telugu,
irandu two rendu ; aven that man,
iven this man, become vándu and
vindu.
Utti a long net for This termmay be used in Can : but Uri
holding pots or nelu is more correct. In Tamil when the letter r
other household
( ) is doubled it, it is pronoun-
utensils
ced it and in similar Tel . terms,

is written'tí ( )
Pudami the earth Podavi Pudayi. H. Tam.
Padatuca a woman
This term is probably a com-
pound, but it is not easyto reduce
it to its elemeuts.

Pasidi or Paindi gold Pasaru or Hasaru Pasuppu golden colour.

with whichthe Telugu term is de- Pasamei green colour, whence this
rivatively connected , is used in Can. term is derived , means,also,beauty-
in the accepation of green colour purity ; pasum, the adjective deri-
only. ved from it is frequently contract-
ed to paim as pasumpon-paimpon
puregold and from this contraction
the second of the Tel, terms is de-
frived.
 CHAPTER FIRST .

TELOOGOO ALPHABET.

The letters in the Teloogoo, as in most of the other Indian alphabets, 1

Th
are apt, on the first view, to appear unnecessarily numerous . Some
syllables even seem admitted into the alphabet, as simple characters ,

The dipthongs are represented by seperate signs, not , as in English , by

the coalition of two vowels. There is one set of symbols for initial uncon-
nected vowels; another for the same vowels when joined with consonants

to form syllables ; and in both of these, the long vowels are distinguished
from the short. Among the consonants also , the aspirated letters are reptc-

sented by distinct symbols, not by a combination, as in our own langu-

age ; and the harsh are distinguished fromthe soft letters. But those wh

may at first question the utility of so many letters in the Teloogoo,

will perhaps relinquish most of their objections, when they find that
the variety ofsound in this language is greater, and better defined , than
in English. On the length of a vowel , on the harsh or soft pronunciation
of a consonant, depends , in a thousand instances, the meaning of a word ;
and, consequently, it is of greater importance, in Teloogoo , that each
different shade of sound should be accurately marked ; than in our own lan-
guage, in which, comparatively, few words materially resemble each other.
 2 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR .

2 Notwithstanding the Teloogoo alphabet may be considered to contain

some superfluous characters, it will readily be admitted that, in consis-
tency, it is superior to our own . The sound attached to each letter remains

constantly inherent in it : the coalition of words may cause one character

to be changed for another, or many require the elision or the insertion of
letters; but no association whatever can render any letter mute, nor can
any change, or combination, give to one or more characters the sound

belonging to another. The student, therefore, after once acquiring the

correct sound of the Teloogoo letters , immediately pronounces every word
with accuracy, and very little practice enables him to read with fluency

and precision : - while a foreigner, who attempts to acquire a correct

English pronunciation, scarcely ever arrives at the full attainment of

his object. The proper pronunciation of our words, indeed, depends more
upon the combination of our letters, than upon any fixed sound inherent
in each separate character: and , in this respect, a person commencing the

study of our language, for a long time, labors under the same difficulties

experienced by those, who are left to discover the meaning of the principal
words in a sentence, without any other aid than what the context itself
affords.

3 All Native Grammarians concur in reducing the number of letters in

the Teloogoo Alphabet to thirty seven; by excluding from it forty four

characters which they acknowledge to belong to the language, but will
not admit into the alphabet . They reject nineteen letters as peculiar to words
of Sanscrit origin ; fifteen small connected vowels, as only abbreviated,
forms ofthe large initial unconnected vowels; eight characters, as merely
marks for certain consonants when doubled ; and two, as contracted signs

for certain letters which they have retained. But, in giving a general view
of the Teloogoo alphabet, I shall insert all the letters which they have
rejected; for they belong to the language, as much as those which they

have admitted; and the whole are equally unknown to an English reader .
Inclusive of these, the Teloogoo alphabet will be found to consist of no
"less than eighty one different symbols.
 OF THE LETTERS .

TELOOGOO ALPHABET.

VOWELS .

Initial unconnected Connected Powers.

Towels. vowels.

333 2

ఈ
43

& 00

2000 ro

20000 ••••••••• roo

M ......
ကျ 100

.........

33 ue
?

20....... or ❤ ♥

E .. for 5

15 15
 4 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR .

CONSONANTS .

Consonants. Double forms of some Powers. Consonants. Double forms ofsoms Powers.
consonants. consonants.

S k 21- 2

k ,hu ‫له‬ n
2

ge ...
P

‫لله‬ g.h ph

gnu a bu

a ts 20 b,h
B
13

ch m

chh a S ...
y
R-
23

dzu r

ju Ju
23

ap ఎ S .......

24 nyu 3 sh

tu ... sh
al

th ୯
S

d వా h

dh I
Go
nu
ksh

e rru

t.h n or m

d C

.dh 208 6 ....

21 2 41 8
 OF THE LETTERS. 5

SIGNS .

n
૨૦

15 Initial unconnected vowels.

]

15 Connected vowels .
41 Consonants .

8 Double forms ofsome consonants.

2 Signs .

81 Letters.

Of these eighty one letters, the initial vowels 2 roo , 2 roo, and 4
loo , the ten aspirates khu, gh, & chh, ∞ jh, © i̟h, & d,h, th,

d¸h , & p¸h ,and b,h , the nasals & gnu nyu, and the consonantssh, sh,

ksh, and 8h, are the nineteen characters stated byTeloogoo Grammari-

ans to be peculiar to words of Sanscrit origin . To these, the connected

vowels roo , J 100, should also be added . For had not all the con-

nected vowels been rejected from the alphabet, as marks instead of letters ,
a place would have been originally assigned to these two characters, in
the list of symbols peculiar to Sanscrit derivatives .

Although the lettersh , is , as above stated, peculiar to the Sanscrit, 5

modern authors admit, that, Sanscrit derivatives excepted, all Teloogoo
words which have the letters, followed by the connected vowels i,
See, ➡ě, ore, may change thes, into sh, hence ; chesi , or చేశి

cheshi, having done. cheseno , or cheshěno , he, she, or it,

did. 2 K siggo, or shiggo , shame.

The short initial vowels & ě, 2 & , and their corresponding connected 6
Vowels → ě,
> ŏ, (excluded by Grammarians as being merely marks ) to-
gether with the consonants ts , & dzu , o̟ lu, ∞ rru, and c´n , are to be
found in words of the pure Teloogoo only.

The other letters of the alphabet are common to all Teloogoo words, 7
whether derived from the Sanscrit, or otherwise.
 6 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

S The letter ksh has been included in the alphabet ; but, as it is a

compound of s k and sh, itis rejected by some authors.

VOWELS .

INITIAL UNCONNECTED VOWELS.

9 The fifteen initial vowels , u, e a, Qi, Es ee, Ġ 00, ఊ 00 , ఋ 7:00 ,

. 100, Dë › Dē, I u‹‚ ¿ ¿‚ é‰ ō , and & uo , are emphatically term-

Wroo, m

ed by Teloogoo Grammarians lives, or living letters; because

they are supposed to possess, within themselves , a perfect and independent

existence or sound. They are purely initial, and are always written sepa-

rately, unconnected with consonants or other characters . Like our capital

letters, the initial vowels are to be found at the commencement of a phrase

or sentence only, and never, in grammatical compositions at least, at

the beginning of cach word ; except when words are written by them-
selves , as in a dictionary or vocabulary ; for in a correct Teloogoo sen-
tence, each word coalesces with the following one ; the whole becomes a
chain of continued links ; and there is no beginning, or place for an ini-
tial vowel, except at the commencement of the sentence itself.

10 In naming these characters, the Sanscrit word karumo is af-

fixed to each ; thus, ukarumo u, ikarumo i,

and so on .

11 The initial vowels are written on a line with the consonants, never
either below, or above them.

CONNECTED VOWELS .

12 When combined with consonants to form syllables, the abovementi-

oned vowels take quite a different shape . In this new form they are in-
separable from consonants ; and, from their constantly preserving a ser-
vile connection with some of these characters , Teloogoo writers have been
induced to view them, in this shape, rather as abbreviated forms ofthe in-

itial vowels abovementioned , than as independent letters . They are here

 OF THE LETTERS .

again exhibited , opposite the initial vowels which they respectively re-
present ; and the particular appellation given to each is attached to it.

u in its connected form becomes. ✔ U which in Teloogoo is named . తలకట్టు

e a do ....... ча · do .....
· దీసురాము

do .......... 9 i do .K &
గుడి
2i

Do ee do . ... § ee do .......... గుడిదీఘురాము

& ∞......... do ..... 00 do

· కొము
& 00 .మ్ముదీఘము
2000 roo ........ do .......... roo do . వట్రువసుడి

W roo..... do Troodo ....... వట్రువసుత్తిదీస్తునాము

3 loo .......... do
.... m
3 lo0
10 o ...... do .......... ఇత్వము

a ĕ do ు
ఎత్వమ
ed o
...... do ..........
....... Sē ........... do . .' ఎత్వము
20 ŏ ........... do ~ ŏ or→ .do ఒత్వము
10

ఓ ..do ........ ~ ō or do
ఓత్వము
uc do ...... Pue ......
.... do
DES IN
uo .........
onac
...... ....do ........
....
ఔత్వము
The connected vowelsu ,
u ,—o a, © i, dee, è , Seo
è, & , ~ ō , and so 100 , 13
are written above the consonants to which they are attached ; v∞0500
are written to the right of them ; છે roo , and J roo, are placed partly to
the right side of consonants, partly below them ; and of ue, the upper

part is written above, the lower part below the consonants.

When the initial vowels 2 o, & ō, are represented in their connected 14

forms, by a compound of the letters ,and v∞, oo ;thus,, voo,
the è is written above, and the v∞, oo, to the right side of the con-
sonants .

The connected vowel m, lo, is always written below the consonant to 15

which it is attached .
 8 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR .

CONSONANTS.

16 With the view to facilitate the acquirement of the Teloogoo alphabet,

the connected vowels have been separated from the consonants , to some of
which they must invariably be joined . For the same reason, in arrang-
ing the consonants , in the order in which they are usually placed by Gram-
marians, they are exhibited distinct from the connected vowels...

Hard... Soft.
పరుషులు సరళలు
k khu g gh gnu

7
5
5
2
1st.Vurga 2

3
6
2
Gutteral or కంఠ్యము ..... A ‫لله‬

&
S D
ts ch chh dzu ju jh nyu
2d . do . ಬ ಬ W 23 2 αμ 2+
Palatal or తాలవ్యము
tu th d dh nu

2
Cerebral or మూధనాన్యము 3d .

3
do .

3
3
t th. d d.h n
Dental or o ....... 4th . do. છે @ 2
9

P ph bu bh m
Labial or 2 a
· ఓష్ఠ్యము ....... 5th · do .
2 h
$

y r lu ซ sh sh S h lksh rru
2

avo e 2 3 .

17 The consonants have not peculiar appellations, like the connected vow-
els ; but are named in the same manner as the initial vowels ; viz . by af
fixing to them the Sanscrit words karum ; thus, a bu-

karum bee, 835 dukarum dee, &c . To distinguish the letter o r

from e rru, the term errukarumo is applied tothe latter only ;

the or retains its original Sanscrit name, rẽp hu .

18 The ten consonants k,hu, & gnu, ≈ dzu, &ju, nyu, & tu, Ɛd nu; » bu,
olu, and ∞ rru, have the sound of the first vowel - u, inherent ; and are

therefore represented in English characters by syllables ; thus k.hu ju & c .

but all the other consonants specified above, in order to obtain utterance,
must be joined to some ofthe connected vowels . It is ofmuch importance
to the reader clearly to understand , that neither the consonants, nor the con-
 OF THE LETTERS . 9

nected vowels, exactly correspond with what European authors call

a letter. They have been separated from each other, merely with the
view to facilitate the progress of the early student : but this separation , of
them, will lead to false ideas, unless it be at the same time borne in mind

that, in Teloogoo , they are never so separated , and are not significant sym-
bols except when compounded with each other. Indeed the conso-
nants and connected vowels form together a set of inseparable syllabic

characters, generally compared by Teloogoo writers to animated bodies ;

the life, or vowel, giving existence or articulation to the consonant, which ,
on separation from it, becomes a mere dead symbol, void of every sound.

As Teloogoo words are composed chiefly of these syllabic characters, ter-

minating with a vowel, a final consonant is seldom found in the language ,
When it does occur, the consonant cannot, as in English , stand alone.

Without any sign, the ten letters before mentioned represent syllables end-
ing in the vowel u, and the other consonants represent no articulation
whatever. In the case ofa final consonant , therefore , it is necessary to af-

fix to it the sign , to denote that the sound is retained , but obstructed.
Thus, final k , kh, or g, must be written never s without any
sign, as before exhibited .

To form syllables , the connected vowels are added to the consonants, in 19

the following manner.
ku ka ki kce koo koo kro kroo klo kě ke ko kō kue kuo
8 5 8 3 కు No
కూ కృ శౄక్
s. కె కేకొ
కెకే కొ కో కై కౌ
m
khu kha khi hhce là h h hoo khra lhroo &c. &c. &c.
ఖ 2
ఖా ఖి ఖీ ఖు ఖూ
20 200 ఖృ
2J PJ

gu ga gi gre goo goo groo groo glo gě gẻ go gō gue guo

X T ఓ గు గూ XJ S 김
a . A xoxoo xj xgo A778 No

It is not requisite to add the u to the ten letters mentioned in No. 18 ; 20

because the sound represented by that letter is already inherent in them .
In adding to the consonants the connected vowels va, oo, roo, 21

and roo, which are placed to the right of these letters, it is necessary
 10 TELOOGOO ' GRAMMAR.

previously to write the connected vowel u , above the consonants ; except

above those in which the sound of that character is inherent : because this

sign, which is termed so bound to the head, invariably retains it's

ట
place at the top of the consonants to which it can be attached, unless it's
situation is occupied by another symbol .

92 For the same reason also, in adding to the consonants

gh, apjh ,
మ my, and h, the long vowela, which is affixed to the latter
part of these letters , the L affixed to the former part, is not removed ; thus,
2మా 5 ma, 250 3y ¢, & c : butas the consonant h already terminates with
a symbol resembling a, when that vowel is added to this letter, it is
つ
written thus, the mark being substituted for → a.

23 Instead of adding the long vowel & ce, to the consonants, ww gh , op jh,
ash, and s, the short vowel 9i, with the symbol , is frequently
used to represent it's sound ; thus , we may write either see or see.
In such cases, the symbol , which is named Ax Loo long, is to be
considered as lengthening the short voweli, rather than as representing

the long vowel - a ; indeed this sign , in two other instances, is used to
lengthen the short vowels ; as
as 00, from va, and
,00, roo, from 1:00 .
roo

24
In adding the long vowel ee, to the letterm, it must always be
written in the manner above mentioned ; thus, mee, never av : in add-
ing it to the consonanth , it is written thus hee, or . The vowel
9i, or 6 ee, can never be added to the consonant y: to express, in
Teloogoo letters, the sounds yi, or yce,we write the consonanty ; in the
former case, without the L u, u,, es , and in the latter, with the→→
&x , and under it we place it's double form Sy, thus o něyi,

ghee, Q SITE , Iyecta chetto , this date trec,

25 In adding the short vowel → ŏ orvo, to the consonants gh, aji

jh, m, and y, it is invariably written in the latter form , never
in the former shape ; thus, mo, yo, &c. and in adding to these
consonants the long vowel ō orō, it is also written in the latter form
only; but, in this case, the last part of these consonants themselves are con-
 OF THE LETTERS,

sidered as representing the v of ; and, therefore , instead of adding

to the consonant, the – or డీఘు ము only is added ; thus , మోర్ యో
Br

yō & c. This latter rule is occasionally applicable to the consonants ↔ s,

and 5° h, which , joined with long ō, are frequently written thus
sō, hō.

The letters n, & s, and I v, & p, when separated from the 26

connected vowels, are respectively represented by the same characters 40
but, like the other consonants before mentioned , they are invariably
accompanied by some connected vowel, and they are distinguished from
each other, by the different modes in which the connected vowels are
added to them ; ~ n, and v, are always united with the vowels ; thus
న nu, Lau , 3 ° vuo, but s, and p, have the connected vowels writ-

ten separately from them ; as in the syllables ✩ su, pu, puo .

Thus also the shape of the letter or, as given in the foregoing list of 27
the consonants, is the same as that ofon orm , hereafter noticed ; the latter,

however, is never joined with any of the connected vowels ; as o & untě,

a part of the verb ung , to say. o papum, sin, &c . while the

former is always found with some of them united to it, in the following
manner ; ୪ ru, Tra, &
° rò , &c . The student, therefore, can have little
difficulty in distinguishing the one from the other.

Though native Grammarians , in enumerating the letters of the alpha- 28

bet, consider ts to be different from 2 ch, and 2 dzu to be distinct
from ju, they are respectively represented by the same characters ; and,
in fact, they are only two letters , each possessing two distinct sounds,
which has induced Grammarians to consider them as four separate cha-
racters .

Following the arrangement of the Sanserit, the twenty-five first 29

Teloogoo consonants have been classed by native writers in five Vurgus or
Classes, cach containing five letters, as arranged above in horizontal lines.
(see No. 16. )

The fifth consonant ofeach Vurgu or Class is a nasal ; and, in Sanscrit 30

derivatives, if a nasal immediately precede another consonant, without the
 20 NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION .

TELUGU. CANNADI. TAMIL

Pálu milk Hálu Pál.
When P begins a word inTamil or
Telugu, it is in Cannadi changed
to H, as Tamil Palli, Tel : Palle,
Can. Halli asmall village ; but in
the old Can. all such words may,
also, be written with aP.
Perugu curdled milk Perugu .
Ney clarifiedbutter The Telugu term is not used by Ney.
itself in Can. but is found in com- Of these terms the first and last
pounds as Benne, white ghee-but- are common to the high and low
ler. Tamil , the secoud is confined to
the high dialect.
Rólu a mortar Orulu
Urul , High Tamil.
Roncali a pestle
Onake Uroncali . H. Tam.
The Telugu terms are contractions
of these : many similar instances
might be adduced, thus irà night
in Tamil becomes rè in Telugu ,
irandu two rendu ; aven that man,
iven this man, become vandu and
vindu.
Utti
a long net for This termmay beused in Can : but Uri
holding pots or nelu is more correct. In Tamil when the letter r
other household
utensils ( ) is doubled it, it is pronoun-
ced it and in similar Tel. terms,

Pudami the earth is written'tí ( )

Podavi Pudavi, H. Tam .
Padatuca a woman
This term is probably a com-
pound, but it is not easy to reduce
it to its elemeuts.

Pasidi or Paindi gold Pasaru or Hasaru Pasuppu golden colour,

with which the Telugu term is de- Pasameigreen colour, whence this
rivatively connected, is used in Can . term is derived , means,also,beauty-
in the accepation of green colour purity ; pasum, the adjective deri-
only. ved from it is frequently contract-
ed to paim as pasumpon-paimpon
pure gold and from this contraction
the second of the Tel, terms is de-
frived.
 CHAPTER FIRST .

TELOOGOO ALPHABET.

The letters in the Teloogoo, as in most of the other Indian alphabets , 1

The
are apt, on
on the first view, to appear unnecessarily numerous . Some
syllables even seem admitted into the alphabet , as simple characters .
The dipthongs are represented by seperate signs, not, as in English , by
the coalition of two vowels. There is one set of symbols for initial uncon-
nected vowels; another for the same vowels when joined with consonants
to form syllables ; and in both of these , the long vowels are distinguished
from the short. Among the consonants also , the aspirated letters are reprc-
sented by distinct symbols, not by a combination, as in our own langu-
age ; and the harsh are distinguished from the soft letters . But those wh

may at first question the utility of so many letters in the Teloogoo,

will perhaps relinquish most of their objections, when they find that
the variety ofsound in this language is greater, and better defined , than
in English. On the length of a vowel, on the harsh or soft pronunciation
of a consonant, depends, in a thousand instances, the meaning of a word ;
and, consequently, it is of greater importance, in Teloogoo , that each
different shade of sound should be accurately marked; than in our own lan-
guage, in which, comparatively, few words materially resemble each other.
 2 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR .

2 Notwithstanding the Teloogoo alphabet may be considered to contain

some superfluous characters, it will readily be admitted that, in consis-
tency, it is superior to our own . The sound attached to each letter remains

constantly inherent in it : the coalition of words may cause one character

to be changed for another, or many require the elision or the insertion of
letters ; but no association whatever can render any letter mute, nor can
any change, or combination, give to one or more characters the sound

belonging to another. The student, therefore, after once acquiring the

correct sound of the Teloogoo letters, immediately pronounces every word
with accuracy, and very little practice enables him to read with fluency

and precision : - while a foreigner, who attempts to acquire a correct

English pronunciation, scarcely ever arrives at the full attainment of

his object. The proper pronunciation of our words, indeed, depends more
upon the combination of our letters , than upon any fixed sound inherent
in each separate character: and, in this respect, a person commencing the
study of our language, for a long time, labors under the same difficulties
experienced by those , who are left to discover the meaning of the principal
words in a sentence, without any other aid than what the context itself
affords .

3 All Native Grammarians concur in reducing the number of letters in

the Teloogoo Alphabet to thirty seven; by excluding from it forty four

characters which they acknowledge to belong to the language, but will
not admit into the alphabet . They reject nineteen letters as peculiar to words
of Sanscrit origin ; fifteen small connected vowels, as only abbreviated.
forms of the large initial unconnected vowels ; eight characters , as merely
marks for certain consonants when doubled ; and two, as contracted signs

for certain letters which they have retained . But, in giving a general view
of the Teloogoo alphabet, I shall insert all the letters which they have
rejected; for they belong to the language, as much as those which they
have admitted; and the whole are equally unknown to an English reader .
Inclusive of these, the Teloogoo alphabet will be found to consist of no
" less than eighty one different symbols .
 OF THE LETTERS .

TELOOGOO ALPHABET.

VOWELS .

Initial unconnected Connected Powers.

Towels, vowels.

333

ఈ &
&

& ‫ט‬

& 00

·2000 rm .....

2000 వా ........ roo

ოს
m I∞

...........

T
23

ue

2.......... or ୪

E. & S or ‫من‬
Ey

uo

15 15

6.
 4 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR .

CONSONANTS .

Consonants. Double forms of some Powers. Consonants. Double forms of soms Powers.
consonants. consonants.

S .......... k 21 2

k hu ‫ له‬... n
ఖ

A g ఎ. P
1
‫لله‬ .g.h Ph

gnu a bu

ts 20 b.h
I
a

W ch m

w S y
2 ch.h

.... dzu r
23

Ju
23 ju

jh ఎ S ............ V
ap

244 nyu 3 · sh

ట tu al sh
уг

th 2
d వా h
C

d.h I
Go
nu ksh
ព

e rru

t.h n or m
Ф
d c

dh 208 6 ........ h
ቀ
―
21 2 41 8
 OF THE LETTERS. 5

SIGNS .
n011

r
2

15 Initial unconnected vowels.

15 Connected vowels .
41 Consonants .
8 Double forms of some consonants .

2 Signs.

81 Letters.

Of these eighty one letters, the initial vowels 2 roo , roo , and 4
loo, the ten aspirates 2 khu, gh, & chh, ∞p jh, © th , & d,h , th, ය

d¸h, ph , and b,h , the nasals & gnu nyu , and the consonants sh, ∞ sh,

ksh, and 8h, are the nineteen characters stated by Teloogoo Grammari-

ans to be peculiar to words of Sanscrit origin . To these, the connected

Vowels roo , roo, should also be added . For had not all the con-

nected vowels been rejected from the alphabet, as marks instead of letters,
a place would have been originally assigned to these two characters , in
the list of symbols peculiar to Sanscrit derivatives .

Although the letter sh, is, as above stated, peculiar to the Sanscrit, 5
modern authors admit , that, Sanscrit derivatives excepted, all Teloogoo
words which have the letters, followed by the connected vowels i,
చేరి
§ ee, → è̟ , or ➡ ẽ, may change thes , intosh, hence ; chēsi, or
cheshi , having done . cheseno, or cheshen∞, he, she, or it,
did. & siggo, or * shiggo , shame.

The short initial vowels № ě, 2 č , and their corresponding connected 6

vowels → ě, &o 8 ŏ , (excluded by Grammarians as being merely marks ) to-
gether with the consonants ts, a dzu , o lu, ∞ rru, and en , are to be
found in words of the pure Teloogoo only.

The other letters of the alphabet are common to all Teloogoo words, 7
whether derived from the Sanscrit, or otherwise.
 6 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR,

S The letter ksh has been included in the alphabet ; but, as it is a

compound of s k and sh, it is rejected by some authors .

VOWELS .

INITIAL UNCONNECTED VOWELS.

9 The fifteen initial vowels, u , C a, Q i, s ee, & ∞, &¹oo

00 , ఊ Wrœ,
00 ,, ఋ 7:00 ,

W100 , m
Wroo, . 100 , Dè › Dé, I u , v, é ō , anduo , are emphatically term-

ed by Teloogoo Grammarians lives, or living letters; because

they are supposed to possess, within themselves, a perfect and independent
existence or sound. They are purely initial, and are always written sepa-

rately, unconnected with consonants or other characters . Like our capital

letters, the initial vowels are to be found at the commencement ofa phrase
or sentence only, and never, in grammatical compositions at least, at
the beginning of cach word ; except when words are written by them-
selves , as in a dictionary or vocabulary ; for in a correct Teloogoo sen-
tence, each word coalesces with the following one ; the whole becomes a
chain of continued links ; and there is no beginning, or place for an ini-
tial vowel, except at the commencement of the sentence itself.

10 In naming these characters, the Sanscrit word karumo is af-

fixed to each ; thus, ukarumo u, 22 ikarumo i,

and so on .

11 The initial vowels are written on a line with the consonants, never
either below, or above them .

CONNECTED VOWELS .

12 When combined with consonants to form syllables, the abovementi-

oned vowels take quite a different shape . In this new form they are in-
separable from consonants ; and, from their constantly preserving a scr-
vile connection with some of these characters, Teloogoo writers have been
induced to view them, in this shape, rather as abbreviated forms of the in-

itial vowels abovementioned, than as independent letters. They are here

 OF THE LETTERS .

again exhibited , opposite the initial vowels which they respectively re-
present ; and the particular appellation given to each is attached to it.

u in its connected form becomes. ✔ U which in Teloogoo is named .

తలకట్టు

e a do za do Á20-200

2 i ........ do .......... 9 i do ..... గుడి

Si ce ee do ........ గుడిదీఘురాము

Ġ 00 ... do 00 do · కొమ్ము
ఊ 00 •do ...........00 ………………… do ...
కొమ్ముదీఘుణము
2000
ఋ roo ........ do ...... છે roo do . వట్రువసుడి
2 roo..... do ....... Troodo ........
.... వ
వట్రువసుడిదీస్తునా ము

m loo .......... do. .......... ఇత్వము

do ........ do ఎత్వము
Sedo .........
· Sē ........... do ........ ··DES 200

ఒ ర ............ ....
ఒత్వము
‫וכ‬

& • do ........ ō or do
ఓత్వము
ue do . ...... Zue ……………· do ….
ఐత్వము
uodo uo .......
...... do ......
.
• ఔత్వము
Theconnected vowelsu , — a , i, & ee , —ě , ẽ,
д , Sō , anduo, 13
are written above the consonants to which they are attached ; v∞ 500

are written to the right of them ; છે roo, and J roo , are placed partly to
the right side of consonants, partly below them ; and of ue, the upper

part is written above, the lower part below the consonants .

When the initial vowels 2 o, & ō, are represented in their connected 14

forms, by a compound ofthe letters ,and v∞ , 00;thus,, vo,

the ě is written above, and the v∞, 00, to the right side of the con-
sonants .

The connected vowel m, lo, is always written below the consonant to 15

which it is attached .
 8 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

CONSONANTS.

16 With the view to facilitate the acquirement of the Teloogoo alphabet,

the connected vowels have been separated from the consonants, to some of
which they must invariably be joined . For the same reason, in arrang-
ing the consonants, in the order in which they are usually placed by Gram-
marians, they are exhibited distinct from the connected vowels.

Hard. Soft.

పరుషులు సరళలు
k khu g gh gnu
Gutteral or కంఠ్యము ........ 1st.Vurga S 2 ‫لله‬

Š༅
༠
·3
a ༤
dzu ju jh nyu

༄
ts ch chh
Palatal or ..... 2d . do . ಬ ಬ හ 23 2 ap

tu th d dh nu

:
ట Go

8
Cerebral or మూధనాన్యము 3d .

3
do .
t th. d dh

e P ..
Dental or దంత ్యము
దంత్యమ ు.....
........ 4th . do.
p Ph bu bh

Labial or ...... 5th do . ఎ ఎ 23 သ

a
ఓష్ఠ్యము..
r lu ช sh sh sh lksh rru
y
ఎ al LEL
avo

The consonants have not peculiar appellations, like the connected vow-
17
els ; but are named in the same manner as the initial vowels ; viz . by af
fixing to them the Sanscrit word 83 karum∞ ; thus, abu-

karum bee, 8 dukarum dee, &c. To distinguish the letter or

from erru, the term errukarumo is applied to the latter only ;

the or retains its original Sanscrit name, & rép hu .

18 The ten consonantsk ,hu , gnu, ≈ dzu, &ju, nyu, ɖɔ tu , nu; ∞ bu,
-
olu , and e rru, have the sound of the first vowel - u , inherent ; and are

therefore represented in English characters by syllables ; thus k,hu ju & c .

but all the other consonants specified above, in order to obtain utterance,

must be joined to some ofthe connected vowels. It is ofmuch importance

to the reader clearly to understand, that neither the consonants, nor the con-
 OF THE LETTERS. 9

nected vowels, exactly correspond with what European authors call

a letter. They have been separated from each other , merely with the
view to facilitate the progress of the carly student : but this separation , of
them , will lead to false ideas, unless it be at the same time borne in mind

that, in Teloogoo, they are never so separated , and are not significant sym-
bols except when compounded with each other. Indeed the conso-
nants and connected vowels form together a set of inseparable syllabic

characters, generally compared by Teloogoo writers to animated bodies ;

the life, or vowel, giving existence or articulation to the consonant , which,
on separation from it, becomes a mere dead symbol, void of every sound.

As Teloogoo words are composed chiefly of these syllabic characters, ter-

minating with a vowel, a final consonant is seldom found in the language .
When it does occur, the consonant cannot, as in English, stand alone.
Without any sign, the ten letters before mentioned represent syllables end-
ing in the vowel u, and the other consonants represent no articulation
whatever. In the case ofa final consonant , therefore , it is necessary to af-

fix to it the sign , to denote that the sound is retained , but obstructed.
Thus, final k , kh, or g, must be written never s without any
sign, as before exhibited .

To form syllables, the connected vowels are added to the consonants , in 19

the following manner .

ku ka ki kee koo koo kro kroo klo kě ke ko kō kue kuo

కకాకకీ కు కూ కృ ళౄక్ కెకే కొ కో కై 3
m
khu kha khi khee khook hoo khroo khroo &c. &c. &c.
ఖ ఖా
225 0 ఖి ఖీ ఖు
20 200 20 PJ
ఖృ
ga ga gi ghe go 200 gr grao gồm gờ gẽ gõ gõ guc guo
X X я
2. & XJ XJ గూ XJ XJo Z X
i
m
It is not requisite to add the u to the ten letters mentioned in No. 18 ; 20
because the sound represented by that letter is already inherent in them.
In adding to the consonants the connected vowels v ∞0, 500, I roo, 21
and roo, which are placed to the right of these letters, it is necessary
 10 TELOOGOO 'GRAMMAR.

previously to write the connected vowelu , above the consonants ; except

above those in which the sound of that character is inherent : because this

sign, which is termed os bound to the head, invariably retains it's

ట
place at the top of the consonants to which it can be attached, unless it's
situation is occupied by another symbol .

99 For the same reason also, in adding to the consonants gh, apjh,
∞ 5
my, and h, the long vowela, which is affixed to the latter
part of these letters , the L affixed to the former part, is not removed ; thus,
మా
25ma, D♫ ya, &c : but as the consonanth already terminates with
a symbol resembling -a, when that vowel is added to this letter, it is
Ր
written thus, the mark being substituted for → a.

23
Instead of adding the long vowel & ce , to the consonants, gh , op jh,
ash, and s, the short vowel 9i, with the symbol , is frequently
used to represent it's sound ; thus , we may write either see or see.
In such cases, the symbol which is named A Loo long, is to be
considered as lengthening the short vowel i, rather than as representing
the long vowela ; indeed this sign, in two other instances, is used to
lengthen the short vowels ; as 00,, from vo, and
oo roo, from 1:00
roo .

24
In adding the long vowel ee, to the letter m, it must always be
written in the manner above mentioned ; thus, mce, never av : in add-
ing it to the consonanth , it is written thus
hee, or . The vowel
9i, oree, can never be added to the consonant y: to express , in
Teloogoo letters, the sounds yi, or yce, we write the consonant y ; in the
former case, without the L u, es , and in the latter, with the→
Å∞∞ , and under it we place it's double form Sy, thus BS něyi,

ghee, 2 SITE , Iyecta chetto , this date tree,

25 In adding the short vowel ~ ö orvo, to the consonants gh, as

jh, m, and a y, it is invariably written in the latter form , never

in the former shape ; thus, a mo, Byò, &c. and in adding to these
consonants the long vowelō orō, it is also written in the latter form
only;but, in this case, the last part of these consonants themselves are con-
 OF THE LETTERS ,

sidered as representing the v of ; and, therefore , instead of adding

to the consonant ,the – or డీఘముonly is added ; thus, మోర్ మో
yo &c. This latter rule is occasionally applicable to the consonants ‹ s,
and h, which , joined with longō, are frequently written thus
° hō.
sõ, 75

The letters n, & s, and I v, & I p , when separated from the 26

connected vowels, are respectively represented by the same characters ;
but, like the other consonants before mentioned , they are invariably
accompanied by some conuected vowel , and they are distinguished from
each other, by the different modes in which the connected vowels are
added to them ; ` ~ n, and ∞ v, are always united with the vowels ; thus
న nu, Lru, 3 ° vuo, buts, and p, have the connected vowels writ-
ten separately from them ; as in the syllables su , pu, ♫ puo .

Thus also the shape of the letter or, as given in the foregoing list of 27
the consonants, is the same as that ofon orm , hereafter noticed ; the latter,
however, is never joined with any of the connected vowels ; as o & unte,

a part of the verb uno, to say. o papum, sin, &c . while the
former is always found with some of them united to it, in the following
° rõ , &c. The student, therefore, can have little
manner ; 8 ru, Tra, &

difficulty in distinguishing the one from the other.

Though native Grammarians , in enumerating the letters of the alpha- 28

bet, consider ts to be different from ch, and 2 dzu to be distinct
from ju, they are respectively represented by the same characters ; and ,
in fact , they are only two letters , each possessing two distinct sounds,
which has induced Grammarians to consider them as four separate cha-
racters .

Following the arrangement of the Sanserit, the twenty-five first 29

Teloogoo consonants have been classed by native writers in five Vurgus or
Classes, cach containing five letters, as arranged above in horizontal lines.
(see No. 16. )

The fifth consonant ofeach Vurgu or Class is a nasal ; and, in Sanscrit 30

derivatives, ifa nasal immediately precede another consonant, without the
 12 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR

intervention ofa vowel , it must be that particular nasal only which be-
longs to the same Vurgu asthe consonant itself; for instance, in such words ,
ifa nasal immediately precede any of the 4 first letters in the 3d . Vurgu it
must be nu only, if it percede any ofthe 4 first letters in the 4th Vurgu,

it must ben, and , if it precede any of the 4 first letters in the 5th
Vurgu, it must be m , and not any other nasal . But this rule does not
apply to corruptions from the Sanscrit, or to words of the pure Teloogoo,
or of the common dialect . The nasal before a consonant , without anin-

tervening vowel , is , in such words , represented either by the sign of the

lettern, viz. Fn, or bythe character on or m, or cn, hereafter men-
tioned .

31. Besides this division of the first 25 consonants into Vurgus or Classes, ac-

cording to the principles of Sanscrit Grammar, there is a classification of the

consonants which is peculiar to the Teloogoo itself, and an intimate ac-
quaintance with this arrangement of the alphabet, which pervades every
part of the language, is of the highest importance to a correct grammatical
knowledge of the Teloogoo . The chapter which follows, on the changes
of the letters, (perhaps the most difficult and intricate part of the Gram-

mar, ) will be absolutely unintelligible, unless due attention be paid to this

classification. It is as follows.

32 The first perpendicular line in the foregoing arrangement of the con-

sonants (No. 16, ) containing the first letter in each of the five Vurgus,
Viz , sk, is orch, et, et, and p, forms the first class ; and these
letters are denominated or hard letters.

33 The third perpendicular line in the above arrangement of the conso-

nants ( No. 16 , ) consisting of the third letter in each Vurgu, viz . Ag,.
dzu or ju, d, d, and a b, which are termed 5es or soft let-
ters, constitutes the second class.

34 The third class includes all the remaining consonants in the foregoing

classification ( No. 16) . The consonants in this class are termed ev,

or fixed letters ; from their not being liable to those changes, to which,
as hereafter explained , the letters of the other two classes are subject.
 . OF THE LETTERS. 13

The letters on or m, c n , and 8 h, which conclude the list of consonants 35

in the view of the whole alphabet given in page 6, are omitted from the
foregoing arrangement of the consonants in page 8 ; because the remarks
which follow that arrangement do not apply to them. In contradistinction
to all the other consonants, these three letters are never joined either to the
connected vowels, or to any other characters whatever.

DOUBLE FORMS OF SOME CONSONANTS..

When a consonant is doubled, the one character is placed under the 36

other, and the lower of the two is written without any of the connected
vowels, the subsequent vowel being attached to the upper one only ; thus,

peddu, great . This rule however does not apply to the following
consonants, of which each has its respective double form viz.
S k in it's double form is written ......
t
‫له‬ n. ..... do ...... 2
m.... .....do .
ov y ....... ...do ....... ·S
.
O r .... ... do ....
o I.....
I ......... .... do .......
J V ………………..do ......

These eight consonants, when doubled, are written first in their origi- 37
nal shape, and their second form is then written below them ; thus, &
ukku, an elder sister . š kutti, a knife . Sunnu, an elder brother.

ummu, amother, a respectfulfemale appellation . Suyyu, sir, a

respectful male appellation, & kurru, a staff. illoo, a house. S
uvvu, a grand mother.

If one consonant follow another without the intervention of a vowel, 38

the last is written below the first ; and if the last be one of those abovemen-
tioned which has a double form, it is written in it's second or double

form, not init's original shape ; thus , ushtu, eight , almu, the soul.

When the double form of a y, namely , follows another consonant, 39

the subsequent vowel, if ― a, v∞ , or oo, may be attached either to
 14 TE LOO GOO GRAMMAR .

the consonant, or to the S ; thus S nya, or నౄ nya,

nya, Sny∞ , or j
or ను
ny∞, Snyoo, or nyoo. The same rule applies if the subsequent

vowel be long orō ; but, when this vowel is joined to the Sy,
--
the latter form only is used, and the v of being omitted , the
A -
alone is affixed to the S , the preceding ఎత్వము being
written above the consonant ; thus, nyo, or '
S nyo, or SS nyo.
In all other cases where S or other double forms are used, the subse-
quent vowel is attached to the consonant only, never to the double form ;
thus, Sryce & c.
SIGNS.

40 The consonants have two auxiliary signs , viz . Fr and Fn : the for-
mer is used to represent the letter or, and the latter the lettern, when
these letters precede another consonant without the intervention of a
vowel ; but, though pronounced before the consonant, r, is written
after it ; thus, Furkando , the sun. Then also represents

n, at the end of a word, thus poyen, he she or it went.

PRONUNCIATION.

It is not difficult to communicate, to an English reader , the proper arti-

culation of those Teloogoo characters, of which the pronunciation corres-
ponds exactly with the familiar sound attached to some English letter ; but
it is scarcely possible to convey, in writing, ajust conception of sounds al-
together foreign to the ear. Grammar, by instructing us in the theory of
a language, may enable us to read it with intelligence , and to write it with
correctness ; but no book can teach the practical use of a language ,
*
and the voice of an instructor is necessary, to communicate the full
force and tone of a letter, representing some articulation altogether un-
known to his pupil . A few concise rules, however, regarding the proper
pronunciation of the most difficult Teloogoo letters , may assist the stu-
dent ; but, without the aid of a native instructor,they will fail to afford sa-

tisfactory information . I shall accordingly attempt to explain, in the Ro-

man character, the sound attached to each ; and, in doing so, shall avail
myself of the system of Dr. Gilchrist, not less because it is the best with
which I am acquainted , than because most of those into whose hands this
 OF THE LETTERS. 15

work may fall will probably have acquired a knowledge of it, by the pern-
sal of some of that Gentleman's numerous and valuable publications , on
the Hindoostance , which is the universal language of the Mussulmans
throughout the Peninsula .
VOWEL S.

The duration of the sound of the vowels is divided into short, 41

A long, and continuous, the first occupying one, the second

two, and the last three moments of time ; and these measures of sound
apply both to the initial and connected forms of the vowels. The vowels
I u , 2 i, & 00 , 2000 ro,
∞ ,2 e, and 2 % , have each three measures of sound ;
namely, the short, the long , and the continuous ; the vowell has no
intermediate sound , but the extreme short and continuous sounds only ; and
the vowels uc, anduo , are both long , and continuous , but not short,
The short and long vowels are considered so different as to be represented
by distinct letters , but it has not been thought necessary to distinguish the
continuous measure of sound by separate characters .

The initial , and its connected form , have the sound of u, as in tun, 42
sun, or of the o in come, done . This sound must not be confounded with

the other sound given to u in English , as in cure, surc &c .

The initial and its connected form , have the sound of a, as in all, call. tall,
do ........ ... do ........ ...... do . short i, as in fit, kill. "1
..do.......... .... do , long ee , as in feet, keel.
do …….. ... Ġ …... ……..do ……………….. ♥ ……………..... do , short a , as in wool.
do ......... .do .................do . long oo, as in moon , boon,
do.............. do ....... ... do . short roo , as in rook.
do....... 2005 ... do................ do . long roo , as in room,
.......do . short loo , as in look.
do ................. do ……………….. do . short ě , as in they, or as ay in may say &c.
do ................. do ................. do . long e, as inthe same words lengthened.
do ................. do̟………… . or v...do. short ŏ , as in note.

do .......... ..do.... or ...do . long ō, as in no, low .

do ................. do ................. do ….…………………..ue , as the word eye, or as the uy in buy.
do ................ do …………………. ……………….. do ……………………..uo or ou in thou or of ow in how.
 16 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

43 Each ofthe long vowels should be pronounced full and broad , and the
voice should dwell upon them twice as long as upon the short vowels, which
should be sounded as short as possible .

44 When the sound of the vowel 9 i comes after another vowel, it is ex-

pressed by the consonant a y, (written without the - u ,) and that of

& by the character
; thus, Trai, a stone . bōce, apalan-
queen-bearer.

45 The long vowel and it's connected form , in some cases, which
must be learnt by practice , as they can scarcely be embraced by any rule ,
instead ofthe pronunciation before mentioned as that generally attached

to them , take a sound nearly approaching to → ya, and some what re-
sembling the final sound produced by the bleating of sheep ; hence, per-

hapsmēku, a sheep ; thus also, e nelu, the ground, and 3

nrumo, a crime are pronounced nearly as if written Se nyalu,
DS2 nyarumoo ; and, in the common dialect, they are often so errone-
ously written .
46 The sound above assigned to the vowels 200 ro, 25 , loo,
° roo , & m
as well as to their connected forms, ro, ♬ roo, and m loo, is that
which properly belongs to these characters in the Teloogoo language; and
which is invariably given to them by all the natives in the northern pro-
vinces of the Peninsula . In the middle provinces, the r and I are pro-

nounced with the tongee more curved towards the roof of the mouth, and
the oo less distinctly, with an inclination to the sound of the French u,
and to the southward, these letters assume the sounds of ri-ree-and lee-

given to them by Sanscrit Grammarians.

CONSONANTS.

47 It is chiefly in the pronunciation of the consonants that difficulty is

experinced .

khu, gh, chh, jh, th, dh, ☀th, dh, ph, bh,

the ten aspirated consonants, peculiar to Sanscrit derivatives, are not, at the
commencement of a word , familiar to an English car ; but they occur fre
quently in our language in the middle of compound terms ; the sound of
 OT THE LETTERS. 17

the h flowing, in an easy gentle manner, immediately after that ofthe k, g,

*
d, &e , which precedes it, without the least articulation intervening ; thus,

the sound of ♣ khu may be exemplified by that of the k, h in ink horn .

do………………….. № gh ...........do ..... ...gh in dog herd.
do... chh..do . ......... chh in church hill.
do ……
do........ & th ............do ...!
doth in that •house.
... do .......... i dh.hat……….do .……… .. dh'in¨ad,here .'
.9:0 bh´in abhor.
do... do ......
ph ... do •phin uphill, and so on .

k, and it's double form - k, have the sound of the English k, as 48

inking, va f

Xg, has the hard sound of gas in go, gun , & c , never it's soft sound as in 49
ginger & cs
gnu has the peculiar nasal sound of gn , as in the French words igno- 50
rance, digne &c . ..
: and have cach two sounds . & is pronounced either hard , as ch 51
in beach ; or soft, as tsin beats: and 2 is sounded either hard , as j injar ; or
soft, as dz in torridzone. The soft sounds ts and d are peculiar to the
Teloogoo ; and therefore, when or & occur in words of Sanscrit origin,

they are nivariably to be pronounced hard ; thus, oc chundrondoo

-the moon ,c∞ ∞ judondo , afool, never can be pronounced tsündrandio

dzudtonelo . In Teloogoo both the hard and soft sounds are to be found,
but the rule is simple for ascertaining which ofthe two is to be given to
these letters ; for if or & be followed by the connected vowels 9 i, §ee,
Pee, or we they are respectively pronounced hard , as ch , andj;
thus, & chetu, by. Be jetti, a wrestler. but iffollowed by any other vowel,

they always take the soft sounds ts and dz, as in 8 tsukkěru, sugar.
tsōtæ, a place . dzōdo, a pair.

nya, sounds like n before y, or as ni in the word onion. 52

td and n are the harshest possible sounds of t, d, and n , formed 53

by curving back the tongue, and forcibly striking the under part of it ,
against the roof of the mouth .
 18 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR,

54 td and In must be pronounced very soft, the tongue being pro-

truded, in an easy manner, almost between the teeth ; the sound of t in tube,
ofd in duke, and of n in no, will convey some idea of the proper pronun-
ciation of these letters,

55 The pronunciation of td and Jn is more soft, and that of o t & d

and n much harsher, than the sound ofthe English letters t d and n: but
-
all endeavours to convey in writing an accurate idea of the correct pronun-
ciation of these letters must, I fear, prove very inadequate to the purpose .
56 ప P, has the sound of p, as in pure .
b has the sound of b, as in bold,
మ m, and its double form m, have the sound of m, as in man .
మ y , ...... do....... y,, ........do ..........ofy, as in yet.
Sy
୪ r, ............ do .....
Ur, ………………..do ..........of r, as in river.
• 1, ........ do ........
....... 3 l , ........ do ..........of l, as in billow,
వ v,
3 ..... do ... Sv , ........do...... … of v, as in vain .
57
sh is a very soft smooth sound, between that of the s in the word
sing, and of the sh in shine, but approaching more to the former, than
555

to the latter sound.

58 sh, is the harshest sound of sh, as in push, bush &c .
59 s, has the sound of s, as in sister ; never as in dismal, his, rosy &c.

60 h, hasthe sound of h, as in hair. When this letter immediately pre-

cedes another consonant, as in the word , it ought, according to the

orthography, to be pronounced before it but in Teloogoo so harsh a

sound cannot be admitted, they therefore place the sound of the after
that of the following consonant, and pronounce the word abovementi-
oned Brumhu, instead of Bruhmu.

61 I partakes of the sound of both and r, and is formed by the under

part of the tongue curved back against the roof of the mouth : so far as
regards the language of which we treat, this letter is to be considered as
peculiar to the pure Teloogoo ; for though it occurs in the Sanscrit Vedas,

it is not to be found in any other Sanscrit work. It is common however to

all the spoken dialects of the Peninsula.
 OF THE LETTERS. 19

ksh Is a compound of s k and sh . It is rather a harsh sound re- 62

semblingthe ct in the English words fiction, fraction &c . &c .

rru is formed by a strong vibration of the tip of the tongue on that 63

part of the roof of the mouth which is next the upper teeth , as in pronounc-
ing the words real, run, the voice dwelling forcibly on the first letter.

The letter o n or m never occurs except at the termination of a sylla- 64

ble ; concluding the final syllable in a word it always represents the
sound ofm, as in mum ; in every other situation it is pronounced ", as in
none ; except in Sanscrit derivatives, when it precedes a consonant in-
cluded in any of the five Vurgus, it is then to be considered a mere abbre-
viation of the particular nasal which terminates the Vurgu to which the
consonant belongs, and is to be pronounced accordingly.

en occurs only in pure Teloogoo words, and like on or m, is found 65

always at the end of a syllable, it represents a very obscure nasal sound,
which is perhaps peculiar to the language, and can therefore be only
imperfectly illustrated by comparison with a slight indistinct pronuncia-
tion of the final n in the French words bon, non, &c . This letter is found

only in studied compositions ; but, though omitted in common writings ,

the sound of this curious nasal may be discovered in the pronunciation of
even the most ignorant natives.

The on or m is denominated DSL full unxswarum 66

These are of two
and the DDS 2 half unxswarum.
kinds, either radical in the word, or inserted or added by some grammatical
rule. The on or m never can be changed into c 2
· ; but if c n be preceded
by a short vowel , in order to render the quantity of this vowel long , the
cn may be changed into on or m ; thus , o mundo , medicine, never can
become ; but foc ↑ kulungi, possessing, may become ; and
రాముఁడు Ramanda , Rama, may become రాముండు .

8 h is peculiar to Sanscrit derivatives. In the middle of a word, it is, 67

pronounced like a strong aspirated h final; as o88 , untuhporu,
but, at the end of a word, it takes after it the sound of the vowel which
 20 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

terminates the preceding syllable ; thus , o8is pronounced untuhu , not

untuh as above. In Teloogoo it seldom occurs except in the middle of

compound words derived from the Sanscrit ; and therefore in general pos-
sesses only the first of the two powers here explained .:
GS -A clear, distinct, and correct pronunciation , and an easy deliberate man-

ner of speaking , are acquisitions of importance in all intercourse with the

Natives, bywhom they are highly valued as marks ofgood breeding . Eu-

ropeans are too apt to speak the Teloogoo in an abrupt, hurried, and
16.
consequently vulgar manner, and to disregard the great distinction be-
tween the long and short vowels , and theharsh and soft consonants, we are
in consequence otien unintelligible, or at least very obscurely understood by
the Natives, who are either too obsequious or too timid to explain their
perplexity ; and we are thus induced to blame their ignorance or stupidity,
when our own inattention alone is in fault.

ORTHOGRAPHY...

Founded on the principles above explained , nothing can be niore nice.

ly defined than the correct orthography of each Teloogoo word. The
writers on this language, indeed, seem to delight in a refined minuteness
and multiplicity of rule unknown to European authors ; and the least le-
viation from their established maxims would be considered an impardo-

nable error in any studied composition or literary work . But, in the collo-
quial use of the language, grammatical rule is more or less disregarded,
even by the most learned persons; and as the Natives, in familiar correspon-
dence, or official business , write as they would speak, many irregularities

in orthography are observable in common writings . The most general

are the following.

70 The consonant avy, without any connected vowel, is improperly used

instead ofthe initial vowel 2 i.
71 The consonant owy, with the connected vowel - a, viz , ig
is
incorrectly used instead of the initial vowel ee.
72 The consonant owy, with the connected vowel →, viz. , is used for
the initial vowel .
 OF THE LETTERS . 21

-S ē, thus , is used 73
The letter avy, with the connected vowel
instead ofthe initiale.

The consonantv, with the connected vowel v∞ , viz. , is incorrectly 74

used instead of the vowel ..

The consonantv , with the connected vowel ,thus is improperly 75

used instead of Goo .

The consonantv, withthe connected vowel orv,thus or 76

is used for 2 ŏ.

The consonantv , withthe connected vowel ~ or ~~, thus 5 or 77

is used instead of 2 ō.

The vowel u, with ay above mentioned, thus a , is impoperly 78

used, at the commencement of Sanscrit words, for the vowel uc ; but the

use of ea at the commencement of a pure Teloogoo word is not in-

correct.

The vowel u, with above mentioned, viz . 5, is incorrectly 79

used at the beginning of Sanscrit words for uo ; although it's use at the
commencement of pure Teloogoo words is proper.

The initial vowels, WWra & W ° roo, and their connected formsro 80
& roo, which are peculiar to Sanscrit derivatives , are often confounded

with the syllable X, or with the double form of 8 r (viz . ☺ r) and the

connected vowel voo, thus, Kykroshnu is erroneously written kroshnu

, and vice versa.
కృష్ణ ,
 CHAPTER SECOND .
-་

OF THE ELISION, INSERTION, AND PERMUTATION,

OF LETTERS.

ossessing the refined and inexhaustible Sanscrit, as the established me- 81

dium for the communication ofknowledge, to the few among
it's dissemination is thought to be lawful ; Teloogoo writers have had little
inducement to give much attention to the caltivation of their own langu-
age. - Their literature consists almost entirely of Poetry; and their Poets,
desirous only to please the ear, or to flatter the vanity ofthe reigning Prince ,
seem to have deemed the improvement of their style a secondary consi-
deration. The cadence of their verses, and the tones of the words com
posing them, have occupied almost their exclusive attention: The conse-

quence has been a neglect of the more important qualities of composition,

and a studied conciseness of expression, which, though not inelegant in
itself, has frequently the effect of rendering their sentences obscure. At the
same time, by a judicious union of the sweetness ofthe original Teloogoo,
with the majestic sounds ofthe sonorous Sanscrit, they have succeeded in
giving to the language a pleasing variety of modulation , which distin
guishes it from all others current in the Peninsula.

Another principal cause of this euphony is the extraordinary care that 82

has been taken, to prevent any incongruity of sound arising from the eon-
*
junction of dissimilar letters. The numerous rules, for this purpose, are
scattered, ina confused manner, through the works of many Grammarians ;

and, as the following is the first attempt to reduce themto methodical order,
it may hereafter, perhaps, be found susceptible ofgreat improvement.
 24 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

I shall endeavour to explain, 1st the alterations which take place in let-
ters at the beginning and end ofwords ; and 2dly, the changes which occur
in the middle ofwords . But it is proper, in the first place , to apprize the
Reader, that the following rules are by no means rigidly observed , except
in studied compositions . In the common or colloquial dialect, many of
the changes will occasionally be found it is true that they are not there
adhered to systematically, but even in that dialect they are seldom entirely
neglected . The Student, however, may find it more convenient to refer
occasionally to this chapter as he advances, than, at the very commence-
ment of his labours, to enter into some of the most perplexing niceties of
I the language .

OF THE ALTERATION OF LETTERS AT THE COMMENCEMENT AND

END OF WORDS ,

ahod : as pos
.99€
$3,9 In treating of this subject, the whole of the words in the Teloogoo lan-
guage are divided into two classes ; one termed skaloo, the other
es drootuprukrootooloo.blo sieh

841 The class termed en kululoo includes, 1st The singular and plural
nominatives of all nouns and pronouns, ( except I and he she
or it) and the oblique case, or what I have termed the inflexion, of all nouns
and pronouns, both in the singular and plural number.

2dly . The postpositions యొక్క o యొకటే క

, ూర్చి or గురించి towards ,

.on account of, పట్టుఁది through, చేసి from , పట్టిthrough, విషయము

respecting , నిమిత్తము on account of , కోసము or కో సరము for, on ac-
count of, & or o from, away from .

3dly. The final significant letters or ¯¯¯ expressing interrogation, ~ or

S ‫ס‬ 36
denoting emphasis, and or expressive of doubt.

; 4thly . Indeclinable particles, like అట, కద , ము , ఎలా , ఇంచుక ,

అంత ;, &c .

5thly. All Interjections, and vocative cases,

 OF THE CHANGE OF LETTERS. 25

6thly. The words , ఇప్పుడు now, అప్పుడు then, ఎప్పుడు when ?

7thly. Every part of the verb ; except the first and third persons in
the singular, and the third person neuter in the plural , of the first forms
of the past and future tenses, and of the affirmative aorist ; the first person
singular of the negative aorist ; the infinitive ; and the present verbal par-
ticiple terminating in ; and, when followed by vowels only, the inde-
finite relative participle ending in or , or the root when used for this
participle.
The negative verbal participle, which always ends in §, is classed both 85
in the še kululoo , and the es drootuprukrootvolvo .

The nominatives D I, TD he she or it , and the several parts of the 86

verb mentioned above, as exceptions ; together with all the other words in
the language, not included in the foregoing specification of the se
kululo , form the numerous class denominated త es drootupru-
krootooloo.

Every Teloogoo word, whether included in the class off kululo , or 87

es drootuprukrootooloo , naturally terminates in some one

of the connected vowels. I shall first point out the changes which occur
when any of these words is followed by another commencing with an

initial vowel ; and shall then explain the alterations that take place, when
any of them is followed by another beginning with a consonant ,

In Teloogoo, two vowels never can come in contact ; therefore, when gg

a word terminating in a connected vowel is followed by another commenc-
ing with an initial vowel, there is either the change termed by Grammarians
Sund hi, or a consonant is inserted between the two words ; unless the ini-
tial vowel be one of the Sanscrit letters ? 1'00 , 2005 roo , and m
, loo,
which at the beginning of a word , are to be considered the same as con-
sonants.
The consonants inserted , when Sund hi does not occur, are ay ifthe 89
former ofthe two words be included in the class termed es kululoo ,

and ♪ n if it belong to the ( 5 ) Ees drootuprukrootooloo ; but,

whichever of these two consonants is inserted , it changes the following
 26 TELOOGOO GRAMMA .

initial vowel into it's connected form, and, coalescing with it, forms, in

conjunction with it, one syllable.

90 Sund hiis the elision ofthe connected vowel terminating the first word,
and of the initial vowel commencing the following word, and the substi-
tution of the connected form ofthe latter vowel in lieu of both ; as shewn
in the examples hereafter given.

91 Sundhi never takes place unless the first word terminates in one of the
three short connected vowelsu,. i, oro, except ina few particular
instances noticed hereafter.

FINAL. ~

92 It may be adopted as a general rule that a word terminating in follow.

ed by another commencing with an initial vowel, may at option have
Sundhi . thus, I that grazed, and a cow, make the cow
-
that grazed, by dropping the final in and the initial & in e ,
and substituting for both the connected form of viz. '; which, unit-

ing with the preceding on, makes the syllable , by means of which the
L
two words coalesce . But as the Sund hi of final is optional, and J
is included in the class of 3 s kululvo, ɔk and SH , when Sund hi
does not take place, become , by the insertion of a be-
tween the two words, and the change of in the latter to it's connected
form ~~* , which , uniting with a , forms the syllable , by means of
which the words coalesce, as above stated .

EXCEPTIONS.

93 Words of the class termed ces drootuprukrootooloo, end-

ing in , never admit of Sundhi ; By rule $9, therefore, n is always
inserted after such words , when the following one begins with an initial
vowel. The word 205 more, is cxcepted ; for adding to it what?

wemay say, either 20s what more ? by inserting on, or 2020 by

Sundhi .

94 Vocative cases ending in , and the nominative case singular of pure

Teloogoo nouns denoting women, and terminating in , do not admit of
 OF THE CHANGE OF LETTER's . 27

$11
Sund hi, when followed by a word commencing with an initial ' vowel .

Being of the class namedse kululoo , such words assume yas explain-

ed in rule 89 ; thus, Roca woman and he she, or it gave , make

నెలతయిచ్చెను a womain gare, niever వేలఁ తిచ్చెను -కృష్ణుఁడ O Krishtna !

and ఇక్క_డరమ్ము come here, make కృష్ణుఁడయిక్క_డరము , 9o Krishina' !

cómile liere'; never కృష్ణుఁదిక్క_డరమ్ము:

FINAL
A word terminating in followed by another beginning with an ini- 95
tial vowel, does not, in general, admit of Sundhi ; thus 11 a knife, and
JH_where ; cannot by Sundhi become 91
, but make §41
where is the knife ? by inserting in the manner above explain-
ed ; being included in the class named ge kulula .

EXCEPTIO N S.
In the first form of the perfect tense of verbs, the second person singu- 96
lar ending in 3 or 3 , the first person plural termmating in 300 , and the
second person plural ending in , when followed by a word commencing

with a vowel, invariably have Sund hi ; thus thow servedst,

and ELX。 the gods , make 20291200 thou servedst the gods,
by dropping final and initial , and substituting, in lieu of both, the
connected form of viz. , which, joining with the preceding ∞ v, forms
the syllable , by means of which the two words coalesce .

In the same tense, the first person singular terminating in , and the 97
third person plural ending in 8 , may, or may not, have Sund,hi, at plea-
I have saluted, and the Unperishable,
sure ; thus,

3)
make ( I have saluted the Unperishable ( Vishtnoo)

వచ్చి రి·they came, and అమరు లు the Gods, make వచ్చి రమరులు the Gods
came ;the Sundhi, however, being optional, these phrases may have ano-
3
ther form. We may say ()¾ðus≈ Thave saluted the Unperi-
∞ the Gods eame ; heren is inserted
shable (Vishtnoo)
in the first phrase, because - is included in the á Fja
drootuprukrootooloo ; and Oy in the second sentence, because 8

is of the class named es kululo ..

 28 TELO OO GRAMMAR.

98 The pronouns & that, those, these,

& this , which? DI
which ? what ? the word e again , more, and the postposition ŝ to,

have optitional Sund, hi ; thus, అది and ' ఏమి make అదేమి or అదియేమి
what is that? and make for which are these ?

in the same manner we may say , చేసిన దేమి or చేసిన డియే what has
been done ? మలే మి or మఱి యేమ ి what more ? రాము నికి చ్చె ను or

TENDS D ZJ ∞ he, she or it gave to Rama . In all these phrases , except

the last , when Sund hi does not take place, oy is inserted ; because
each of the first words are included in the class termed es kululoo ; but

in the last sentence, n is inserted after 3, because it is ofthe class named

Há§es droo tuprukootooloo .

99 Words ending in , if followed by the word as added to adjec-

tives , or by
o how much ? have Sundhi at option , thus ; & and
యిన make వే టయ ిన or మే టి యయ ిన chief . In the same way , we say

పిం డెంత 01 ' పిండియెంత how much flour ?

FINAL.
100 It may
be taken as a general rule that words ending in v , followed by
others beginning with an initial vowel, invariably have Sund
, hi ; as
SWC
És Rama, and 2 he, she, or it gave, become
c& J Rama
gave. Innumerable other instances might be given.

EXCEPTIONS.

101 The accusatives & me; D thee, I

him, her, or it, Lyus,
మిమ్ము you, తమ్ము them , the postpositions కొరకు for, కు to , అందు in ;
the words os in which, 20in this , o in that, and the particle
added to the roots of verbs to form the present verbal participle , have
also Sund hi , when followed by an initial vowel , but it is entirely optional ;

tlius నన్ను we , and ఏలుము rule thou, make న న్నేలుము or నన్ను నే

es rule thou me, speaking,
thus he , she, or it said,
make OBD or CJXaQIB speaking, he, she, or it thus said

చెప్పుచు saying , and ఉన్నాఁడు he is make చెప్పుచున్నాఁడు or చెప్పు

 OF THE CHANGE OF LETTERS. 29

he is saying . In these phrases , when Sund hi does not take

WWDC
place, the first words being alles drootuprukrootooloo ,& n
is inserted between them and the words which follow.

The first and third persons singular in the affirmative aorist, the indefi . 102
nite participle in , or the root used for that participle ; and nouns in the
accusative singular ending in v, when deprived oftheir drootuprukrootica
affixes, never admit of Sund,hi ; as I come, have come, or will come,

now, make, I come, have come, or will come

and
he comes , has come, or will come, and jo now, make
now.
he comes, has come , or will come now. that pro-
Buy
& the god, and soc☎ I have meditated, make ✈
tects,
షించునీశ్వరునిఁదలఁచినాను I have meditated on the protecting God ,

the accusative of c Rama, deprived of it's drootupru-

he she, or it saw, make bo

krootica affixes, and
B he, she, or it saw Rama .

All words ending in any of the short vowels, invariably have Sund,hi, 103

when followed by Scfull , os as much as, at the rate of, and

aleaf; or by the words an elder brother, a mother,

an elder sister, DS a father, I a mother in law, a father,

a grand mother &c. when added to proper names to express familia-
S
rity or kindness ; thus , the hand, held so as to contain any thing, and

Dco full, make a handful ; an areca nut ; and o as

much as, make 805 as large as an areca nut ; eight, and I

at the rate of, make at the rate of eight ; Soobee, the

proper name ofa woman, and mother, make a friend Soo.

bee ! & a Palmyra (in the inflected case) and a leaf, makes

a Palmyra leaf.
Nouns of Sanscrit derivation, even ending in the short connected vowels 104
,, or v, which in the nominative singular do not adopt the Teloogoo
terminations Ct , Lv, or H, never admit of Sund,hi ; thus, o ,
 30 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

a swan, and which ? make which is the swan ?

durb ha, a kind of sacred grass, and da which ? make Bw which

is the durb ha ? the God Vishtnoo, and che, she, or it went, make
ON R Vishtnoo went . In all these instances , the first word is in-

cluded in the class of es kululoo, and therefore, as Sund hi does not

take place, is inserted between it and the following word, according to

rule 89.

105 Words ending in any ofthe long vowels never have Sundhi, nor do the
short vowels → orm admit of Sund hi, except when followed by

the words specified in rule 103. When followed by any other words be-
ginning with an initial vowel, words of such terminations, if they be
esdrootuprukrootooloo insert n, and if ∞ kulul∞∞ .

As the first word in each of the following phrases belongs to the class
termed ev , aw is inserted between it and the word which follows.

Lo a woman, and where ? make where is the wo .

man ? being inserted between and changes the following

initial vowel of to its connected forms, and uniting with it, forms.
one syllable , by means of which the two words coalesce ; sa Palan-

he, she, or it mounted, make ను he, she,

queen, and
or it mounted the Palanqueen ; coloured, and 23 a garment make

వన్నెయొల్లె a coloured garment ; night, and do lustre, make 30

moonshine; the body, and 2 beauty, make personal

beauty ; & money, and Ɔ donation, make the donation of

moncy; themoon, and he, she, or it arose, make
దయిం చెను the moon arose.

The first word in each of the following phrases being of the class na.
medes drootuprukrootooloo, n is inserted between it and
the word which follows .

Jaco slowly, and che, she, or it went, make fic

he, she, or it went slowly ; n being inserted between and
changes the following initial vowel of ac into it's connec-

ted forms , and uniting with it, forms one syllable , by means of which
 OF THE CHANGE OF LETTERS. 31

the two words coalesce ; theaccusative the Creator, and o

he, she, or it saw, make he, she, or it suw

the Creator ; God, in the accusative case, and he, she,

or it saw, make a bohe, she, or it saw God ; the God-
dess of learning, (in the accusative case) , and he, she, or it
asked, make he, she, or it asked the Goddess of learn-

ing; the moon (in the accusative case) and 30 having seen,
make క్లౌనాలో కించి having seen the moon. It must here be particularly
observed that the accusatives abovementioned are, in the first place, for

the sake of example, deprived oftheir drootuprukrootica affixes.

When a word, both ending and beginning with a vowel, is repeated, 106

there is Sund hi ; thus , an elder brother, when repeated, becomes

brother ! brother ! Do what, in the same manner, becomes

what ! what !

The pronoun she or it, when added , in composition, to other words, 107
frequently loses the initial ; thus, ca husbandman, a labourer,
and she, become, in composition, ca female labourer, by the
elision of eine ; but in consequence of c ending in v, Sund hi

also may take place, according to rule 100, and the two words in question
will then become ; in the same way, ses a man ofthe Comtee
east, and she, make § a woman of the Comtee cast, but as the
elision of is optional, we may also say కోమటియది by inserting యి
according to rules 95 and 89.

Inflexions ending in vor , though included in the class of ∞ 108

kululoo, affix ♪ n, when followed by postpositions , or prefixed in compo-
sition to other nouns commencing with an initial vowel, thus,
Ru-
ma, and ɔɔ opposite, make Topposite Rama, DL a
serpent, and gas hones, make Josses a serpent's bones.

Having thus endeavoured to explain the changes which take place, when 109
a word terminating in a connected vowel is followed by one commencing
 32 • TELOOGOO GRAMMAR
.

with an initial vowel , I shall proceed to state those which occur, when
a word ending with a connected vowel is followed by one commencing
with a consonant .

110
Ifa word beginning with a consonant be preceded by another included
in the class termed ev kululoo , there is no elision or insertion of letters ;
and permutation takes place in the following instances only.

111
Ill Nouns in the nominative case, even when used accusatively, and all parts

of the verb ending in ∞ , ∞ , and , together with the words

ఇప్పుడు 100 , ఎప్పుడు when ? preceding a word beginning with then,
of
any
the hard letters క చ ట త ప , change them respectively to X స డ ద వ ;
thus, wealth, preceding she orit willnot go, changes the pof
intov , and we say
riches will not disappear ; in the
same manner , We he is going, and a robber, make H

చున్నాఁడుగ ల్లరి the robber is going ; పోవుచున్నది she , or it is departing ,

and friendship, make
friendship is depart-
ing ; అప్ పుడ ు then , and చని యెన ు he, she, or it wen t, make అప్పుడు సని
Dhe, she, or it then went ; now , and he, she, or it
went , make
B he, she, or it now went.

112 But Sancrit derivatives, preceded by pure Teloogoo words, are excepted
from this rule, and are not subject to any change , because the nature of
such words is considered so different , as to prevent their coalescing in or-

thography ; thus, & Ca master, and §∞ he, she , or it was pleas-

ed, make so the master was pleased ; never &&&0

చెను - వీఁడు he , this man , and పుణ్యాత్ముఁడు a virtuous man ,make వీఁడు
See this is a virtuous man . Nevertheless , if two words both of
Sanscrit derivation come together , the general rule holds good ; because,

* Although may be changed into X - into - into- into and into

,the reverse of this rule does not hold good , these letters are not interchangeable : X can-
not by any means become 8, nor , &c. The first series may be converted into the
second, but the second can never be converted into the first.
 OF THE CHANGE OF LETTERS. 33

in that case, both the words are of the same kind , we therefore say రాముఁ
డుగరుణిం చెను never రాముఁ డుకరుణించెను Ruma was pleased .

When two pure Teloogoo substantives arejoined together by a copula. 113

tive conjunction, not expressed, but understood, and the latter word be-

gins with any of the hard letters , these letters are severally
changed to X ; thus, es a leg, and ses hands, make es

సేతులు legs and hands ; అన్న an elder brother , and త మ్ములు younger
brothers, make es elder andyounger brothers.

Ifa word commencing with any ofthe five hard letters , be 114

preceded by another included in the class termed ces drootu.

prukrootooloo , both permutation and insertion of letters invariably take
place ; but if the latter word begin with any other consonant, there is in-
sertion only, and it is optional.

When a word included in the drestuprakrootooloo pre- 115

cedes another word commencing with any of the five hard letters § 5 &

, it invariably changes these characters respectively , into the soft let-

ters , and ifit end in & or it is requisite to insert between
the two words, or ifit terminate in any other letter ; but if it already
end in or , these terminations cannot again beaffixed , for the repeti-
tion would be monotonous : at the same time, ifthe ses droo-

tuprukrootooloo end in a short vowel, either o or c

C may be substituted for
the D or D, but only if it terminate in a long vowel ; thus, & (the
accusative plural of 35 God) deprived, for the sake of example, of all
it's drootuprukrootica affixes, and G D Iserved, make sFour

లిచితిని or దేవతలంగొలిచితిని or దేవతలఁలిచితిని 1 served the Cads , by

changing the initial soff into , and inserting between the
two words, or inconsequence of the o in so beingshort, substitut-

ing either oor e får 3 .

I is converted into X - inte - és into ♫ - 5 into ☎ and L into 20, but, as

before observed ofanother rule, the reverso of these changes does not hold good.
 34 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

116 Any of thejes drootuprukrootooloo preceding a word com-

mencing with a consonant different from the five hard letters, without caus-
ing permutation , may at option affix I if it end in
or , or if it end
in any other vowe
l; but if it already terminates in
or these affixes are
not again to be added , because the repetition would be monotonous : either
nor F
may be affixed, in lieu of or , provided the consonants
4
are not the initials of the following word ; and if the follow-
ing word begins with గ జ బ మ ఠ డ ధ ద ధ కు , in place of ని or ను, ‘ wi
may at option affix o or c , provided the drootuprukrootooloo terminatė
in a short vowel , but if it end in a long vowel , we may insert cn only;
thus , deprived for the sake of example of all drootuprukootica affixes,
the accusative 8 an enemy, and R& D I won or conquered, make

8700 by affixing in consequence of e8 ending in ; or

R&D or FR by affixing n or F ; or 80 REDD
or RD90 by affixing o or c; or as the whole of these affixes
are optional , we may say simply I conquered the ene-
my: thus also deprived , for the sake of example, of all drootuprookroo-
tica affixes , the accusative e Giants , and 200 ° they

f killed ,makeరాకుసులను ఖండించినారు by affixing ను , or రాక్షసులనం

దించినారు or రాక్షసులు ఖందించినారు by affixing Snor F ; 2as
or
the whole of these affixes are optional , we may say simply
O
Do they killed the Giants ; but we cannot here affix o or c, and

say రాక్షసులం ఖండించి నారు or రాసుల ఁ ఖండించినారు , because

follows, and the affixes o orc precede the letters Xææ ãƒŏŏğäḍú
only deprived of all its drootuprukrootica affixes , the 3d person in the first
form of the past tense of to come viz. L he, she, or it came, and

-, డాంభికుఁడు , a corcomb , make వచ్చెను డాంభికుఁడు by affixing ను , or

వచ్చెండాంభికుఁడు or వచ్చెఁడాంభికుఁడు by affixing o or c ; or, as the whole
of these affixes are optional, we may say simply
suces a cox-
comb came , but we cannot affix n or F, and say
pouces
or వచ్చె౯ డాంభికుఁడు , because these affixes never precede the consonants
ఠ డ ఢ ద ధ కు ,
 OF THE CHANGE OF LETTERS. 35

Certain masculinenouns in vc form their accusative singular eitherby 117

changing cinto , or by dropping co altogether ; thus, Nom : 500€
Rama, Accus : Dor : in the latter case, it must be observ
ed, as an exception to rules 115 and 116, that to such accusatives in the

drootuprukrootica affix is to be added, instead of the affix ; thus,

, one of the accusatives of Rama , and Iserved, make
రామునిగొలిచితిని never రామునుగొలిచితిని Iserved Rama.

Nouns ending in change this termination optionally into 118

or -్యము ; thus, ముత్తియము a pearl, కడియము a bracelet, మిరియము
pepper , & c . make ము తైము or ముత్యము - కడెము or కడ్యము- మి రె

ము or మిర్యము, this rule is also applicable to nouns in 9 య.

OF THE CHANGE OF LETTERS IN THE MIDDLE OF WORDS.

The changes which take place in the middle of words are few and
easy, and consist chiefly of contractions which occur naturally in a quick
pronunciation .

Present verbal participles ending in preceded by , optionally drop 119

the v of , or sometimes change the into o , thus, saying,

కనుచు sceing , వినుచు hearing, make అను - కన్చు - విను , or అంచు

కంచు - వించు - చనుచు going , పూనుచు entering , and some other verbal
participles do not change into o , but they frequently drop the v in .

Verbal Roots of more than two syllables, of which --- or 120

es are medials, frequently drop the v of these syllables ; thus, to

plait, to twist, often becomes and to weep, to cry, day ;

but if, in such roots , one short syllable only precede & or es , no eli-
จ
sion of the 、 takes place ; thus, to wipe, cannot become , nor

నడుచు to walk, నడ్చు .

The words now , then, when ? optionally drop the 121

♥ of the middle syllable, and become respectively ·
- UT . JJ.
 36 TELO 00 GRAMMAL.

122 Nouns of three syllables, of which the middle one is ow or ∞ ,fre-

quently drop the v of these syllables ; thus, Devs a parrot, es.

water-course, make ☎ere ; and this elision of U takes place even in
other words ; thus, a buffalo ev a species of tiger,

sometimes become కార్పోరు . కోల్పులి .

123 X in the middle or end of a word is oftenchanged into ; thus, x

an ear -ring , పగడము coral, become alsoప్రోవు- పవడము ,

124 Many Teloogoo words which haver in the first syllable, frequently
lose it in the vulgar dialect ; thus, or an car-ring, is common-
ly both written and pronounced For JH.

125 The reader need not be surprized if, in the course of his studies , he
should meet with some examples in opposition tothe foregoing rules, sup-

ported by good authority. On no part of Grammar are the opinions

ofTeloogoo authors so much at variance, as with respect to the changes
attempted to be explained in this chapter: the ingenuity and subtilty with
which each combats the arguments of his opponent, have gained for every
celebrated writer on Grammar some adherents ; and as authors rigidly

observe the precepts of the particular Grammarian whom they select

for their guide, a comparison of almost any two books will exhibit some
discrepancies not to be reconciled . Every endeavour has been used to se-
lect those opinions which are most generally received at present, but the
subject itself is so intricate, and the opinions of native Grammarians re-
specting it so contradictory, that a foreigner who attempts to illustrate it
must necessarily feel diffident ofsuccess.
 CHAPTER THIRD .

The words ofthe Teloogoo language, formed ofthe letters treated of in 126
the foregoing pages, are classed by Sanscrit Grammarians under four

distinct heads . Ist . Deshyumoo , or, as it is more emphatically term-

ed, or Sax Utsu Deshyumoo , the pure language ofthe land ; 2d .

JH2 Tutsumumoo, Sanscrit words assumingTeloogoo terminations.

3d . J L Tudbhuvumoo, Teloogoo corruptions of Sanscrit words,

formed bythe substitution, the elision, or addition of letters ; and 4th.

52
+2: Gramyumoo, Provincial terms, or words peculiar to the vul-

gar. To these we may also add the SS ,, Unyu Deshyumoo,

or words from other countries, sometimes given as a subdivision ofthe first
Class , and comprizing, according to the definition * of ancient writers,
words adopted from the dialects current in the Canarese, Mahratta, Guze-

rat, and Dravida provinces only, but now also including several of Persian,

Hindoostanee, and English origin,

In each of the three following chapters, which treat of substantive- 127

nouns and pronouns, of adjective-nouns and pronouns, and of the verb ,

the will be distinguished from the words ; but all

3
observations regarding the and Swords will be
found in the chapter respecting substantives ; because the words of the
two last mentioned classes consist chiefly of substantives , and the reader,

reasoning from analogy, will find it easy to apply the rules given under
that head, to adjectives, and verbs.
 38 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

128
The , or provincial terms, are contractions or corruptions of
pureTeloogoo words, rather than a separate class of vocables ; 1 have there-
fore deemed it better to offer, in the course of the work, such remarks
respecting themas occasion has suggested, than to collect the rules regard-
ing them under any separate head .

4967

SUBSTANTIVES.

1ST OF THE POSTPOSITIONS .

Before entering on the subject of declension , a few preliminary observa-

tions are necessary, respecting that very useful class of words, by means
of which the various cases of the substantive nouns and pronouns, in this
language, are formed .

129 English substantives are declined by prefixing to them, in the singular

and plural numbers, certain particles, termed prepositions . The cases of
Teloogoo nouns and pronouns are formed in the same manner, except that
the particles follow the noun , instead of preceding it ; hence, I have termed
them postpositions . In Teloogoo, we would not say with swords, by men, of
P
me ; but కత్తులతో … మనుష్యులచేత నా యొక్క swords with , men by ,
me of.

130 When a preposition accompanies an English word which is liable to

inflexion, the word cannot stand in the nominative case ; it must as-
sume it's inflected or oblique form ; we cannot say of I, to I, &c. but of
me, to me, &c. In the same manner, in Teloogoo, notwithstanding some
nouns have nearly the same form in the inflexion, as in the nominative
case, yet as all nouns and pronouns may be said to admit of inflexion,
it may be laid down as a general - rule, that when followed by postposi-
tions, they cannot continue in the nominative case : by some of the post-
positions , they are converted into their oblique form ; by others, either
into this simple inflected state, or into the dative ; and by a few derived
from verbs, they are changed into the accusative case. The following
is a list of the principal Teloogoo postpositions . .
 OF THE CHANGE OF LETTERS. 39

CONVERTING THE PRECEDING WORD INTO IT'S OBLIQUE FORM.

యొక్క -
యొక్క యొక
- యొక .......... of; the sign of the Genitive case.
-X ....... to,for ; the sign of the dative case.
‫من‬ ..in ; the sign of the local ablative.
చే - చేత ....
.. ...... by, by means of; the sign of the instrumental
ablative .
తో తోడ .......
-తొడుత . with , along with ; the sign of the social ablative .
.... in, by, with.
లోపల .... within, inside.
వల్ల - వలన ....
. •
by, by means of, from.
కొరకు- కై ...... ... to, før.

నిమిత్తము .... …..for, on account of, about.

కోసము :కోసర ము .... on account of , for .
విషయము .......... respecting.
అందు ........ in.

....... ... like.

XO
గుండా :......... ...... through .
·
నుండి నుంచి from, away from.

FOUND IN BOOKS ONLY.

Cear -cavis . ...with, along with.

with, together with, for.
పొం
DXD......... by, from .

2-3 av ..... by, by means of.

CONVERTING THE PRECEDING WORD EITHER INTO IT'S OBLIQUE FORM

OR INTO THE DATIVE CASE.

To.. out- side.

పైన .. upon , above.

Ec ...... below, under.

సందున - మధ్య నడుమ between .

near.
దగ్గర - ఒద్ద ..
ముందర . before.
వెనక .......... behind , after.
 40 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR

వెంబడి .......
... behind.
ఎదురు గా - ఎదుట...... against , opposite .

CONVERTING THE PRECEDING WORD INTO THE ACCUSATIVE CASE.

KDF-X8CD-xdo towards, on account of.

FOUND IN BOOKS ONLY

పట్టుంది .. ......through .
చేసి .
form, by.

పట్టి ... ... through.

131 Under the following rules , the whole of these words may be added to

any noun or pronoun, placed in the particular case which , the postposi
tion is stated above to require.

132 The postpositions 8- ,the signs ofthe dative case, are not used promis-
cuously with any inflexion ; & is added only to inflexions terminating
inor ; thus, inflexion & Vishtnoo, dative ✪ to Vishtnoo ;
inflexion & The Goddess of prosperity, datives to The Goddess of

prosperity ; and & to inflexions ending in any other letter, inflexion \

a stick, dative to a stick, inflexion 8 a ruler, dative to
a క ట్టకు t
aruler, inflexion a woman, dative to a woman : but it

is requisite to insert the syllable between 0 and all inflexions ending

in voor ; as, inflexion 3 Rama, dative to Rama,
inflexion Cox beauty, dative o∞ to beauty.

133 The postposition is added only to the inflexions of nouns denoting

inanimate things ending in v ; thus, we may say in the paper,
because the inflexion ends in ; but we cannot add to
a female garment, for it ends in ~, nor to ahorse, because it is
an animate object.
134 Inflexions always terminate in some vowel , and the postpositions o
దు, అఱఱ , అయిఱత , ఎదుట , and ఎదురు గా commence with vowels ; but,
by the rules already given, two vowels cannot come in contact ; a singular 1
inflexion terminating in voor ) , although included in the class termed
ku,luloo, when followed by these postpositious , affixes on ; thus, T
opposite Rama &c . (rule 10S) . When these postpositions, however,
 OF ME CHANGE OF LETT ERS. 41

follow a singular inflexion ending in any other vowel, or plural inflexions

which always end in e , such inflexions being of the class named e

ku luloo , a is inserted between them and the postpositions in question,

which , in consequence , become respectively యందు - యజఱు -యత-యె
దుట and యెదురు గా ; thus , దొర లయందు in rulers ; at thesame time,
as all plural inflexious end in e , and therefore have inherent the connected
vowel , which before an initial vowel, may, by the rules before given,
have Sundhi at option , we may also sayo in rulers &c . &c.

or wax and are never subjoined to any words except verbal 135
nouns , or nouns denoting inanimate things ; and is used only after ab-
stract nouns .

కూచిF . పట్టుఁది- చేసి and పట్టి always change into గూచి F- బట్టుఁది . 136
and , when used as postpositions.

The nature and use ofthe foregoing words will be more fully explain- 137
ed in the Syntax, where it will be shewn that many of them , though used
as postpositions , are in fact parts of nouns, or forms of verbs . I have no
doubt that the whole are derived from the same sources: at the same time,
´without a further knowledge of the ancient dialect than we now possess,
it would be difficult to trace the origin of some pure Telvogoo derivatives,
such as the sign ofthe genitive, and or & the signs of the da-
tive case. This difficulty has led some to treat these, and similar words ,
rather as affixes inseperable from substantives , than as a separate class of
vocables. But, whatever may be the history or etymology of these words,
whether they are derived from nouns or verbs now obsolute, or are them-
selves original terms, there is no doubt that, in use, they are distinct from
all others in the language, and precisely equivalent to our English pre-
positions. This , I think, justifies my classing them as a separate part of
speech, and giving them the appellation by which I have endeavoured to

distinguish them .
2d. OF THE ARTICLE.

The articles a and the may be considered as inherent in the noun ; a 138
according to the context, may mean either a or the person.
 42 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

139 The indefinite article a is sometimes expressed by the numeral 28, vul-

garly written , meaning one; as, a one or a person .

140 There is not any separate word to represent the definite article the .
In the concise and nervous idiom which characterizes the Teloogoo, this
article, together with the relative pronoun who, which, that, is incorpo-
rated with the verb , in that curious part of it termed the relative participles,
which possess the combined force of the definite article, the relative pro-
noun, and the verb ; thus , in the sentence D∞ theperson
who saw me ; five English words are expressed by three Teloogoo terms,
న signifies me, D∞ person, and ∞ has the power of the, who,
saw.
3d . OF THE DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVE NOUNS .

141 ఏకవచనము ,
The substantive nouns have two numbers ; the singular ' 3WJL0,
and the plural బ హువచనము ; and three genders, the masculine పుల్లింగ ము ,

including the gods and men only ; the feminine 20X , comprizing
the goddesses and women ; and the neuter oox , including
inanimate things , and all animals , except the human species.
142 The cases are properly three only ; the nominative, the inflexion , and the

accusative ; but, in the following general remarks applicable to all nouns ,

the usual arrangement of six cases is observed.

SINGULAR.
143 It has already been mentioned that there are few words in the Teloogoo
language which terminate in a consonant, among the nouns there is not
one. In the nominative case singular, they all terminate in some of the
following vowels ------
~—9 § sor π ;; thus , & Caruler,
→ Scromszor
నవలా a woman , కల్ల రి a robber , అందము beauty , కాలూ a shawl,
୪ a stick, thehand &c .
33
144 The Inflexion singular varies with the declension, as explained hereafter.
145 The Genitive singular of all nouns is the same as the inflexion singu-
lar ; but, in books , and in conversation with Bramins , we occasionally find

the postposition — or Rs of, added to the inflexion, to form the

genitive,
 OF THE CHANGE OF LETTER S. 43

The Dative singular is formed by adding 3 to inflexions in 99 or 2-5 146

to inflexions in voor , and to inflexions in all other terminations .

All nouns in the Accusative singular are the same as in the singular 147
inflexion ; except that the inflexion is of the class termed es kululoo,
and the accusative of that named ( es drootuprukrootooloo .

That the reader may always bear in mind this distinction , the inflexion
will hereafter be written in it's simple state, but to mark the accusative,
the affix will be added to all inflexions in or , (except to inflexions
formed by changing the termination ofthe nominative into that syllable) ,
and the affix to all those ending in any other letter , (except to those men-
tioned in rule 117) and an & c will be further added to all , to denote that,
although the affixes or are universal in the common dialect, and in
correct language may, with propriety, be used before any consonants, yet
others may be substituted in lieu of them, under the rules for drootupru-
krootooloose , contained in the preceding chapter.

The Vocative singular is either the same as the nominative singular, 148
or is formed by merely lengthening the final vowel of that case ; unless the
nominative end in v, when that vowel is changed into or ..

The Ablative singular is formed by adding to the singular inflexion the 149
postpositions 5- &c. or to the inflexions of nouns denoting
inanimate things ending in v.

PLURAL.

The Nominative plural is formed, in various modes, from the nominative 150
singular, according to the declension to which the substantive belongs .
It always ends in ev.

The Inflexion plural is formed by changing es of the nominative plural 151

into .

The Genitive plural ofall nouns is the same as the inflexion plural, but 152
in books and in conversation with Bramins, we occasionally find the post-

positions — or 3 of, added to the inflexion to form, the genitive,

 44 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR,

153 The Dative plural is formed by adding & to the inflexion plural in e.

154 The Accusative plural is the same as the inflexion plural, both ending
in ; but the inflexion is included in the kululoo , and the accusative in the
ద్రుత ప్రకృతులు drontuprukrootooloo . To remind the reader of this
material distinction, the inflexion will hereafter be written in it's simple
.
state, without any of the additions peculiar to the ku, luloo ; but , with

an &c, will be added to all plural accusatives , for the reasons mentioned in
treating ofthe accusative singular: D is never affixed to plural accusatives,
because they always end in e, never in or 2.

155 The Vocative plural is formed by changing the final V ofthe nominative
plural into ౮ or రా .

156 The Ablative plural is formed by adding to the plural inflexion the post-
positions . - * &c .

157 The Vocative particles, 8-2-2a and 2, are often prefixedto the
vocative case : the first is used in calling men of inferior rank only, the 1se-
cond in calling females inferior to oneself, among whom a wife is always
included by the natives, and the third in calling men of equal rank with
oneself; these three are prefixed to the vocative singular only : the last is
prefixed to the vocative both in the singular and the plural number, and
is used indifferently in calling superiors, inferiors, or equals .

158 It is ofgreat importance that the reader should constantly bear in mind
that, in nouns denoting inanimate things, the nominative is generally used
for the accusative, and the accusative for the ablative, but that this is not

the case with nouns denoting animate objects.

159 By the addition of the various postpositions to the different cases which
they govern, the reader may form any number of other cases at pleasure .

160 The nouns belonging to the , or language of the land, are

more numerous than those of any other class ; and, as the rules which re-
gulate their declension extend also to nouns of the three other denomina-
tions, it scems proper to treat of them first.
 OF SUBSTANTIVES. 45

OF REGULAR 285500 NOUNS.

The regular nouns of this class are divided into three declensions . The 161
first includes all masculine nouns, the nominative singular of which ter-
minates inc ; the second , all feminines or neuters of more than two

syllables , having the nominative singular in " ము - ము - or ము ;

the third, nouns of all genders not included in either of the two forego-
ing declensions . The general rules, already given , explain the mode in
which the different cases are formed from the nominative singular, the

inflexion singular, or the nominative plural . It will be sufficient, there-

fore, to shew how these three cases are formed in each declension ,

FIRST DECLENSION IN C.

Many nouns denoting masculine agents have the nominative singular 162
in c ; but, as the letter c is unknown to any, except the learned, the c pre-
ceding is usually omitted in writing, and the nominative of this declen-
sion is consequently made to terminate simply in . The obscure nasal

sound ofc before will notwithstanding be found in the pronunciation

of even the most illiterate persons.

The singular inflexion of nouns belonging to this declension is form- 163

ed by changing the final of the nominative into ; thus, nom :

మ Xఁ డు a husband , inflex : మగని . nom : తమ్ముఁడు a younger brother ,
inflex : 5. But, with the exception of a younger brother,
and a son in law, all nouns of this declension , which have the

vowel preceding co of the nominative singular, may also form the

singular inflexion by merely dropping the termination ; the inflexion
of Xc & a husband, is X only, never X ; because v does not pre-
cede the ofthe nominative case; but, with the two exceptions above-
mentioned, all words which have v before c of the nominative have
two forms in the inflexion ; thus, nom : ca strong man, inflex:
బల్లిదుని or బల్లిదు .

The nominative plural is formed by changing ofthe nominative sin- 164

gularinto ev ; thus, nom : sing : a husband, nom : pl : Xe hus- .
 46 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

165 bands , nom : sing : ayounger brother, nom : pl : 5s younger

brothers.

The other cases of this declension are formed according to the gene-

ral rules given above ; and, for the sake of illustration , a word of this
declension is subjoined, declined according to the usual arrangement of
six cases .
SINGULAR .

N: తమ్ముఁడు ....... ·a younger brother.

G: తమ్ముని or తమ్ముని యొక్క of a younger brother.

D: తమ్మునికి..... to a younger brother ,
.....•a younger brother.
Acc : తమ్ముని & c ..
తమ్ముఁడా ........ ..... 0 younger brother.
V :
·
Ab : 52a..Ez - F° .......... in , by or with a younger brother .

PLURAL .

తమ్ములు . ... younger brothers.

N:
......
... ofyounger brothers.
G: తమ్ముల or తమ్ముల యొక్క
D: తమ్ములకు to younger brothers.
....・younger brothers.
Acc : తమ్ములను & c .
V: తమ్ములారా ..... .0 younger brothers ,

Ab : 522-5.35 - F............ in , by, or with younger brothers .

°

166 By rule 163, all words, except and eyes, which, in the
nominative singular, have the vowel v preceding the final termination c∞,
may in the inflexion singular have two forms : such words, therefore, have
likewise two forms in the genitive , dative, accusative, and ablative singular,
which are formed from the inflexion ; thus, nom : sing: a strong

man , inflex : sing : బల్లిదుని or బల్లిదు . gen : sing : బల్లి దుని యొక్క or బల్లి

దుయెక్క_ dat : sing : బల్లిదునికి or బల్లిదునకు , by the addition of t to

బల్లి దుని , or న కు to బల్లి దు, see rules 132 & 146 – acc : sing : బల్లిదుని & c . or
&c . seerule 117 , abl : sing : -.- or we ..

- ; and even and c , which, in the other cases, are

 OF SUBSTANTIVES . 47

exceptions to this rule, in the dative singular, take two forms : viz . 5 ,

నికి or తమ్మునకు- అల్లునికి or అల్లునకు. The plural however has no change

of this kind .

In the inferior dialect, & is substituted for in all the singular cases of 167
this declension , except the accusative, which is made to terminate in
instead of ; thus, nom : sing : c , inflexion sing : 5 , dat :

sing : తమ్ముడికి accus : sing : తమ్ముణ్ని & c . but these forms are never to
be found in correct writings.
EXCEPTIONS .

Some words, of this declension , form the nominative and inflexion plu- 168

ral , by changing the final co of the nominative singular into o ( and

o , or into and o , instead of forming them regularly, by chang-

ing into and e respectively ; thus, Xoc a robust man, makes

inu the nominative plural గండండ్రు ఒక్కఁ డు one man , makes in the nom :
pl : 220exc a son in law, makes in the nom : pl : vo
and this rule applies to many other words of the same kind .

SECOND DECLENSION INCLUDING FEMININE OR NEUTER NOUNS, OF MORE

THAN TWO SYLLABLES , IN " ము - ము or 20.

There is a numerous class of neuter words of more than two syllables 169
ending, in the nominative singular, in , and several in and

-3 ; but a wife, is almost the only feminine noun of this de-

clension .

The inflexion singular is the same as the nominative singular, thus, 170
K
nom : sing : ୧୬ a horse, inflex : sing : గుఱ్ఱము..

The nominative plural is formed either by adding e to the nominative 171

singular, or by changing the termination of the nominative singular
into e , and lengthening the preceding vowel, if not already long ; thus,

nom : sing : a horse, nom : pl : xet wes or to FN

లు horses.

$ The other cases

are formed according to the general rules already given . 172
Subjoined is an example of this declension, declined according to the
usual arrangement of six cases.
 48 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR .

SINGULAR .

N: గుఱ్ఱము a horse.
G : గుఱ్ఱము or గుఱ్ఱము యొక్క .... of a horse.
D : to a horse .
గుఱ్ఱమునకు ...
Acc : X
గుజ్జుమును & c . a horse.

V: గుఱ్ఱమా . o horse.

Ab : గుఱుము -- లో
♪- .5 5 - 5.....
చేత తొ . in , by , or with a horse.

PLURAL .
... horses .
N: గుఱ్ఱములు or గుఱ్ఱాలు ........

గుఱ్ఱముల or గుఱ్ఱములయొక్క ) ....

G; or .....of horses .

గుఱ్ఱాల or గుఱ్ఱాల యొక్క-

D: లకు ..... ...to horses .
గుఱ్ఱములకు or గుగుఱ్ఱా

Acc : or ను & c .
గుఱ్ఱముల ..horses .
·
గుఱ్ఱాలను & c .
.......o horses.
V: గుఱ్ఱములా రా or గుఱ్ఱాలా

గుఱముల - లో - చేత " తో .

Ab : or
.in , by , or with horses ,
· తో
గుఱ్ఱాల - లో - చేత

173 All nouns in this declension , besides the dative singular as given above,
may also form that case by changing ofthe nominative into 2, length-
ening the preceding vowel, if not already long, and affixing the postposi-
K
tion కి instead of కు ; thus, nom : sing : గుఱ్ఱము a horse , dative sing : గుట్టు
మునకు or గుట్టునికి nom : sing : లంచము a bribe , dative , sing : లంచము
నకు or లంచానికి ,

174 The postposition added to the singular inflexion of nouns ending in

denoting inanimate things, is either affixed in the regular manner to in-
flexions of this declension , or the 3 of the inflexion is changed into ,

and the preceding vowel , if not already long, is lengthend ; thus కాగిద
మున or కాగిదాన in paper .
 OF SUBSTANTIVES. 49

The nominative singular of nouns in this declension is often, in books, 175

found changed, from ,to or ow ; thus, nom : sing: La horse,

is often found written or
euow . This rule, however, does
not apply to nouns which have the long vowel preceding the final

ము ; పెండ్లాము n' wife, can never become పెండ్లామ్ము .or పెండ్లాం బు.

In the inferior dialect, all the singular cases in this declension , (except 176
the accusative) , ending in 3 , constantly change that termination into o ;
thus, in conversation we frequently hear Keto
to garrum used for Gev
et 500
garrumo, but this practice is contrary to the genius of the language,
which requires all words to terminate with a vowel .

The accusative, in the inferior dialect, is formed by changing of 177

the nominative singular into , and lengthening the preceding vowel, if
not already long ; thus , nom : sing : a horse , acc : sing : K
୧୦ .
త్రాన్ని nom : sing : లంచము a bribe , acc : sing : లంచాన్ని .

The following, with all other neuter or feminine nouns, of more than 178
two syllables, ending in , 200, or ము, are declined like గుట్టుము .

XL .......... the chin, a beard, అంపము ........ a saw.

అమ్మకము .... sale. జగడము ....

xx a fight, a battle.

20700200 ....a wife 18 . tin .

వ్యాజ్యము .... a dispute . JoJo L ..... residence .

......
... lime, chalk. 055 ...... an elephant's trunk.
సున్నము .
తాళము ........ key . BL ......... an accusation.

బీగము .. ... the lock of a door. £83.a crime.

50 ........ lead. పం దెము ...... a wager .

Xow ........ an iron style. BL a shield… ·

8 ? 20. a bridle.
బియ్యము ..... rice .

చక్కఁదనము beauty . W3_2

.... aflag.

Bejaggory. ........
బ ల్లెము a spear.
 50 TELOO GOO GRAMMAR.

THIRD DECLENSION.

179 This declension includes all other regular nouns , of every gender, not

comprized in the two foregoing declensions ; it comprizes , therefore, all re-

gular neuters in 5 , all regular nouns in ɔ of two syllables only, or of
more than two syllables when the 3 is not preceded by or ; in
short, it comprizes every regular noun whether masculine, feminine, or
neuter, provided it be not a masculine in c , or a feminine or neuter, of

more than two syllables , in ము, రాము or ము ,

180 The inflexion singular is always the same as the nominative singular ;
thus, nom : sing : ☎ a child, inflex : sing : 23. nom : sing : I a knife
or sword, inflex : sing : S.

181 The nominative plural of nouns of this.declensionis formed by addinges

to the nominative singular, except to those ending in short which change
the final into ve ; as, nom : sing: a child, nom : pl : age chil-

dren ; but as the noun a knife or sword, ends in , it makes ev

swords, in the nominative plural , never ev.

182 The following is an example of this declension, declined according to

the usual arrangement of six cases .

SINGULAR. PLURAL,

a child, N: ... children.

N : బిడ్డ

G : బిడ్డ or బిడ్డ యొక్క of a child G : బిడ్డల or బిడ్డల యొక్క of children .

to a child. D : .... ..to children.

D : బిడ్డకు------

a child . Acc : ......... children.

Acc: 35 ≈ &c.
. & c .·

o child . . V బిడ్డలారా ... o children .

V : బిడ్డా ..........

Ab : బిడ్డ - లో - చేత - తో .in . Soc . do Ab : బిడ్డల -లో- చేత తో in ssc . do..

 OF SUBSTANTIVES . 51

A few of the numerous words included in this declension are annexed . 183

a father. BD the ear.

enary....
అబ్బ
తల .....
........... the head. పని ......... business .

xo
గుంట . a pond, or tank. పంది ...... ... a hog.

వెల ....……... …….. a price . కోతి ....... ……….. a monkey.

గొల.......
............. a bunch.
బావి ......
. a well..

80 . • a mountain.
కొండ ...... ..... ... a wrestler .
Jevš......... a rat.
పల్లకీ ....´………………….. a palanqueen .
.............. a span . ....... a roll of beetle &c .
33
ఎముక ........ a bone. సాము ..... a snake.

చెరువు .... ...... an artificial lake.

కూర .... .... curry. LBOX

మడుగు . .......
... a natural lake.

దవడ .... • the check . TO .......... the neck.

దూడ .......... a calf the nose .

. 200302
అడుగు .
Its a foot in length, a
కప్ప ............
... a frog.
[foot step.
Dox smoke. విందు ••••••••• an entertainment

B
మెడ ..... the neck . రొమ్ము ..... the breast.

...... .... a bud, LOL.......... medicine.

మొగ్గ .
నవలా .........
a woman. తావు . a place.
కొరడా . a whip. a bull, an ox.
ఎడ్డు ............
కల్లరి . a robber. పురుగు .... an insect.
చూపర .
ి ....... a
beauti
ful per son .
person . ..
· time.
పొద్దు ....
తలార
3o 8 .. ...... a village- watcher .
ి ....
....... ... fire .
Day...
Da
సోమారి ...... a lazy fellow.
గుద్దు ......... a blow.
దాది ... .... a nurse.
తలుపు . a door .
 52 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

atonly ....bedding . WE B ........an ass .

TH............ a grove. 1363 3 ... a window.

ఆకు
BJ's a leaf. 1& 7 ……………….a creeping plant.
WXJ..........a
పిడుగు ... thunder-bolt.
పల్లె . …… a small village .
ప ల్లె....
2200 ……
..a letter..
bo Ba large metal pot .
తుమ్ము ... ···a "siteeze ..
Db Ta spear, or pike .
..... ••a÷ cup.¨
དེ ཚོན ..
xd ........ a spoon . పెట్టె . a box, a.chest, atable.

13 ....... ...the body.

బూడి దె ........ ashes .

IRREGULAR PLURALS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION .

184 Many nouns ending in ,,,,, or , which are regular both in

the singular and plural , frequently drop the of the penultimate syllable in
the plural number ; thus , aperson ofthe Comitee cast, makesthe nom:

pl : ī మటులు or కోమట్లు ; and if a double consonant precede the v

thus dropped , it is reduced to a single consonant in the nominative plural ;
thus, a tree, Rev or trees . బుడ్డ a bottle, nom : pł : w
బుడ్డులు
ి
or a bottles. X an egg, nom : pl : Kw or eggs &c .
డ

185 Some nouns in or , regular in both numbers, form also an irregular

plural, by changing the or ofthe nominative singular into ; thus,nom :
sing : & powder, regular nom : pl : e , irregular nom : pl :;

186 All nouns in this declension ending in & or , which have the letter Cor
o immediatly preceding these terminations , besides the regular plural, may
have two irregular forms, viz . by changing the & or of the nomina-
tive singular into either or ; thus, nom : sing : wo a carriage, nom ;

pl : బండులు , irregular nom : pl : బండ్లు or బండ్లు .

187 Many nouns having the termination ofthe nominative singular in ore ,
in addition to the regular plural, form an irregular one in the manner men-
tioned in rule 185 ; thus, an alligator , makes in the nom : pl : either
 OF SUBSTANTIVES. 53

మొసలులు- or మొ సళ్లు ; but nouns oftwo short syllables ending in లి or లు

have the regular plural only, a tiger, makes eves tigers, never .

The noun od marriage, makes in the nom : pl : odo , or 188

పెండింళ్లు or పెండిండులు marriages .

Some nouus, having the nominative singular in , ‫ י‬change that syl- 189

lable in the nom : pl : into ces ; thus, a tank , nom : pl : C

Kes; others cliange the into cxe ;thus, the name ofa tree, nom:

pl : cx ; others change the into es in the nom : pl : as, 25

afish, nom : pl : Des fishes, and others have the regular plural by
adding es to the nom : sing : thus, the body, nom : pl : es bo-

dies, the waist, nom : pl : 3° Dev waists.

The noun a night makes the nom : pl : Bev , and the noun & 190
a cow, makes in the nom : pl : either ses or Sev.

NOUNS.
IRREGULAR. దేశ్యము
As it is hardly possible to form any general rules for the declension of the 191

irregular దేశ్యము nouns: a list of most of them is subjoined , shewing the

nominative singular, the inflexion singular, and the nominative plural of
each . Except in the formation of these cases, the whole follow the general
rules for declension laid down in rule 143 & c.

Most of the following nouns change the last syllable of the nominative 192.
singular into or c to form the inflexion singular, and into o or
to form the nominative plural , some of them also form the nominative
plural, in the regular manner by adding to the nominative singular .

Nom : Sing: Inflex : Sing: Nom : Pl:

Water boiled, for the pur-

ఎ సరు ఎ సరులు or ఎ సళ్లు
}
{pose of dressing rice &c.....

Any thing placed under a

round vessel, to prevent it's కుదుటి కుదురులు or కుదుళ్లు
కుదురు
falling, such as a straw
∙rope &c ………….
54 TELOOGOO GRAM M A Ri

Nom: Sing: Inflex : Sing : Nom : Pl :

నుదురు The forehead ... నుదుటి నుదుగులు or నుదుళ్లు

సెూరు సెటి
The mouth................... 23 మోరులు or నెూళ్లు

పడమ The west..... పడమటి పడమలులు

ఏఱు A river ...... ఏటి ఱు లు or ఏళ్లు

A plain, an open field , an

జైలు empty space of ground , an > బైటి శైలులు or బైర్లు
.....
Esplanade, the outside...
అంబలి అంగలులు or అంగళ్లు
The palate or throat ......... అంగిటి
అంబలి A kind of pap made of raggy . అంబటి అంబలులు or అంబళ్లు

కౌగ
3
°Cిలి ( Thebreast, literally theplace ces chever or3°c
Rof embrace .
....
గుప్పిలి The fist గుప్పిటి గుప్పెలులు or గుప్పిళ్లు

చెక్కలి The cheek ...... చెక్కిటి చెక్కలులు or చెక్కళ్లు

The imaginary pollution )
పురుడు proceeding from the birth of పురిటి పురుడులు or పురుర్లు
.a child....... of

దొ యిలి { The palms of both hands join- } దోయిటిదో యిలులుo దోయిన్లు

ed together to hold anything . S
దొ పిలి to........ do ........ do ... దోసిటి దో ఖలులు or దోసిళ్లు
దోసిలులు
నాగలి A plough..........
A ...
నాగఁటి నాగలులు నాగళ్లు or నాగండ్లు .
పిడికిలి The fist......... ఒడికెఁటి బడికెలులు or పిడికిళ్లు

పుక్కిలి The interior of the cheek .... పుక్కటి పుక్కిలులు or పుక్క ర్లు
పుక్కిళ్లు
( The palm of one hand, held )
వుడిపిలి Sim such a mammer as to con- వుడి సిటి పుడి పిలులు or పుడిసిళ్లు
Ctain any thing placed in it.

A number of loose bricks or )

SA
పొక్క_లి < stones, formed into a
afire- పొక్కటి పొక్కళ్లుంx
పొక్కళ్లుంపొక్కండ్లు
పొక్కండ్లు
.....
place...

పొక్కిలి Thenevel ....... పాక్కిటి పొక్కిళ్లు

The Courtyard, the enclosed)

ముంగిలి empty space of ground with- ముంగిటిముంగిలులు or ముంగిళ్లు
in a native house......

రోకలి A large pestle......... . రొకఁటి రోకలులు or రోకళ్లు

 OF SUBSTANTIVES . 55

Nom : Sing : Inflex : Sing : Nom : Pl:

లోగిలి The interior .... లోగిటి లోగిళ్లు or లోగిం డ్లు

బండ్లు
లో
వాకిలి An opening , a door -frame . వాకిటి వాకిళ్లు or వాకిండ్లు

సందిలి S The arm between the shoul- ) సందిటి సందిలులు or పందిళ్లు

[der and the elbow ............. or

గాడి Areservoir , acistern .aman- గాటి గాడులు or గాళ్లు

Rger ...

కాడు ( A sepulchre, a place for bu- కాటి

Trying or burning the dead. S కాళ్లు
కూడు Food ........ కూటి కూడులు or కూళ్లు

The water in which rice has)

కూరాడు beenwashed , grown sour ands కూరాటి, కూరాడులు or కూ
రాడు <been రాళ్లు
( boiled , vinegar.......
కోడు The leg of u bed- stead ..... కోటి కోడులు or కోళ్లు
A rope. తాటి త్రాడులు or త్రాళ్లు

The earth on salt or barren)

చవుడు చవుటి
{ ground , fuller's earth....... బావు టి చవుళ్లు

తాడు The Palm tree ...... తాటి తాడులు or తాళ్లు

గూడు * A nest........... గూటి గూడులు 10 గూళ్ళు

A Country, or district ;
నాడు a general assembly : it also నాళ్లు
means a day , or time...

Rising ground unfit for the

cultivation ofgrain, inwhich
సాడు . పాటి పాడులు or పాళ్లు
tobacco and other plants of
the same kind are grown ...

పెరడు The backyard... పెరటి పెరడులు or పెరళ్లు

బీడు Pasture land . .... బీటి బీడులు or బీళ్లు
వీడు + A Town ....... వీటి వీడులు or వీళ్లు

* గుడ్డు an egg , does not admit of any change of this kind, it is included in the Id declension.

+ The pronoun వీఁడు , he, this man, does not admit of any such change,
 56, TELOOGOO GRAMMA R..

193 Most of the following nouns have the singular inflexion either the
same as the nominative singular, or form it by changing the last syllable
of the nominative singular into & , some however form the inflexion sin-
gular very irregularly. The nominative plural is formed either in the regu-
lar manner, by adding es to the nominative singular , or by changing the
last syllable of the nominative singular into ళ్లు or o డ్లు .

Nom : Sing : Inflex : Sing : Nom : Pl :

కదురు A spindle...... • కదురు or కదుటి - కదుగులు or కదుళ్లు

గోరు The nail or claw ...... గోరు orగోటి . గోరులు or గోళ్లు
నీరు Water. .... .నీరు or నీటి
నీళ్లు
నెత్తుగు Blood .. నెత్తురు or నెత్తుటి నెత్తురులు

పన్నీరు Rosc- water . షన్నీరు or పన్నీటి

(( ము F first and నీరు )
మున్నీరు <the
water ,the
sea.. first water, ) మున్నీరు or మున్నీటి - మున్నీరులు
.....
ఎదురు ( The front, that which
is opposite .……………….. } ఎదురు or ఎదుటి

కుం దేలు A hare....... కుందేలు or కుం దేటి కుందేలులు or కుం డళ్లు

మెసలులు or మె సళ్లు
మెసలు The forehead ..... మెసలు or మెసటి
మొదలు The beginning .... మొదలు or మొదటి మొదలులు or మొదళ్లు

తాబేలు A Tortoise........తాబేలు or తా బేటి - తాబేలులు or తా బేళ్లు

రోలు A mortar . ... రోలు or రోటి రోలులు or రో ళ్లు
ఆఁకలి Hunger , appetite ... ఆఁకలి o ఆఁకటి- ఆఁకళ్లు or ఆఁకండ్లు
ఎంగలి Spittle. ..... - ఎంగిలి or ఎంగిటి ఎంగిళ్లు or ఎం గిండ్లు

కొడవలి .A sickle..........కొడవలి or కొడవఁటి -కొడవళ్లు or కొడవండ్లు

పందిలి . A Pandal, or shed. పందిలి or పందిటి - పందిలులు or పందిళ్లు
Boiled rice mixed with
milk,andseasoned with
sugar , and other arti-
పొంగలి< cles , that give a high పొంగలిం[ పొంగటి- పొంగలులు or పొంగళ్లు .
relish : this word is de-
rived from the verb
Looks to effervesce..
 OF SUBSTANTIVES. 57

Nom: Pl:
Nom : Sing: Inflex : Sing:

* An instrument for dig- )

ging somewhat like u గుద్ద లిం గుద్దఁటి గుద్దలులు or గుద్దండ్లు
గుద్దలి లింrXు ద్దఁటి- Kు
short hoe..

An కొడ్డలి o గొడ్డఁటి-కార్డలులు or కార్డంగ్లు

గొడ్డలి Ān are.......

బాణలి ( An iron plate upon which బాణ లి or బాణంటి

ణలి బాణండ్లు
cakes are toasted ....
చోటు చోటు or చోటి చోటులు or చోట్లు
A place...
A piece of wood, placed
upon the shoulder for
కావడి < currying a burden , like కావడి or కావటి కావడులు .. కావళ్లు
that used by milk-maids
(in England ..
జోడు. Apair ,apair of shoes ..... జోడు or జోటి జోడులు or జోళ్లు
Bran, the substance on
on)
తవుడు Price below the husk , the తవుడు or తవుటి
( hush is called ఉమళ ....

పండు Fruit ....

పండు or పంటి పండులు or పంళ్లు or పండ్లు

పుండు A boil or sore . -పుండు or పుంటి పుండులు - పుండ్లుం పుండ్లు

ఒళ్లు The body .. -ఒళ్లు or ఒంటి ఒళ్లులు

ఊరు A village. .ఊగు or ఊరి ఊరులు or ఊర్లు

నూలు Thread .. .నూలు or నూలి

గూను Ahumped back గూను or గూని గూనులు

చేను . ు
A field producing grain . చేన or చేస
ి చేలు

మాను A tree, wood ... ..........మాను or మాని మాఁకులు

మేను The body... మేను or మేని మేనులు

పేరు A name , an appellation .. పేగు or పేరిఁటి పేరులు or పేర్లు

పాలు * A share ... .....-పాలి or పాలిఁటి పాలులు or పాళ్లు

కూఁతుగు Adaughter ....కూఁతు or కూఁతురి - కూఁతుగులు or కూఁతుండ్లు

The following nouns change the last syllable of the nominative singular 194
into o టి to form the indexrou singular, and into o డులు , o ళ్లు , orండ్లు to form

· పాలు Milk does not admit of any such change : it is a plural noun of the 3d declension.
 58 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR .

the nominative plural : some of them also form the nominative plural in the
regular manner, by adding ev to the nominative singular .

Nom : Sing: Inflex : Sing : Nom : Pl :

Ahouse .. .. ఇంటి ఇల్లులు or ఇండులు or ఇండ్లు or ఇండ్లు

పల్ల Atooth పంటి పల్లులు or పందులు or పండ్లు or పండ్లు

ముల్లు Athorn.. ముంటి - ముల్లులు or ముండులు or ముంళ్ల or ముండ్లు

విల్లు A bow............... వింటి విల్లులు or విండులు or వించు or విండ్లు

కన్ను The eye...... కంటి కన్నులు or కంళ్లు or కండ్లు

చన్ను A female's breast ... చంటి చన్నులు or చంళ్లు or చండ్లు

మన్ను Sand మంటి మన్నులు

మిన్ను The sky , the atmosphere మింటి మిన్నులు

195 The nouns noted below change the last syllable of the nominative sin-

gular into in the inflexion singular, and into e in the nominative

plural ; and those which end in S, with a short vowel preceding it,
lengthen that vowel both in the inflexion singular and nominative plural,

రాయి a stone makes in the nominative plural రాలు or రాళ్లు .

Nom : Sing: Inflex : Sing: Nom: Pl:

Any thing on which ar-

ఛాయి Rtificers place their work, చౌతి తుల
( an anvil, se .........
రాయి A stone రాతి రాలు or రాళ్లు
వాయి The mouth...... వాతులు
గోతులు
గొయ్యి A hole in the ground , a pit గోతి
చేతి చేతులు
చెయ్యి The hand ....
నూతి నూతులు..
నుయ్యి A small well...
.... నేతి నేతులు .
నెయ్యి Ghee ........
రొయ్యి The ashes of wood గ్రోతి

196 The following nouns in change that syllable into e to form the in-

flexion singular ; they form the nominative plural either in the regular
 . OF SUBSTANTIVES . 59

manner, by adding es to the nominative singular, or by changing the last

syllable of the nominative singular into e .
Nom : Sing : Inflex: Sing: Nom : Pl:

అఱ్ఱు Theneck . లు
etties orCety

The ploughshare....... కత్త కఱులు or కల్లు

An iron or wooden spike
కొఱు Son which criminals were కొత్త కొఱులు orకొట
కొ ్లు
(impaled...

గొట్టు A sowing machine ..... గొఱులు 01 గొల్లఱు

.....
మిట్టఱు Elevated ground .........

The nouns noted below form the inflexion singular in ore, and the 197
nominative plural either in eves or : some of them want the nominative .
Nom : Sing: Inflex : Sing: Nom : Pl:

The left side .... ..దాపలి or దాపటి

The insicle .... లో పలి or లో పటి
That side ........ ... ఆవలి
Thefurther side అవతలి
The right side ..... .. వలపలి or వలపటి
This side ........ ఈవలి.
The nearer side
.ఇవతలి
కాలు The leg.. కాలి కాలులు or కాళ్లు
కేలు The hand .. - కేలి

ప్రోలు A town ; ... ,

ప్రోలి
వ్రేలు The finger .............. ( వేలి ప్రేలులు or త్రేర్లు

The singular inflexions, and the nominatives plural , of the following 198
nouns , denoting time , are formed very irregularly .
Nom : Sing :
Inflex : Sing : Nom : Pl :
everyday ,ever .( ఎ which ?
ఎన్నదు న్నఁడు corrupted from ఎన్నటి
.... ( నాడు aa day ) ....
 60 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

Nom : Sing : Inflex : Sing : Nom : Pl :

ఏడు ఏటి
A year .......
నిగుడు Last year '............. నిగుటి
నేడు To day . నేటి

అప్పుడు That time, then ........... అప్పటి

ఇప్పుడు This time, now ...... ఇప్పటి

ఎప్పుడు Which time, when ....... ఎప్పటి

పొద్దు + Time ...... పొద్దుటి

Day -time, noon .పగటి పగళ్లు

నిన్న Yesterday నిన్నటి

మొన్న The day before yesterday మొన్నటి

మావు Night , evening .. .... మాపటి మాపులు

రేపు Tomorrow , early in the ) రేపటి రేవులు

morning ....
సేపు Time, in composition only ; as,జాము సేపటికి in 3 hours time.
....... తొంటి
Former-times............ తొల్లింటి
తొల్లి
199 se when it denotes the liquor extracted from the Cocoanut, Palmyra
or Date tree, is a regular noun of the 3d . declension ; but when it denotes

a stone, it becomes in the sing inflex : కంటి , and in the nom : pl : కండ్లు .
200 Ic measure is used only in composition with other nouns, and in the
inflexion becomes ce ; thus, ఎ c compounded with a fathom ,

makes the nominative singular the measure of a fathom, a

fathom's length, and the inflexion singular బా రెంటి .

201 Most of the irregular nouns ,which have the inflexion different
from the nominative singular , by changing the final vowel ofthat inflexion
into , form , in a manner peculiar to themselves, an inflected local or

instrumental ablative ; they have also the regular form by the addition of

the postpositions లో - చేత & c . thus , inflexion కంటి the eye , inflected abla-

tive కంట, regular ablative కంటి- లో-చేత & c . in or by , the eye ; and many
of these inflected ablatives are used as adverbs or postpositions ; thus from

+ when the noun పొద్దు affixes the postposition న , thusపొద్దున , it means in the morning .
 OF SUBSTANTIVES. 61

the inflexion టైటి comes బైట in a plain or outside ; from మొదటి , మొదట in
the beginning, or at first, from 0, in the inside, or inside.

the 197
The student will find it of great advantage to commit to memory
following list of nouns, denoting the several degrees of consanguinity and

affinity, peculiar to the people of Telingana.

a mother..... తల్లి
తండ్రి a father..... mother
{a step mother........ 229
a me 5.
సవతితల్లి
....
o a father's elder brother ....his wife.
also a mother's elder sister.

50 a father'syounger brother… his wife……………….. .పినతల్లి

also a mother's younger sister.
తాత a grand father ……………………………… a grand mother …………………. · అవ్వ
మాను a father in law ............. a mother in law అత్త
&

353 a mother's brother.... his wife....... ..మేనత్త

oneself
young
young
older

than.
also afather's sister .
oneself
than

than
if

er
er

Loca
if
if
Sthe son of a mother's brother, or of a father's
.
బావ

sister, a man's brother in law…………….

husbathe
husband
older
than

nd.
.the
if

also a woman's brother in law .

మఱుఁదలు
younger
ones
if er
. elf

than
tha
old n

elf
ones

If
వది
సే

the daughter of a mother's brother, or ofafather's sister.

also denotes the elder sister of a wife or husband, oran

elder brother's wife.

eces also denotes the younger sister ofa wife or husband,

or a younger brother's wife.

అన్న an elder brother …....... • an elder sister

..అక్క
 62 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

53 , cɔ a younger brother …………… a younger sister .చెల్లెలు .

L: XCE- WDD a husbanda wife
పెండ్లాము
a child
w
కొడుకు a son. ...... 50°C8050
...a daughter ...........
35Loca grand son... a grand daughter .... JU
Cesc as a son in law . ..a daughter in law .....§ Les
……
అల్లుఁడు
S
he son of a man's Σ the daughter ofa man's
Sthe
మేనల్లుఁడు Ksister or of a wo } sister or of aromani's మేనకోడలు
man's brother..... brother.......

the wives of the same husband to each other.

&&& the wives of two brothers to each other, joint daughter's in
the husbands of two sisters to each other. [law.
DaSores mothers in law to each other.
DSc∞fathers in law to each other.

198 All the words in the above list preceding a grandfather, and

a grandmother, and following a younger brother, and es

ayounger sister , together with the words మఱఁది మఱుఁదలు - మేనత్త and
, though expressing degrees of relationship , are never used in

addressing the person to whom they refer ; in speaking to such relations,

the males are called నాయన - అన్నయ్య - ళక్క - బాబు, and the females
అమ్మ- పెద్దమ్మ or పిన్నమ్మ & c .

199 A native never addresses his wife by name, nor by the term denoting
the degree of her affinity to him ; but, in speaking to her, makes used of 2
and other words , equivalent to our phrases " " I
I say, Hear you ." &c . It is

considered a great indelicacy, approaching almost to indecency, even to

mention the name of one's wife or husband to any person.

200 Such nouns in the foregoing list, denoting females, as have the nomi-
native singular in ev, form the singular inflexion by changing that ter-
mination to , and the nom : pl : by changing it to o oro ).
 OF SUBSTANTIVES. 63

OF NOUNS TERMED OR SANSCRIT DERIVATIVES,

**
All Sanscrit nouns may be adopted into this language ; but they appear in 201
it under a new form, by assuming terminations and cases peculiar to the
Teloogoo.

In explainingthe derivation of Teloogoo nouns from the Sanscrit, Native 202

Grammarians divide all the nouns in the Sanscrit language ino two classes ,

మహత్తులు , the superior , and ప్రేమ హత్తులు the inferior . The మ హత్తులు
or superior class includes nouns of the masculine gender, and the
es or inferior class comprises those of the feminine, and neuter gen-
der, as defined in rule 141 .

The Sanscrit derivative is formed from the crude Sanscrit noun , and crude 203

nouns, in the Sanscrit language, generally terminate in the vowels

v , or in the consonants 555555555255 .

If the crude Sanscrit noun becomes a nominative singular in Teloogoo 201

by affixing the termination c , it is declined like the nouns of the first re-
gular declension . If, in order to form the nominative singular,

it assumes the Teloogoo affix o , it follows the rules for the second regu
lar declension ; and if it is modified in any other manner, or is

not changed at all, it is declined like the nouns of the third regular S
declension . It will suffice , therefore, to shew how the nominative singu

lar in Teloogoo is formed from the crude Sanscrit noun ; for, when that is
known, this general rule will guide the student in declining it.

OF CRUDE SANSCRIT NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS .

1st OF THOSE IN ~

Crude Sanscrit nouns ending in short L form the nominative singular, 205

in Teloogoo, by changing that termination into vc , if they be of the

మహత్తులు superior class, and by merely affixing

wwe if they be of the
eze inferior class ; thus, in the ages or superior class,
రామ The God Rama makes the nom : sing : in Teloogooc

* The rules respecting sanscrit derivatives and corruptions apply to adjectives, as well
as to substantives, borrowed from that language.
 64 TELOOGOO RAM AR.
GRAMM

the sun literally light-maker ..

+ .....భాస్కరుఁడు

5388 the moon literally snow -rayed ……………… do …………… ..2205 Oc

రాముఁడు & c . are declined precisely in the same nanneras త మ్ముండు & c .
see rule 165 ; and, as all Sanscrit derivatives ending in C have the vowel

v preceding cs of the nominative singular, every noun of this descrip-

tion takes the two forms explained in rule 166.
thus, also inthe inferior class,
వన
a garden, a forest makes the nom : sing : in Teloogoo 35
త .... do
··
పర్వSa mountain …………………………………… do …..
పర్వతము
X a dwelling. ..do .............. .. do ..
a duclling … హమ
గృăn cు
X 23 an elephant .... ………………………….. do …………………………………….. do గజము
సాప sin ... ...... do do ...........పాపము
8300 a lotus…... ....... -do . కమలము
3 ...
&c. are declined exactly in the same manner as …………………… …
... గుట్టుము
see rule 172.
EXCEPTIONS.

206 The noun a friend, together with words used in composition to

imply eminence, such as a Lion a Tiger &c . are consi-
dered included both in the superior and the inferior classes . Thus, we

may say either మిత్రుఁడు or మిత్ర ము a friend , పురుష సింహము or పురు

షసింహుఁడు a man -lion , a noble person , పురుష వ్యాఘ్ర ము or పురుష
DS ) & a man-tiger, a fierce person.

207 The noun అపత్య offspring makes అపత్యము , never అ పత్యుఁడు , and
the word denoting, either a house, or a protector, refuge & c . when it
has the latter meaning, takes in Teloogoo three forms , Jed I or JEW
or ; but, when it means a house, it has the first form only.

208 The nouns an experienced person , and a messenger, a

spy, included in these or superior class , together with all nouns

of the female gender and the words akind of holy grass, usually

+ The sun and moon are included in thee or superior class, because they
are considered, or at least personified, by the Hindoos, as male divinities.
 65
OF SUBSTANTIVES .

the Indian
named durbha, & a woman's garment , a swan,

nightingale, 8 or 8 a history, delirium , confusion,

exaggeration , or enlargement , o an earthen

desire, Do o
pot, with some other nouns of the ee or inferior class, do not
affix the terminations mentioned in the above rules , but, remaining un-

changed, are declined according to the rules for the third regular w

declension .
svileninou od) un 2d OF THOSE IN 9 bubonnen tiene

Crude Sanscrit nouns ofall genders endingin short , when brought into 209
Teloogoo, do not undergo any change ; and , therefore are all declined like

nouns in , of the 3d. declension.

హరి The God Vishtnoo makes the nom : sing : in Teloogoo.... 58

do... ....39
మతి Mind.... · do

do .... .....మణి )
Aprecious stone do

043d OF THOSE IN YOG

Crude Sanscrit nouns in short v , when adopted into Teloogoo, either 210
undergo no change, or they form the nominative singular by affixing either
or co if they be included in thee or superior class, but S
only if they be of thee or inferior class; thus, inthe a

es or superior class.

* Aspiritual guide in Telo

make s the
ogoo : sing :} గురు ar గురవు or గురుఁడు
......
nom

The God Vishtnoe.... do ...

విష్ణు . విష్ణు or విష్ణువు or విష్ణుఁడు

భాను The sun.......

sun . ....... భాను or భానువు or ఛానుఁడు-
విధు Themoon................ ....do ..... విధు or విధువు or విధుఁడు
...
* ) An enemy... . . . . . . . . do
. శత్రు or శత్రువు or శత్రు ఁడు

* & c. follow the rules for the 1st. declension.

K & c. and x &c. are declined like nouns ofthe 3d. declension.

Thus, also , in the evor inferior class ,

 66 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

తను తను or తనువు

the body makes the nom : sing : in Teloogoo 5
wine, honey... do ........ ....మధు or మధువు
eo a ray.• •• •••• .............
...... do ......... c * or Dow
అంశువు
Sow water………….. ow or How
..... do ........ ........... అంబు అంబువు

a cow........ ...... do ........ ధేను or ధేనువు

ధేను
&c. and 5 &c. follow the rules for the 3d declension.
4th OF THOSE IN
211 Crude Sanscrit nouns , ending in short , form the nominative singular
in Teloogoo by changing that termination into ; thus , abrother
మాతృ a mother &c make and respectively, which are, of
course, declined like nouns of the 3d declension .

EXCEPTIONS,

212 The nouns the Creator, 55 the sun, a giver, and

నేతృ a leader, with a few others, admit of another form , by affixing c ;
thus, we may say either or the Creator &c.

5th OF THOSE IN ~S AND TO .

The crude Sanscrit noun money ending in makes the'nom : sing: in Teloogoo
,ба сого ....... గోవ
ు
do ° a ship… …… …… ……….
3 do ........ నావ or నావి
·· do · ....
the moon has no change,the Teloogoo nom: sing: being also

No other crude Sanscrit nouns ending in or are ever found

in Teloogoo works. It is, therefore, unnecessary to lay down any rules res-
pecting them .
6th OF THOSE ENDING in Long Vowels.
213
Except monosyllables, all crude Sanscrit nouns ending in the long
Vowels or5 , when adopted into Teloogoo , change these longtermi-
nations into the corresponding short vowels, ✓ and v.

All nouns ending in long vowels, thus converted to short vowels, are
considered as originally terminating in these short vowels , and, according.
ly, form the nominative singular in Teloogoo, agreeably to the rules al-
ready given for crude Sanscrit nouns ending in short ~ 9 or respectively.
 OF SUBSTANTIVES. 67

EXAMPLES.

DS The protector of the world, being changed into L, makes

[the nom : sing in Teloogoo Jc see 2015.

స్వయంభూ {sclf existent , being changed , స్వయంచు orస్వయంభువు

Pinto స్వయంభు do do for savoucão see 210.

82 ( the wife of Vishnoo, being feminine , see 208.

వాణీ Suruswutte .... …… ……………… .. do…...do

do .... do... ♫
……..se e 209.
see
the goddess of learning ›
a woman , makes the nom :
వధూ or see 210.
{ sing : in Teloogoo either ;

the earth , an eye brow, a woman &c. being monosyllables, 214

never shorten the last vowel ; when adopted into Teloogoo, they remain
the same as in Sanscrit, and are declined like the nouns of the 3d. regular

దేశ్యము declension .
OF CRUDE SANSCRIT NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.

Crude Sanscrit nouns ending in the consonants 555555and 215

formthe nominative singular, in Teloogoo, either by changing and

జ్ to క్కు -ద్ and థ్ to త్తు . భ్ to ప్పు - ణ్ and హ్ to ట్టు or క్కు -

and to for all genders - or, if masculine, by affixing voo, and if

neuter, by adding ~3 .
EXAMPLES.
Masculine or feminine Masculine

పుష్పము బ్ makes పుష్ప ముక్కు or పుష్ప ముచుఁడు one who strews

[flowers
వేదవిద్.......
£85 . do వేదవిత్తు
8. ....... or వేదవిదుఁడ
£8 .... one
ు .... one skilled in the
[vcdas.
పాలితకకుభ్ --do . ..పాలితకకుప్పు ...or పాలిత కకుభుఁడు one wlio protects
[ the corners of the world.
or
ఘృత స్పృర్
do... మృత స్పృక్కు మృత స్పృశుఁడు one who touches
[ghee.
25. ..do .... విట్టు ...... or Dc a person of the 3d Hin-
[doo class,
 68 TELOOGOO GRAM MAR .

Masculine or feminine Masculine

సురద్విష్ ... do .... సురద్విట్టు or సురద్విషుఁడు an enemy of the Soo-

[ras, or angels ; a giant .

అమృతలిహ్ ·do .అమృతలిట్టు or అమృతలి హుఁడు one whofeeds on nec-

(tar or ambrosia , an immortal person ,
Neuter.

త్వచ్ ........do త్వక్కు....... or త్వచము skin , leather , bark..

do... ( ప్రక్కు ........ or స్ర జము a wreath.

ప్రజ్
పరిషద్ ..... do ... పరిషత్తు ...... or పరిషదము a society , an assembly .

కకుభ్ ........ do ... శకుప్పు or కకుభము a corner of the rworld .

స్రావృష్do ప్రావృట్టు ....or ప్రా ) వృష ము the rainy season .

మధులిహ్ .... do ... మధులిట్టు.....or మధులిహము a large bee.

పుష్పముచుఁడు & c . follow the rules for the lst . declension .

పుష్ప ముక్కు & c . are declined like the nouns of the 3d . declension .

EXCEPTIONS .

216 వాచ్ speech, a word , makes వాక్కు , but not వాదము .

ద్
సంపత్ good fortune ,and ఆపద్ adversity ,make సంపత్తు and ఆ పత్తు or

సం పద and ఆపద .

విపద్ calamity makes only విపత్తు .

ముద్ joy.do ముదము ,

The nouns appetite , & a sacrificial stick, make either v

త్తుand సమిత్తు , or ఝుధ and సమిధ -క్రథ్ rage makes . క్రుధ ..

దృā an ye, & దిశ్ a side, or quurter, make దృక్కు and దృశ , or దిక్కు
and దిశ .

రుష్ anger , & త్విష్ splendour , make రుట్టుand రుష , or త్విట్టు and త్విష .
 OF SUBSTANTIVES. 69

Crude Sanscrit nouns ending in change it to , to form the nomina- 217

tive singular in Teloogoo ; thus , the sky, lightning,LXF
wind, a feather, &c. make - Das -adiñ- xxx
which are, of course, declined according to the rules for the 3d . declension .
EXCEPTIONS .

The nouns the Deity, and Hunooman, have res- 218

pectively the following irregular forms . భగవంతుఁడు - భగవానుఁడు -

హనుమంతుఁడు - హనుమానుఁడు - హనుమ .

Xe the universe makes X or X Lw.

సేవృత్ a village or country makes నివృత్తు or నీవృతము ,

Crude Sanscrit nouns in drop the final consonant, and then form the 219

nominative singular in Teloogoo according to the rules for crude Sans-

crit nouns ending in the particular vowel with which they terminate.
EXAMPLE .

the sun by dropping is changed to and then becomes in Teloogoo

అగ్యముఁడు see 205 .

2 gold dodo 5 dodo v
see 205.
805 an elephant ... do ...... ... dodo š8 see 209.

..dododo
.....do......
A &F {thetridentbearer ,} do K¬O see 209 .
God Shiva
EXCEPTIONS .

the soul, the supreme being, becomes in Teloogoo cor

ఆత్మము or ఆత్మ
Fa king.... .do... రాజు
when denoting Brumha, one of the three)
Fattributes of the divinity, personified in do .... W) 7
(the Indian Trinity, becomes ........
when denoting the supreme being himself, becomes either

బ్రహ్మము or బ్రహ్మ .
Nouns ending in have also an irregular form .
EXAMPLE.
లఘిమన్ lightness, smallness , makes లఘుమ or లఘుమము :
 70 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR .

220 Crude sanscrit nouns ending in 555are

ర్ rarely adopted into the

Teloogoo .
221 Crude Sanscrit nouns terminating with form the nominative singu

lar in Teloogoo, either by affixing or v ; or, after dropping the final

consonant, by following the rules for crude Sanscrit nouns ending in the
particular vowel with which they terminate. Masculine nouns in J ad-
mit of a fourth form, by assuming ve without dropping the final .

Masculine EXAMPLES .

నా తేజను or
S కా- తేజస్సు or ఉధ్వ -
ఊధ్వనా తేజస్ makes in Teloogoo ఊధ్య =
Feminine
ఊధ్య గా తేజుఁడు or ఊధ్వ నా తేజసుఁడు an anchorite.
హెమ తేజస్ ..do..... do హెమ తేజస్సు or హెమ తేజసు or హెమ

Neuter తేజ a female resplendant as gold

మనస్ .... మనస్సు or మనసు or మన ము the mind .

dodo

శీరస్ ..... dodo శిరస్సు or శిరసు or శిరము the head .

ఉరస్ do.. do .. ఉరస్సు or ఉరసు or ఉరము the breast,

doo వయ స్సు or వరుసు or వత్తుము the breast ;

యకస్.................. o.... యశస్సు or యశసు or యశము fame .

తపస్ ............ dodo
do ...... do ... తపస్సు
... తపస్సు or తపసు or తపము penance ...

తమస్ dodo ....తమస్సు or తమసు or తమము darkness ,

తేజస్ ............do..... do .... తేజస్సు or తేజసు or తేజము lustre .

ఆయుస్ ........do . do ఆయుస్సుం . ఆయుసు or ఆయు or ఆయువు

the total period of life.
EXCEPTIONS .

999 పయస్ water or milk, అయస్ iron, హవిస్ , sacrificial fore-offering,

రుస్ a giant, చేతన్ the mind , మహస్ lustre , సరస్ alake, అంహస్

sin , పాథ ఏ water , అంభస్ transgression, and a few others ,

water, ఆగస్
afix only the syllable సు as వయస్సు - అయస్సు & c .
 OF SUBSTANTIVES. 71

When the noun signifies a bird it makes y , but when it

signifies the total period of life, or youth, or age, &c . it makes either,

వయసు or వయస్సు. అప్సరస్ anymph, makes అప్సరస, or అప్సరస్సు ;

35, the Creator, Brumha, makes ☎4 .

OF NOUNS TERMED OR CORRUPTIONS OF THE SANSCRIT .

Besides the regular Sanscrit derivatives, there is in Teloogoo a class of 223

words namede , or corruptions of the Sanscrit. These are
formed from the crude Sanscrit noun by the substitution of one letter for
another ; bythe elision , the insertion , or addition of letters; by subverting
the order ofthe letters, or by doubling some of them . After these chan-
ges in the original letters of the crude Sanscrit noun , some of the Sanscrit
corruptions affix Teloogoo terminations, in the same manner as the
Sanscrit derivatives, and others take no affixes . In either case, the rules

already given for the declension of the nouns apply equally to the
2. It will, therefore , be sufficient to submit a few explanations

respectingthe manner in which the nominative singular is formed from the

crude Sanscrit noun ; at the same time, these, from the nature of the sub-

ject, must be necessarily very undeterminate .

OF THE CORRUPTION OF THE VOWELS IN CRUDE SANSCRIT NOUNS.

If the first syHable in the original crude noun terminate in the vowels 224
orv, these vowels are often, in Teloogoo, changed to or , thus;
- a pungent taste , makes
& a quarter of the world, makes
వెగటు - తువర an astringent taste, makes తొవర .

Ifthe first syllable in the original crude noun end with -SorS, these 225
letters are respectively changed to → and S.
EXAMPLES,
...makes వెసనము
··sorrow ·
వ్యసన .
...... ...
... do ………………. • వెత
వ్యథ ... •pain …………..
·do..... ... వెయము
Sexpenditure …… ..
·· do ........ 3x200
SX. •••••·liberality ..
నేయము
S justice , propriety ········ do …………
.......
. కేతి
fame•
DSO.......
 72 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

226
The same rule applies to Sor terminating a syllable in the mid-
dle or end of the original crude noun, provided the preceding syllable be
short; in this case, however, the consonant preceding or is dou-
bled ; thus .

DS........learning, art · .....makes......D

విద్దె
... do ........ ğ
§ S........ a young girl………..

SSL..difference …. ..do....... వెళ్తే సము

227
SS terminating the first syllable in the original crude noun, are
3 or ; thus,
changed to
........ makes 258 500
ass... .....fever
.......
as ........ the sound of the voice, a note …………………………… do ………… .. yoŏzw
ధ్వని ... .... a sound..
..... ..... ... do 5.2

S8 the 12th day ofthe increase or decrease ofthe moon do . ׳

228 The vowel in the original crude noun is sometimes changed to 9,,
S. or 8 ; thus,
........ beauty makes 20TOOLW
శృంగార
.......a beast.. do ... మెకము
మృగ ............
బృహస్పతివార Thursday .. ................. బేస్తవారము
www a star ........
052-
THE CORRUPTION OF CONSONANTS IN CRUDE SANSCRIT NOUNS.

229 The consonants ,, are often changed to ; thus,

శుక్ర ........ The planet Venus ... makes ...... చ
ుక్క
... Sugar.... ·do W38
882-8
802 a plate made of bell metal ………………………… do 80WL

230 The consonants ,, and , in the original Sanscrit, are frequently

changed in Teloogoo to ; as,
32 ...... a cash (the coin so named) ...... makes ..... JK
Ecra......n • do escŇ www
··an elephant hook …….
...... dan do మోసము
ger, deceit
భాష ........ language
 OF SUBSTANTIVES . 73

231
is sometimes changed to 5 ; as,
•8..the day on which the moon is full makes... ·పున్నమ
పూర్ణిమా .
អក · do ... గొన ము
disposition, quality
ncement of nouns , is frequently changed , in Teloogoo , 232
ယ် , at the comme
to ; as,
.... ... makes ...... జముఁడు
యమ ........Yama,
... the God of death ...
యామ .... three English hours · ..... do ........25 500

, preceded by another syllable, is changed in Teloogoo to or 233

; thus.
For ....... a side...... ...makes .... ....... పక్క

లాడా ...... lac ......... ·do....

. లక్క
అక్షర .....a letter or character... ....... do .అక్కరము

alms · ...do ....... •2025J20

do .........
...... rule, definition . లచ్చనము

preceded by the vowel , is

is generally to 5 ; and preceded 234
changed to
generally changed

by , to 5 ; thus,

... a sacrifice makes . ...... 2

యజ్ఞ
.... ....... ~ DJ X Xv
యజ్ఞోపవీత the saucerdotal thread .. -జన్నిదము
C& .........05
....a command, order, or adjuration ……… do ……………. ఆన
24
............ ఆనతీ
..do ......
..... ...command, permission …………..do
ez 2

but it is sometimes changed to ; thus, a Queen , makes Te³

W 235
is changed in X
20 ... a lion, ... ....... makes .. •20X300

........do . SOX
50 a crane..

The consonants of each vurga are interchangeable. 236

EXAMPLES.
. ..a face ...... ......... makes... ... మొగము
... ...
ముఖ ...
° ........colour ............. ... do . ............చామ
 74 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR .

పీఠ ... a seat ………… makes …………………....... åvés

ఘటికా ...... a Hindoo hour.....

అటవీ ........ a forest ......do ..... అడవి

a history, a story ………. ..do .................• §

కత
కథా ..
మతి .. the mind...... do ...L.
మది
....... a line ....
... do.................. 20

తాంబూల .... beetle nut ..do ..... .తమలము

237 The consonants 5 or5, when connected with other conso.

nants without the intervention of a vowel , are generally dropped , and the

consonant with which they may be connected is sometimes doubled ; thus,

.... ajourney.......………………………………………..makes ..... av Lv

ము
ప్రయాణ
∙a murk. ქე ...
20 áraj చిన్నె

... a cow-house.. do ........

గోష్ఠ ..... • కొట్టము
........fire........ do …....
0992 ...ex
apeice ofmoney .... ....... do ... .రూక
రుక్మ .......

238 Some of the changes among the nouns are so little obvious,

that the reader may occasionally be iuclined to doubt the existence of any
connexion between the adulterated word and that stated tobe it's original.
Great deference, however , is due by a foreigner to the concurrent testimo-
ny of native authors on this head; and when it is considered that most of

the త words have, in all probability, passed intoTeloogoo, through

the medium of the Pracrit, or other corrupt dialects of the Sanscrit, and
have been naturalized in it for ages, the little resemblance now to be found

between some ofthe original words, and their corruptions, ought not, alone,
to invalidate the established etymologies of successive Grammarians.

OF NOUNS TERMED OR FOREIGN.

అన్య దేశ్యము

239 In treating of the declension of the అచ్చ దేశ్యము- తత్సమము and

nouns, the peculiarities of the or common dialect,
 OF SUBSTANTIVES. 75

have been duly pointed out. It remains, therefore, only to offer a few ob-
servations respecting foreign nouns.

The great facility with which the Teloogoo adopts and naturalizes fo
reign terms, must already have attracted the notice of the Student. The
intercourse of the people of Telingana with the neighbouring provinces,
has led to the introduction of a few terms from the Orissa, the Mahratta,

the Guzerat, the Canarese or Carnataca , and the Dravida or Tamil : but,
except from theTamil and Canarese, with which theTeloogoo is radically
connected, it has not borrowed extensively from any of these languages .
Since the Mahommedan conquest of the Deccan, numerous technical
revenue terms, and words connected with official business, derived from the

Arabic, Persian, or Hindee, have been introduced into Teloogoo , through

the medium of the Hindoostanee ; but the use of many such words begins
now to be superseded by that ofcorresponding English terms.

Nouns of foreign derivation are subject to the same rules as the 240
nouns ofthe third declension ; thus, the Hindoostanee words

కబురు ...... news. సవాలు.....

ŵJW .. .. a question .
2. a treasury . జవాబు .... ······· an answer.
అజీనా .. .... apetition &c.
Lev ... a country, a district.
e ....arrangement , settlement · and the English words.

మిలాఖతు .au visit. నెంబరు ... ***** a number .

wéð …a disturbance, an intrigue.203 ...... ink..

............trouble , annoyance. వేనా ...... a pen.

.the chieftown in a district ....... ……………………. a pencil .

a decree.
సవారీ ..Sa
-- carriage of any kind, ....
apalankeen &c . &c. .... a summons &c.
సమ్మను ......
are declined like a child.

4th . OF THE DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS .

The rules of politeness among the Hindoos, although very different 241
from those in use among European nations, are so firmly established, and
 76 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

so scrupulously observed by the people, that the least deviation from the
proper mode of address should be studiously avoided . Particular atten-
tion is therefore necessary to the correct use of the Teloogoo pronouns .

212 All the pronouns belong to that division of the Teloogoo termed
or language of the land.

243 There are no relative pronouns in Teloogoo : the idiom ofthe language

renders the use of them superfluous ; as will be fully explained hereafter.

244 The substantive pronouns have two numbers ; the singular, and the
plural . The speaker, and the person addressed , being present, their sex is
supposed to be obvious : the distinction of gender is therefore confined to
the pronouns of the third person , in treating of which, we shall explain
the peculiar manner in which it is marked.

245 The substantive pronouns , like the substantive nouns, may be said to
have properly only three cases ; viz. the nominative, the inflexion , and the
accusative ; but they are here declined according to the arrangement
adopted in the declension of the nouns. The vocative case is wanting in all
the Teloogoo pronouns .

246 The genitive or possessive case, without , is likewise the in-

flexion , which, with the addition of the postpositions, forms the different
compound cases. The inflexions of the pronouns are of course included
in the class termed kululoo , while the accusative cases belong to the
(5jev drotuprukrotolo ; but, in addition to this general dis-
tinction , it will be observed , that the pronouns ofthe two first persons have
the inflexion entirely different from the accusative.

247 THE PRONOUN OF THE FIRST PERSON.

Plural.
Singular.
.. .. . .I మేము ..... • We
N :....
.... · 20.
G: నా నాయొక్క .. of me మా - మా యొక్క of us
D :......... ..to me మాకు....... ...... to us
....
....... me మము or మమ్ము ..... 7.Տ
Acc : - . నను or నన్ను
Ab : .. నా ... లో తో n & c . mc|
- am
- చేత -తో mc |మా ...
మా ...లో •in &c. us.
లో - - చేతతో
 OF SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 77

Men of rank, speaking of themselves, generally usethe plural 248

We,for the singular 3 I: indeed, arrogance often induces inferior na-
tives to apply the plural to themselves ; but this is understood to be very
improper when they address a superior. The Ratsawars and Velmawars in
the Northern Circars, a bold warlike race of men, scarcely ever deign to
speak of themselves in the singular number ; even to a Bramin , their ac-

knowledged superior in cast.

In the superior dialect, and are sometimes used for 249
and మేము .
THE PRONOUN OF THE SECOND PERSON.
Singular. Plural.
thou ) 1 విూరు ....... ...you 250
N : ... నీవు ..
నినా - వి యొక్క ..... ofyou
G :.... నీ -నీయొక్క ......of thee
...to thee 25.05 ... .... to you
D:........
మిము or మిమ్ము...... .... you
Acc : నిను or నిన్ను ......thee
Ab :...నీ..లో- చేత తో in & c. theeవి .- -చేత
లో - తో .... in &c. you
Although both the singular and plural inflexions of this pronoun end 251

in , they take, in the dative cases, instead of 3 , in opposition to the gene-

ral rules 132-146 & 153.
Addressing inferiors, or conversing familiarly with equals, thou, 252
the nominative singular of this pronoun, may be used ; but , when we
speak to superiors, or even to equals or inferiors, with any degree of
kindness or respect, the plural you, is the only proper term of
address. To be called thou, by a person decidedly his inferior , is
an insult not be borne by the most meek Hindoo, he will resent it as stu-
died disrespect, couched in the most bitter terms of reproach.

When much deference is paid to men of superior age, rank, or learning, 253
the speaker uses the words తాము or తమరు they , దేవర వారు or స్వామి

Lord,which correspond with the English phrases, Sir, My Lord & c. &c .

In the superior dialect and are sometimes used for 254

and మీరు .
The pronouns of the first and second persons have their respective plu- 255
ral numbers, and , as given above, corresponding precisely
 78 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

with our words we and you . But the first of these two pronouns in Teloo-

goo has likewise another plural , applying to both persons jointly, which ,
from the want of a corresponding term in English , we are obliged also to

translate we. This plural is declined as follows .

.we
N : ..... ...మనము ......
of us
G : ... ..మన మన యొక్క
..to us
D :..... .మనకు .......
Acc : ..............L IC
.మన మనముల ...... .......... us
ల or LJZO
.. లో .... In &c. us
Ab మనd
Li .. . 35 - తో6.........
చేత.5
There is a very material difference between we, and LIL
we: is the plural of the first person only ,it refers exclusively to those
who speak ; but is a plural , used by the first person, but applica-
ble to the first and second persons conjointly , it refers exclusively to nei-
ther, but includes both those who speak and those who are addressed , each

of whom may be either one , or more persous ; for example, iftwo gentlemen ,
meeting several Bramins , were to enquire who they were, they would not
use the joint plural of the first and second persons and answer : JL
• we (who speak and are addressed ) are Bramins ; for, in
that case, they would be understood to affirm that the gentlemen also were

Bramins . Using the plural of the first person , they would say
we (who speak ) are Bramins .
THE PRONOUNS OF THE THIRD PERSON,
256 The Teloogoo pronouns ofthe third person may be divided into two classes ;
the definite , and the indefinite ; the first referring to one or more particular
defined objects , and the second referring to a number or collection ofobjects
less defined . The first class consists of the demonstratives , and ofthe inter-

rogative pronoun derived from them . The second class comprizes the col-

lectives , and their interrogative ,

The distinction ofgender is confined to the pronouns of this person , and
257
the mode in which it is defined in the singular number, is different from the
mode in which it is marked in the plural. In the singular, the masculine
gender is distinct from the feminine and neuter, which are both represent-
ed bythe same word. In the plural , the masculine and the feminine are the
 OF SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 79

same, and the neuter is distinct from both . It is of importance that this
peculiarity should be strongly impressed on the memory of the Student,
for it will be found to pervade the verbs and adjectives, and materially to
affect the construction ofthe language.
DEFINITE PRONOUNS. 258
DEMONSTRATIVE PROXIMATE,
Singular.
M. F & N.
N: &
వీఁడు .......... .ZD........ he , she and it, this.
52
G: వీ ని or వీ ని యొక్క .దీని or దీని యొక of him , her and it, this .
D: Das ........ .దీనికి .... ... to him , her and it, this.
Acc : వీని ....... .దీని ....... ............. him, her and it, this.
Ab : వీని... లో - చేత -తో..దీని..లో- చేత -తో in Sgc. him , her and it, this .
Plural.
M. & F. N.
N: వీరు .22.....
・ ..they, these.
G:
వీరి or వీరి యొక్క ... వీటి or వీటియొక్క of them , these.
D: వీరికి ....... వీటికి ....... to them , these.
Acc : వీరిని .. Dt
....వీటిని ... hem, these.
Ab: 18... F..DE... 35-5° ..in &c. them , these.

and are vulgarly written av and avD.

DEMONSTRATIVE REMOTE.
259
Singular.
M. F & N.
N: వాఁడు ......... అది ..... ....he, she and it, that.
G: ·
వాని- వానియొక్క-దాని దానియొక్క of him , her andit, that .
D: వానికి ....... .దానికి ......... .......... to him, her and it, that.
Acc. ........ .... దాని ... …..him, her and it, that.
Ab . వాని .. లో - చేత -తో .. దాని .. లో చేత తో in &c, him ,her & it, that .
Plural
M.&F. N.
N: వారు....... అవి .......... they, those.
G:
వారి వారియొక్క .. వాటి - వాటియొక్క of them , those
D: వారికి ........... . వాటికి ....... ... to them, those.
Acc: వారిని ..... వాటిని ...... them, those.
Ab: వారిలో - చేతతో ..వాటిలో · చేతతో in & c . them , those .
 80 TELOOGOO GRAM MAR.

260 It will be observed that the change of ee toa and of i to u, in

the first syllable of these pronouns, is the only difference between them.

261 Besides the plurals and , these two pronouns , like some ofthe

regular nouns, occasionally take irregular plurals ; thus , often

becomes వీఁడ్లు or వీఁడ్రు and వారు is changed into వాండ్లు or వాఁడ్రు . In this

case, they make the inflexion plural c డ్ల or వీంద్ర ,and వాండ్ల or వాఁడ్ర ;

and the accusative plural వీండ్లను or వీంద్ర ను , and వాఁర్లను or వాఁడ్రను

262 In the common dialect, the accusatives and are respectively.

written వీణ్ని and వాణ్ని .

263 The singular numbers of the foregoing demonstrative pronouns , and

their irregular plurals , are never used , except when inferiors or equals are
spoken of: when persons of very high rank are the subject of conversation,
the plurals and D , are used to express the English words he or she.
But ifthe speaker alludes to a person only in a trifling degree respected by
him , instead of the pronoun c , he uses co to denote a male, and
ఈ బిడ or ఈ పె to denote a female ; and instead of the pronoun వాఁడు -
c forthe masculine, and or for the feminine gender ;

or if he alludes to a person considerably superior to him, yet not of very

high rank, instead of che uses to denote a male, and s☎
°C
to denote a female, and instead of J , SJ for the masculine, and

e3 for the feminine gender. These pronouns have no plural number ,

cand care declined like nouns of the first declension ; thus,

N:................. ....he.

...... ..... ofhim .

G: . అతని - అతని యొక్క .
D : ........ DE…………….. .......to him.

Acc: ..... JD...... ...him.

Ab : ........ అతని .. లో - చేత -తో .... ... in &c. him.

ఈయన ఈ బిడ - ఈ పె and ఈ మె and ఆయన - ఆబిడ ఆపె

and are declined like nouns ofthe third declension ; thus,
 OF SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUN S. 81

NJ.... ....he.
..... ofhim.
G : ....... ఆయన . ఆయన యొక్క
DJ ........ ......to him .

Acc: DID.... ..him .

Ab :....... ఆయన..లో - చేత . తో ........in &gc. him .

Instead of and , in the neuter plural of the demonstrative 264

prono uns, we somet imes find and used in books.
INTERROGATIVE
Singular.
M.. F. & N.
.Sw....... who? wbich?.
N: ఎవ్వఁడు .

G: ఎవ్వని-ఎవ్వనియొక్క డేని డేనియొక్క ... f whom ? which ?.

... € 2.3.... to whom? which?.
D: ఎవ్వనికి ...
.దేని ....... whom? which?
Acc : ఎవ్వని.....

Ab ఎవ్వని..లో- చేత -తో .. దేని.. లో చేత -తో--m & c. whom ? which?

Plural.
M N.

N: ఎవ్వర
ఎవ్వర ు
ు........ -ఏవి ...... ....who? which?.

G: ఎవ్వరి . ఎవ్వరి యొక్క వేటి .. వేటియొక్క .of whom ? which ?.

వేటికి .. .......to whom ? which?.
D: ఎవ్వరికి.......
వేటిని .... .......whom ? which?.
Acc : ఎవ్వరిని .....
·
Ab : ఎవ్వరి..లో- చేత - తో ....గేటి లో- చేత తో in8c, whom ? which ?,
Instead of , the word J , which follows the rules for the first 265
declension, is often used, in the singular, to denote a female.

The initial & ofthe interrogative pronoun is constantly converted, 266

in the common dialect, into &Z...

In the common dialect, - and are used, in the singu- 267

lar number of the definite pronouns, instead of వీని - వాని and ఎవ్వని .
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.

As the pronouns of this class refer to a number of objects, they have no 268
singular, but are all of the plural number.
 82 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

COLLECTIVES..
M S; F. N.
N: ఇందు . ..so many .
...222

G: ఇందఱి- ఇందఱి యొక్క ఇన్నింటి- ఇన్నిఁటి యొక్క of so many .

D: ఇందఱిక ... ……… ………it o so many .
... ఇన్నిఁటికి
Acc : ఇందని............ ... ఇన్నింటిని So many .

Ab : ఇంద e ఱి. లో - చేత -తో ...ఇన్నింటి..లో- చేత - తో ....inŠsc.sc may.

269
Theinitial of this pronoun is constantly written a , in the common
dialect .
IN .

N: అందలఱు .... all.

... అన్ని
G: అందులే .. అందఱ యొక్క అన్నింటి . అన్నిఁటియొక్క of all ,

D: అందం .... .... ........ to all.

.. అన్నింటికి ......
Acc. Coxer D..... ...... all .
. అన్నింటిని ........

Ab : అంద ē.. లో - చేత -తో .... అన్నింటి..లో-చేత -తో ..... in sc , all .

M & F. N.

N: కొందఱు ........ aferw .

కొన్ని .

Gi : కొందఱి -కొందఱ యొక్క కొన్నిఁటి కొన్ని ఁటి యొక్క of a few.

D: కొందలు కె . కొన ్ని ఁటి కి ....... to a few.

Acc : కొందుని .... న్నింటిని . . a few .

Ab : కొందఱ -- లో- చేతతో ......

.కొన్నిఁటి..లో - చేతతో ....in soc . a few.
INTERROGATIVE,
M & F. N.

N: ఎందలు ..... •how many?

ఎన్ని ...

G: ఎందఱి- ఎందఱో యొక్క ఎన్నింటి ఎన్నింటియెక్క_ of howmany ?

D: ఎందలుక ....... •to how many?
ఎన్నింటికి ..
.......... how many?
Acc : ఎందఱోని ... ...ఎన్నింటిని

Ab: ఎందఱో..లో - చేత - తో ....ఎన్నింటిలో- చేత -తో-ingc.howmany ?

270 The initial ofthis pronoun is , in the common dialect, converted into .
 OF SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 83

None of the foregoing pronouns of the third person can be used more 271
than once in a sentence, with reference to the same person or thing . If

Isay , వాఁడు he, వానితండ్రితో with his father , వచ్చి నాఁడు his come ,
I should not be understood to express that he ( the third person ) has come
with his own father, but that he (the third person ) has come with the fa
ther of a fourth. IfLask cud Dawo¿ av did he go to
his house ? I ask whether he (the third person) went to the house of ano-

ther, not whether he went to his own house.

This peculiarity in the use of the pronouns of the third person , has given 272
rise to the reflective pronoun , which is the same for all genders ,
and is always used with reference to some nominative of the third person
preceding it.
Sin gular.
N: ...... .తాను ...... ...
he, she, or it.
G: SI.SIRH of him, her, or it.
D: .....HD5............ ...... to him , her, or it.

Acc : ID or తన్ను ...

..తను him , her, or it .

...
Ab : ........... .. 5-
తన..లో -35 .§*.
చేతతో …………….in &c. him, her, or it.
Plural.
Fo
తారుr
N .............· Lor
or తాము ord
తమరు they .

G : …………………………… .ID or I2B_……… of them .

D : ...........I WK ..... ......to them .

Acc : ...........తమ
30ు or 52 2..
తమ్ము them.

Ab :........... తమలో - చేత - తో , .....in &c . them .

We say వాఁడుతనతండ్రితో వచ్చి నాఁడు he came with his ( own ) father

డుతనయింటికిపోయినాఁడా
వీఁ did he go to his (own) house ?

The pronoun , commonly written , what ? is defective : its 273

inflexion is , or 2 , but it is seldom used , except in the nomina-

tive or dative case ; thus, nom : sing : do , what ? dat : sing : de , cr

Jaces , to or for what ? why ?.

 84 TELOOGOO GRAMM A R.

274
The words ఇందు- అందు ఎందు , when standing alone, are not to be
considered pronouns, but adverbs, respectively denoting in this place, in that
place, and in what place but when the postpositions --- 30-
80 , and afew others, are affixed to them, they are indeclinable pro-
nouns, respectively denoting this, that, what ? as in this, and,
eo by that , Joss to or for what ? wherefore ?
1
 CHAPTER FOURTH.
- བ་

ADJECTIVES.

OF SNADJECTIVES.

The adjectives are indeclinable, varying neither in gender, in 275

number, nor in case; but dependent for these distinctions upon the substan-
tive nouns or pronouns, to some of which they are invariably prefixed .
The following list, containing a few of the most common, will shew that
they generally terminate in the short vowels 9 or v

చల్ల ... ........ cold. X. ...strong, hard.

చిన్న : ………..small . 205. .......... soft .

పెద్ద ... .....great . 2008 ................... dirty.

బన్న . little. ........................ damp, wet .
..... white. -blind.
గుడ్డి......
నల్ల ..... ..black. చేఁదు ....... ...bitter.
ev ...... red. అందము ...... .... beauti
ful.

....yellow. DXJ......
పొడుగు ... . tall , long.
వచ్చ .
...bad. BLev................. slack.
చెడ్డ .
1
Docã. ........... old. ...
..broad.
వెడల్పు
కొత్త ... .new . బళువు ...
..heavy.
మగ....... ………….male. తీపు .....
... .... sweet .

ముసలి ...... పులుసు

........ aged, old. DevI. sour .

పొట్టి.... short, small true.

LOD................. good. చురుకు ......... ...• sharp.
 86 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

276 A number of adjectives, ending in ~ and denoting qualities

which are the peculiar objects ofsight, taste, or touch, when prefixed to
substantive nouns or pronouns, may, at pleasure, affix the particle ;

thus, black, white, de red, yellow, WD azure blue, & SS

sweet, sour, or soft, prefixed to substantives , either remain

unchanged , or become నల్లని - తెల్లని & c . as తెల్ల or తెల్లనిబట్ట a white

cloth, తియ్య or తియ్యని పండం a swect fruit, మెత్త .or మెత్తని పత్తి soft
cotton.

277 Toall adjectives, when prefixed to substantives, we may, atpleasure ,

affix the particles అగు అయిన or అయినటువంటి from the verb త్రోవు to
become; butthese affixes do not alter their meaning in any way whatever;thus,
great, large; new, K blind, short, slack &c.
పెద్ద గొప్ప

make పెద్దగు . పెద్దయిన or పెద్దయినటువంటియిల్లు a large house , గో

ప్పరు . గొప్పైన orగొస్పైనటు వంటిమనిషి a great person, and so forth :

these particles, however, cannot be added to the adjectives mentioned above

as assuming , until that affix is first inserted ; thus , we cannot say BJ

but ສ we black cloth : it is at the same time to be remarked, that

the addition of అగు - అయిన or అయినటువఁటి to దేశ్యము adjectives

is, in general, neither necessary nor elegant.

EXCEPTIONS .

278 The adjective handsome or fine, always affixes & ; thus, we say
చక్కనిమనిషి a handsome person , not చక్క_మనిషి ,

279 Lempty, o good, and ES small, take no affixes whatever ; thus,

' డి పెట్టె un empty boar ,మఁచిమ నిషి aa good person, చిన్న గుఱ్ఱము a small

horse.

280 The adjective thin, small, affixes , at pleasure , the syllable ; to

which అ xు- అయిన or అయినటువంటి may be optionally added ; thus,

సన్న కాగిదము or సన్న మైన కాగిదము thin papcr : when it assumes the
syllable , it admits ofanother form , according to the following rule.
 OF ADJECTIVES . 87

• adjectives ending in , when prefixed to substantives, 281

All
either affix అగు - అయిన , or అయినటువంటి , or change the final ము ,
to పు or o పు ; thus , అందము beautiful , makes అందమగు - అందమయిన
or అందమయినటు వంటి మోము or మోములు a beautiful face or fa..
ces,or అండపు or అందంపు మో ము or మోములు abeuutifulface ; orfaces .

All other adjectives ending in V , when prefixed , without any 282

of the affixes abovementioned , to substantives beginning with a vowel , re-

quire the insertion ofés, to prevent hiatus ; thus, g∞ sharp , andŮL , an

arrow , make FeʊšėɔL» , a sharp arrow; pure, and X3 , a mir-

ror, make , a pure mirror.

adjectives are derived from substantives in the follow- 283

Some &
ing manner .
ADJECTIVES.
SUBSTANTIVES .

ఓడు ...... ...leaky.

.......... lameness ........ lame.

కుంటు ......
జున్ను . .జుంటి .
··honey, ........wod honied

... iron .
ఇనుము ..........iron ఇనుప ......

జనుము ..........hemp, flax.... hempen .

22

BLN ..........deafness ............ deaf.

It is necessary to apprize the reader that many nouns are used 284
both as adjectives and substantives, in the same manner as a number of terms
in our own language; thus, we say the dump is great, and

De a damp cloth, the word in Teloogoo, and damp in English,

being used, in these sentences, first as a substantive, and afterwards as an
adjective noun : thus, also , we find that means either bitter or

bitterness, & tall or tallness, ex broad or breadth, w hea-

ry or weight, sweet or sweetness, &c . bute beauty or beautiful,

and other words in 2 ,which are used either as adjectives or substantives

 88 TELOOGOO GRAM M A R.

may be considered properly to belong to the latter class of nouns ; for it

will be observed that, by rule 291 , they cannot be used in the former sense ,
without adding certain affixes, which as substantives they never assume.

OF తత్సమము ADJECTIVES .
285
The rules which have been given for the derivation of substantive
nouns from the Sanscrit, apply equally to the derivation of adjectives from

that language : తత్సను ము adjectives, therefore, in opposition to దేశ్యము

adjectives , admit of the distinctions of gender , number , and case .
Sanscrit. Teloogoo.
Crude Adjective. Masculine. Feminine . Neuter.

ధన్య .... virtuous ......

ధన్యుఁడు ........ ధన్యధన్యము
DJεaskilled
నిపుణ .......... నిపుణుఁడు ..... నిపుణ
...skilled .... నిపుణము

స్వతంత్ర ........independent.... స్వతంత్రుఁడు .. స్వతంత్ర .... స్వతంత్రము

పరతంత్ర .... .. dependent ...... పరతంత్రుఁడు .. పరతంత్రు .... పరతంత్రము

ప్రియ ....
dear ప్రియుఁడు .
...... ప్రియప్రియము
బధిర ......... ...deaf.. ... బధిరుఁడు ....... బధిర బధిరము
అంధ ........ ..blind ..... అంధుఁడు ....... అంధ ... అంధము
..Young .. బాలుఁడు .... బాల బాలము

వృద్ధ · aged , old ..

వృద్ధుఁడు... ..వృద్ధ ..........వృద్ధము
..excellent. .శ్రేష్ఠుఁడు.. శ్రేష్ఠము
.శ్రేష్ఠ ...
......
నిర్మల .... ·pure·· నిర్మలుఁడు నిర్మల . నిర్మలము
small, mean .. అల్పుఁడు ...... అల్ప అల్పము
అల్ప .

ఉన్నత ... - lofty , tall...... ఉన్నత

..ఉన్ ుఁడు
నతుఁడ ు .... ఉన్నత ...... ఉన్నతము

..short.. .....
హ్రస్వ హ్రస్వుఁడు .... (హ్రస్వ హ్రస్వము
..
.దీఘుఁడు ...... దీఘణ . .....దీఘురాము
దీసు ౯ . - long ·
దరిద్ర ---poor ... దరి ద్రుఁడు...... దరిద్ర ....... దరిద్రము

యోగ్య ........fit , proper .... యోగ్యుఁడు ... యోగ్య ...... యోగ్యము

విశాల ... ertensive ...... విశాలుఁడు..... విశాల........ విశాలము
విశాలుఁడు .... విశాల........
.....
ి
చమత్కారి F dexterous .. చమత్కారి . చమత్కారిణ .. చమత్కారి
అహంకారి F arrogant....... అహంకారి.... అహం కారిణి .. అహంకారి
 OF ADJECTIVES. 89

తత్సమము adjectives , when immediately prefixed to substantives , donot 286

in general admit of declension . They usually require the particles x-
అయినor అయినటువంటి to be affixed to the nominative singular , if the
substantive be neuter, and if the substantive be masculine or feminine,
either to the singular or plural nominative, according as the substantive may
be in the singular or plural number : feminine adjectives in ~,
before affixingthese particles, previously changethe final intove in

the singular , and రాండ్రు or రాండ్లు in the plural , from the word ఆలు ,

denotinga female; thus, సుందర మైనయిల్లు or యిండ్లు a handsome house

or houses , సుందరుఁడైన పురుషుఁడు a handsome man , సుందరు లైనపురు
షులు handsome men , సుందరురాలైన స్త్రీ a handsome woman , సుందరు

రాండ్రయిన స్త్రీలు or సుందరు రాండ్లయినస్త్రీలు handsome women .

Neuter తత్సమము adjectives in ము, instead of affixing అగు అయిన 287

or అయినటువంటి , may, like the దేశ్యము adjectives, change the final

Sor
ము, to పు or o పు ; thus , we may say సర సపుం ॥ సర సంపు పలుకు or పలుకులు
amellifluent expression or expressions (literally, words full of quintessence . )

Sanscrit adjectives ending in the terminations and , when adopt. 288

ed into Teloogoo , change them, in the masculine gender to Loco and
మంతుఁడు ; in the feminine , to వంతురాలు and మంతురాలు , or వతి and

మతి ; and in the neuter gender , to వంత ము and మంత ము , or వత్తు and మత్తు .
EXAMPLES .
Crude Adjective: Masculine : Feminine . Neuter .

బలవత్ -strong ..... బలవంతుఁడు .. బలవంతురాలు .. ) బలవంతము

...........
బలవతి....
.5 బలవత్తు

ంతుఁడు .. బుద్ధిమంతురాలు బుద్ధిమంతము

బుద్ధిమత్ “ sensible బుద్ధిమంతుఁడు ..
బుద్ధిమతి... ....5 బుద్ధిమత్తు

( భాగ్యవంతురాలు , భాగ్యవంతము
భాగ్యవల్
happy, richథాగ్యవంతుఁడు భాగ్యవతి భాగ్యవత్తు

తత్సమముadjectives, preceding తత్సమము substantives, often drop all 289

their Teloogoo terminations, and are compounded with the substantive in
their uninflected or crude state, according tothe rules of Sanscrit gram-

mar ; thus,
 90 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

దుష్టుఁడు . wicked
దుష్టుఁడు.... .రాక్షసుఁ
రాకు సుఁడు
wicked and ... డు aa giant may become దుష్ట రాయ .
kocaɔ a wicked giant.

... excellent, and ..... a horse ........ ...•

FatJS wan
[excellent horse
I
and ……….... ధనము
అధికము ..much and ... •
money అధిక ధన ము
[ much money.

ధన వంతుఁడు opulent,
opulent, and ప్రభువు...
.... ... a master ............
master ....... .... ధన వత్ప్రభువు
[an opulent master.
290 In the common dialect, neuter adjectives in 3 , of whatever class, are con-
stantly prefixed , with the particles అగు అయిన or అయినటువంటి , to
substantives of all genders and numbers promiscuously; thus, o85
గు - సుందరమయిన or సుందరమయినటువంటి- పురుషుఁడు - పురుషులు-

స్త్రీ - స్త్రీలు - ముఖము - ముఖములు & c . a handsome man- men- woman-

women-face-faces &c.

291 • The rules respecting and substantives are also

applicable to adjectives of the same descriptions.

OF ADJECTIVEPRONOUNS.

292 The adjective pronouns may be divided into the same classes as the sub-
stantive pronouns of the third person , viz . definite and indefinite , with
the addition of the possessive pronouns.

POSSESSIVES.
293 The possessive pronouns consist ofthe possessive or genitive cases of the
respective substantive pronouns, without the postposition viz .
... JD.....his (remote)
my
Lo .....
...our ...... ° D......her or its (do)
...... their M & F. (proximate)
మన ...... our
........their N: ( do ) ……………………….
D.......... thy ....
8their M. & F. (remote) ....
25 ..... your ·
their N: (do)
వీని ...
DD... his (proximate).
......his, her , its …………………………..
& D........her or its (proximate)…. ' their....…………………………………………………………..
..... their
 OF ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 91

These pronouns are indeclinable ; they are prefixed to nouns in the same 294

manner as the adjectives , but without affixes of any kind ; thus,

నాయిల్లు my house, వారి గుఱ్ఱములు their horses & c .

DEFINITE PRONOUNS.
Each of the definite adjective pronouns consists of one long vowel, viz . 295
the demonstrative proximate , or, as it is vulgarly written ,, mean-
ing this ; the demonstrative remote & that ; and the interrogative ఏ or, as
it is commonly written, , what ? When prefixed to substantives, these
pronouns are sometimes converted into their corresponding short vowels,
and the following consonant is then doubled; thus , Lwor Y§--
మలము or , as it is commonly written, యీయీకమలము orయొక్క మలము

this lotus; ఆ కాలము or అక్కాలము that time, ఏకాలము orఎక్కా

ము or as it is vulgarly written యే కాలము or యెక్కాలము what time ?
When the vowel is shortened , the is doubled , in each of these examples.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
The indefinite adjective pronouns are prefixed to plural substantives, 296
without any intermediate affix ; they are merely the nominative cases of the

indefinite substantive pronouns of the third person, viz.

M. & F. N.
20
ఇందఱBetv...........
ు ...... -ఇన్ని . • so many ,
......
Vosew.............. · all .
అన్ని
కొందలు .......... కొన్ని ...
a few.
ఎందలలు ............ ఎన్ని ......•how many ?

The indeclinable particle os, commonly written o , meaning the 297

whole, in full & c. affixed to substantives, has the same force asthe pronouns

అందలఱ orఅన్ని prefixed to them ; thus , అందఱమనుష్యులు or మనుష్యు

లంత all men , అంన్ని వస్తువులు or వస్తువులంత all things .
 CHAPTER FIFTH .

VERBS.

Teloogoo verbs are of four kinds ; neuter, active, passive, and causal. 298

These verbs are divided into two parts, the affirmative , and the negative; 299

and each of these two parts has an indicative mood, an imperative mood,

participles, and a verbal noun. The affirmative verb has an infinitive, but

the negative verb has none..

INDICATIV E.

The Indicative mood, in the affirmative verb, has, properly, only four 300

tenses ; the present, the past, the future , and the aorist. In the negative

verb, the aorist is the only tense . Each of these tenses has two numbers,

the singular,and the plural ; and in each number there are three persons ;
but there is no distinction of gender, except in the third person. In the

singular number of most of the tenses,the third person masculine is distin-

guished from the third person feminine and neuter both of which are the
same. In the plural, the third person masculine and feminine are one ;

and the neuter is, in general , different from both. In a few cases, how-

ever, the third person is the same for all genders,

 94 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

IMPERATIVE .

301
The imperativehas two numbers ; the singular and the plural .This mood ,

in the affirmative verb, has two persons ; the 2d . in the singular, and the

1st. and 2d . in the plural . In the negative verb, it has the 2d person only
in each number.

PARTICIPLES .

302 The participles are of two distinct kinds : the one we shall denominate

verbal, and the other relative, participles.

303 The affirmative verb has two verbal participles ; the present and the
past. The negative verb has one only, indefinite as to time. These verbal

participles require the addition of some personal termination , or of some

tense of another verb , in order to distinguish number and person . They

can never be used as adjectives, or substantives , like the English participles,

in such phrases as , the sounding shore, by promising, in speaking, &c. &c .

they must almost invariably be followed by a personal termination , or be

governed by some tense of a verb ; as in the phrases, frowning she speaks,

pleased he departed, wondering he stands. The words frowning, pleased,

and wondering, represent the Teloogoo verbal participle ; and the words

speaks, departed, and stands, the Teloogoo governing verb .

304 In the affirmative verb, there are three relative participles ; the present ,

the past, and the indefinite ; in the negative verb the indefinite only. They

admit ofno personal terminations, they can precede no verb, and are termed

relative participles, because the power ofthe English relative pronoun who,

which, that, is inherent in them : they therefore always refer to some noun

or pronoun with which they agree, as adjectives ; thus , a tree whichgrows,

a horse that leaps, would be expressed in Teloogoo by the relative parti-

 OF VERBS.. 95

ciples ; viz . పెరి గేచెట్టు a growing tree , దుమికేగుణము a leaping

horse, In order that the reader may recollect that our relative pronouns

are inherent in this part of the Teloogoo verb, the relative that ( selected,

as agreeing promiscuously with all genders) will be prefixed to it in Eng-

lish ; as, that leaps, that grows &c.

VERBAL NOUN S.

The verbal nouns are declinable substantives , expressing the action itself 305

whichis signified by the verb . Those terminating in followthe rules

for the second declension ; and those ending in any other syllable, are de-

clined like nouns ofthe third declension..

..
The origin of every part of the Teloogoo verb may be traced to that 306

crude form of it termed the root; which is sometimes also an abstract

noun, and, in the common dialect, is often the 2d . person singular of the

affirmative imperative . It always ends in ; thus,

ఆలకించు to hear, to listen.

అడ్డగించు .... to prevent, to oppose.

ఊరడించు..... ……..to console, to comfort.

ఎదిరించు to oppose.

గుమ్మరించు ....to pour.

этого ......to venture, to dare.

దీవించు ... ... to bless.

was dous... ...to lie down.

............to bud.
చిగుర్చు
తలఁచు ... to think .

ప్రే రేచు ....... ………………… to induce, to excite.

 TELOOGOO GRAMMA R.
96

............to fly.
Draw
...to be twisted.
పెనము
......to shine .
మెలఱఱయు .......
.......... to make a noise, to bark.
కూయు ..
to make.
చేయు ......
to write.
ు
వ్రాయ
.....to rain.
కురియు ........
......to ask.
అడుగు ....
to thunder.
ఉఱము ......
....to fly.
ఎగురు .......
to clean, to wash.
కడుగ
X ు ..
......
to study, to read.
చదువు
9d to sturgis norog by a witori. to wander, to turn back.
తెలుగు .
..........to leap.
దుముకు ............
malailof mar 01- ....to grow.
పెరుగు ....
30ggs of fit of ....to spin.
వడుకు
It is necess ary to remark that althou gh the Teloogoo root has been trans

307 elated with to, the sign of the English infinitive, it is never used in an infi-

nitive signification ,
From the root thus terminating in v, are formed the verbal participles ,
308 and the infinitive of the affirmative verb ; and from these three principal

parts of the verb , viz . the root , the verbal participles, and the infinitive of

the affirmative verb, spring all the rest of it's parts , both affirmative, and

negative, as shewn in the following table . Tolongos

f
 the

1
 OF VERBS. 97

THE PRINCIPAL PARTS OF THE VERB.

From the root in v , the present verbal participle is formed, by adding 309

in the superior, and in the inferior dialect ; thus, s , to beat,

or , beating. The participle from the root
makes
Go to be, may be added, as an auxiliary, to each of these participles,

which , by the rules for Sundhi, make and respectively;

hence కొట్టుచున్ను and కొట్టుతున్ను beating .

The past verbal participle is formed by changing of the root into ; 310
in other words , as expressed in the table, by adding to the root in v , the

final v being dropped : thus, from , to beat, comes , having

beaten.

The infinitive is formed by merely droppingthe final v ofthe root; thus, 311
from the root comes కొట్ట, to beat.

INDICATIVE MOOD.

The present tense is derived from the present verbal participles; the past 312
tense from the past verbal participle ; the future and the affirmative aorist
from the root, and the negative aorist from the infinitive, by the addition
ofthe affixes shewn in the table, which consist partly of certain termina-
tions defining the several persons singular and plural, partly of particles
interposed between these personal terminations, and the principal parts of
the verb, whence the tenses are derived.
PERSONAL TERMINATIONS.

The personal terminations ofthe verb are derived from the substantive 313
pronouns .

The personal terminations ofthe first and second persons are. 314
For all the tenses, except the firstform
For the first form of the past tense.
of the past tense ..

Singular …………
..1 : .......

2 5 .......
Plural........1 35 .....
2 .........
 98 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR .

315 Except the first form of the past tense, which merely converts the final

to 9, thefirst person singular ofall the tenses ends in , the termination

of the pronoun I; the second person singular, in the same manner,
terminates in , the final syllable of thou ; the first person plural
ends in S , the termination of we ; and the second person plural

ends in , the termination of r∞, you .

316
The personal terminations of the third person are not so regular : they
stand thus ,

Present. Past. Future. Aorist. Negative Aerist,

1st. form 2d form 1st, form 2d . form
...... ....... ......
Singular.
@ .... ..... ను ...... దు

Plural. K...........................
• ............ &

D............ D ........D. నువు

317 In the present tense, in the second form of the past and in the negative
aorist, the third person singular ends , in the masculine, with , the final
syilable of the pronouns or c , he ; in the feminine and neuter
gender of the two first mentioned tenses , it terminates with & , the final
syllable ofthe pronouns &ore , she or it; butin the feminine and neuter

of the last mentioned tense, it ends, with . The first form of the past
tense, and the affirmative aorist, have , and the two forms ofthe future

, for all genders in the third person singular ,

318 Except the first form of the perfect tense, which merely converts into 9,
the third person plural of all the tense in the masculine and feminine gen-
ders endsin , the final syllable of the pronouns & or , they, in the

neuter ofthe present tense, and of the second form of the past tenso, it ends
in , the final syllable of the neuter pronouns or , they; but the

other tenses have the neuter plural the same as in the neuter singular,
except the negative aorist , which terminates in .
 OF VERBS. 99

INTERMEDIATE PARTICLES.

Before affixing the personal terminations above stated to the principal 319
parts ofthe verb, from which the tenses are derived ; the affirmative tenses

assume certain intermediate particles, which are the same for the first and
second persons both singular and plural, but are liable to variation in the
third person, as shewn below.

1st. and 2d. persons 3d. person singular. 3d. person plural.
singular and plural.
M. F.&N. M. &F. N.
Present ....

S1st . forma .
Past ·... నా .......... న
2d . form. No .... D ...................
·

Future. ( 1st . form............. -DL.........

2d. form..... S .......... -Sor .... or ................. fors
Aorist...... ... దు ... దు ....

In the present tense, long ( ) is prefixed to all the personal 320

terminations, except the third person feminine or neuter in the singular,

and the third person neuter in the plural , which prefix .

In the first form of the past tense, is prefixed to all the personal termi- 321
nations, except to those ofthethird person, which take before them in the
singular, and in the neuter plural : in the masculine and feminine plural,
there is no prefix . Inthe second form ofthe past tense, is prefixed to all
the personal terminations, except the third person feminine and neuter in
the singular, and the third person neuter in the plural, which prefix .

The firstform of the future prefixes toall the personal terminations, 322
except to those of the third person singular and the neuter of the third
person plural, which prefix . The second form prefixes to all the
personal terminations ; but in the third person singular, and in the neuter
of the third person plural, it may at pleasure be changed into § .

The affirmative aorist prefixes to all the personal terminations, ex- 323

cept to those of the third person singular, and of the neuter third person
plural, which take no prefix.
 100 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

324 The negative aorist does not assume any prefix before the personal ter-
minations.
PRESENT TENSE.

325 The personal terminations , connected with the intermediate particles for
the present tense, are exhibited in the table ; thus, కాఁడు-

. &c. When these affixes are added to the present verbal participle,

in order to form the present tense, the final v of the participle is dropped,
and the present verbal participle, in all verbs, having four forms, viz .

చు - తు - చున్ను . and తున్ను , the present tense , which is formed from

the participles, has also four forms, viz . చాను · తాను · చునాన్ను - తు

న్నాను & c . thus, the present verbal participles కొట్టుచు- కొట్టుతు - కొ

ట్టుచున్ను and కొట్టుతున్ను beating , respectively , make కొట్టుచాను & c .

కొట్టుతాను & c . కొట్టుచున్నాను & c . orకొట్టుతున్నాను & c. I &c. beat ;

but it will be seen , from the table , that the third person feminine or neuter in
the singular, and the third person neuter in the plural, are not added to the

participles in or , but only to those in or :they have, there-

fore, only two forms ; viz . చున్నది or తున్నది- చున్నవి or తున్నవి respec-
tively ; for the conversion in the singular of too , in the common dialect,

can hardly be reckoned a new form ; thus, కొట్టుచున్నది or కొట్టుతున్నది

99 they beat. The participles
she or it beats or

in చు and చున్ను are both strictly grammatical , but those in and

are generally used in the common dialect. Ofthe four forms of the present
tense derived from these participles, that only which is derived from the
ను
participle in viz &c. is strictly grammatical, the form

derived from the grammatical participle in , viz w , is vulgar, and

it's use is confined chiefly to the religious bramins of the Northern districts :
but the forms derived from the participles in and , viz F and

&c. arein common use, and should always be selected in prefer-

ence to the other forms, when we speak the language .
 OF VERB S. 101

PAST TENSE.

There is not any variation in the past verbal participle, from which the two 326
forms of the past tense are derived ; their formation , as shewn in the table, is
therefore very simple; having beaten makes in the first form 921
have beaten, thou hast beaten &c. The third person ofthe first form

is he, she, or it has beaten, the of being dropped when the

termination , beginning with a vowel , is added to it. In the second form,
&having beaten, makes§ & &c . I have beaten &c . Both of these

forms are strictly grammatical, and both are equally in common use.
FUTURE..

All the terminations added to the root, to compose the two forms of 327
this tense, commence with vowels ; the final of the root is therefore

dropped, when they are added to it ; thus, the root makes ట్టెదను
or § , I will beat. The second form of this tense is used by the
vulgar only. The first person singular of thesecond form ofthis tense must

not be confounded with the third person singular in the first form ofthe

past tense . I will beat is entirely distinct, in meaning , from

he, she, or it has beaten ; but the only difference in writing or

pronouncing them, is, that the before is long in the former , and short
in the latter. It is ofmuch importance to the reader to understand that
the two forms ofthe future tense are seldom used ; the present or the aorist
being commonly substituted for them .
AORIST.
The formation ofthe affirmative aorist from the root, and ofthe nega- 328
tive aorist from the infinitive, by the addition of the affixes shewn in the

table, is so simple, as scarcely to require explanation : the root makes

it's affirmative aorist ∞∞, I do beat, have beaten, or will beat ;

and from the infinitive comes , I do not beat, have not beaten,
or will not beat.

IMPERATIVE, PARTICIPLES , AND VERBAL NOUNS.

AFFIRMATIVE VERB .

The affirmative imperative is formed by adding to the root or 329

for the 2d , person singular ; ∞ , or in the common dialect xw,
 102 TELOO GOO GRAMMAR.

for the 1st. person plural ; and c or c for the 2d . person plural : the
last mentioned termination , in the common dialect, is added to the infi-

nitive, instead ofthe root ; thus, from కొట్టు come కొట్టుము orకొట్టుమీ
beat thou ; ∞∞∞ , or in the common dialect , let us beat,

&, y
yee ;; the
కొట్టుఁడు or కొట్టుఁదీ , or in the common dialect కొట్టండీ , beat
reader however will bear in mind that, by rule 306, the root itself, in the

common dialect , is often used as the 2d . person singular of the affirmative

imperative ; instead of for , therefore, we constantly say
beat thou.

330
The formation of the verbal participles, in the affirmative verb , has al-
ready been explained ; see rules 309 and 310 : it only remains therefore to
shew the manner in which the relative participles are formed : the present
relative participle is formed from the present verbal participles in , by
Changing into : there are two verbal participles in D , viz . the

grammatical participle in , and the common participle in ; the

relative participle therefore has also two corresponding forms, and

న్న ; thus, from కొట్టుచున్ను and కొట్టుతున్ను beating, comeకొట్టుచున్న

and , in the common dialect, that beats. The past relative

participle is formed by adding the syllable to the past verbal participle ;

thus, from having beaten, comes thathas beaten ; the indefinite
relative participle is formed by adding to the root or in the in-
ferior , and or in the common dialect, and as all these terminations
commence with a vowel, the final ofthe root must be dropped when they

are added ; thus,the root makes its indefinite relative participle

or
డు on కొ ట్టెది in the superior dialect, and in the common dialect, కొట్టే
that beats, has beaten, or will beat. The root itself is sometimes,
ట
in books, used as the indefinite relative participle.

331 The affirmative verbal noun is formed by adding to the root, or in the
common dialect, by adding tothe infinitive ; thus, from comes

కొట్ట ట , or in the common dialect కొట్టడము the beating.

 OF VERB S. 103

NEGATIVE VERB.

The negative imperative is formed by adding to the infinitive or 332

, or inthe common dialect & , for the 28. person singular; and or

c , or in the common dialect ca, for the 2d . person plural ; thus, from

కొట్ట to beat comes కొట్టకుము orకొట్టకుమా or కొట్టళ beat not thou, and

కొట్టకుఁడు or కొట్టకుఁదీ or కొట్టకండి beut not ye. By adding to the infini-

tive , we form the negative verbal participle ; by adding to it , we form

the negative relative participle ; and by adding to it , we form the nega-

tive verbal noun ; thus, from to beat comes § without beating or

having beaten ; &2 that does not, has not, or will not beat ; and
the not beating.

Neuter and active verbs are conjugated in the same manner: we shall there- 333
fore treat of them conjointly; merely distinguishing the from the
verbs : we shall afterwards submit an example of the passive
verb, and shall conclude this chapter with a few remarks on the causal
verb .

OF SIN VERBS.
Roots in or undergo certain changes to which other verbs are 334

not liable: we shall therefore divide the verbs into three conjugations; the
first including all verbs the root of which terminates in any other syllable
than or ; the second all those that have the root in ; and the

third all those of which the root terminates in ; and, in giving an ex

ample ofeach conjugation , we shall place first the correct grammatical

form , the common forms following in order, as they more or less approach
to it.
FIRST CONJUGATION,

All the roots that terminate in any other syllable than or belong 335
to this conjugation ; and merely require the addition of the different termi-
nations mentioned in the foregoing table.

The root to beat, is selected as an example of this conjugation . 336

7104
TELOO GRAM .
GOO MAR

Root · common. common.

కొట్టు
Present verbal )
participle...... కొట్టుచున్ను..కొట్టుచు..కొట్టుతున్ను.కొట్టుతు beating .

33
Past ... do ........క

33
having beaten .

Infinitive ....... ..........to beat .

AFFIRMATIVE VERB.
INDICATIVE MOOD .
PRESENT .
common.
ar
st
I.2d

కొట్టుచున్నాను ............ కొట్టుచాను....... ... I beat .

Singul

కొట్టుచున్నావు . Thou beautest.

కొట్టుచావు........
.

M.

కొట్టుచున్నాఁడు. కొట్టుచాఁడు ........... He beats .

3d
.
F.
N
&

(కొట్టుచున్న
or ది ?
.

She or it beats.
కొట్టుచున్నది .....
(కొట్టుచుంది ..5
.Plural
1st

........ ... We beat .

.

కొట్టుచున్నాము ..........కొట్టుచాము
2d

..... You beat.

.

కొట్టుచున్నారు .. కొట్టుచారు .......

M.
N.
F
&
.

S కొట్టుచున్నారు ....
3d

-కొట్టుచారు ... )
.

They beat .
72 కొట్టుచున్నవి .... .కొట్టుచున్నవి .
common. common.
, st

..... - Ibeat.
I2d
Singular

కొట్టుతున్నాను .... కొట్టుతాను .....

Thou beatest .
కొట్టుతున్నావు "కొట్టుతావు ..
.

కొట్టుతున్నాఁడ కొట్టుతాఁడు ........... Hebeats .

M.
3d
,

్నద ి ున్నది ?
2 ) కొట్టుకున
F.
N

-కొట్టుత
&

or or
.

She or it beats .
( 2 ) కొట్టుతుంది .... .కొట్టుతుంది ..
Ist
.

We beat.
కొట్టుతున్నాము........ కొట్టుతాము .....
. ral
2d
Plu

కొట్టుతున్నారు ... You beat .

.

ట్టుతారు......
HS: RUN

.
కొట్టుతున్నారు....
3d

నా కొట్టుతారు -- )
.

They beat.
రెడ్డి
కొట్టుతున్నవి ...... కొట్టుతున్నవి )
 OF VERB S . 105

PAST.
Singular
1st

నాను ... ...

.2d

తిని ....... ........ I have beaten.

తివి .. Thou hast beaten .

ట్టినావు
.

He has beaten .
..
F.
N
&

నాఁడు
M

ట్టెను .....
3d

....
.

నది
common. She, or it has beaten .
కొట్టెమ్మ ........
Sow...
st

........
1.2d

We have beaten .
Plural

ట్టినాము
Lun
కొట్టితిరి ... ట్టినారు You are beaten ,
.

M.
N.
.F
&

పొట్టిరి ... " నారు ...... They have beaten .

3d
.

కొట్టిన వి
ట్టెను ...... ట్టినవి ..
FUTURE.
common .
Singular
1st

.... I shall beat .

కొట్టెదను...........కొట్టేను.....
.

Thou wilt beat.

2d
.
.

కొట్టెడవు
M.F.
.&.N

స్టేవి ....
.... He, she or it will beat.
3d
.

స్టెడిని....
ట్టీని .....
Ist
.2d

కొ క్షెదము ......... కొట్టేము ...... .... We shall beat,

Plural

కొట్టేరు ..........
..... You will beat .
ెదరు .....
స్టెదరు
కొట్ట
.

కొట్టెదరు........... కొ Si......
M.S
.;PF

They will beat.

3d

ని
.

or
N.

కొడైడిని .........
( కొట్టీని ...
.Singular

AORIST .
24.

కొట్టుడును...... .... I beat, did beat , or shall beat .

3st
.I2Ist
d

............ Thou beatest, didst beat, or wilt beat.

M.

కొట్టుదువు......
F.
.N
&

చెట్టును ....... He, she, or it beats , did beat , or will beat .

కము .We beat, did beat , or shall beat.

కొట్టుడుము ..
Plural

కొట్టు దుగ ు ...... .. • You beat , did beat , or will beat .

M.SF.
N.
.

పెట్టుదురు .. They beat, did beat , or will beat .

3d
.

కొట్టును .......
 106 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

ular
ral
IMPERATIVE MOOD .
.. ing
Plu
S common.
2d
కొట్టుము ... కొట్టువి ........కొట్టు ..........beat thou.
.
common.
.ist

... let us beat.

కొట్టుదము ........ కొట్టుదాము common.
2d

...
.

·5ocago
కొట్టుఁడు ..........
కొట్టుఁడీ కొట్టంది ...... beat ye
RELATIVE PARTICIPLES,
PRESENT.
common.

STANDING that beats.

కొట్టుచున్న........
PAST.
..that has beaten.
కొట్టిన ......... INDEFINITE.
common. common.

కొట్టు..కొ ట్టెడు..కొ ట్టెది..కొట్టే..కొస్టేటి that beats, Thus beaten , or will

[beat.
VERBAL NOUN,
common.

కొట్టుట ....... .. …………..the beating.

కొట్టడము ....
NEGATIVE VERB.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
ar

AORIST .
Singul
st
.12d

కొట్టను .... ·I do not, did not, or shall not beat .

.

కొట్టవు . •Thou dost not, didst not, or wilt not beat.

.M.
F.
N
&

......He does not, did not, or will not beat .

3d
.

She, or it, does not, did not, or will not beat ,

కొట్టదు ......
Plural
,lat
.2d

We do not, did not, or shall not beat.

కొట్టము ...
...You do not, did not, or will not beat.
.

కొట్టగు .........
M.
N.
F&.

........
•&
కొట్టరు .
3d

They do not, did not, or will not beat.

.

కొట్టవు ..... IMPERATIVE.

common.
:. ing
Plu

· 08 ....beat not thou..

2d
S
,

కొట్టకుము......కొట్టకుమా . common.

కొట్టక ం డి beat not ye.

2d

కొట్టకుఁడు......కొట్టకుఁడీ.....
.
 OF VERBS. 107

VERBAL PARTICIPLE.

· without beating, or without having beaten.

కొట్టక ...
RELATIVE PARTICIPLE.
..that does not, did not, or will not beat.
కొట్టని
VERBAL NOUN.
the not beating.
కొట్టమి .....
The following are a few examples of the numerous verbs in the first 337

conjugation which , in all their forms, are similar to 8 ° to beat,

Root. Present verbal participles. Past verbal Infinitive.
participles.
..
పలుకు ..... పలుకుచున్ను & c పలిక. పలుక ......to utter , to pronounce.
...
అమ్ము .... అమ్ముచున్ను & అమ్మి అమ్మ ...... to sell.

అల్లి ....అల్ల to plait.

అల్లు ...... అల్లుచున్ను . & c...
.......
ఆడు....... ఆకుచున్ను . & c. ఆది.... ఆడ to play.
become cool, to be
ఆగు ..... ఆగుచున్ను .. & c... ఆరి .... ఆర ... to
[extinguished.
ఈఁదు .ఈఁదుచున్ను & c. ఈ ది ఈ ఁద ....to sin .
.... .....
ఈను ... ఈనుచున్ను & c . ఈని ఈన to bring forth, to pro-
[ duce, applied to cattle, or grain .

day .....ఉబ్బు చున్ను . & c....ఉబ్బి ... ఉబ్బ to sell.

ఉబ్బు ....

ఊకొట్టు..ఊకొట్టుచున్ను & c ....ఊకొట్టిఊకొట్ట..to listen.

....to be rocked .
ఊఁగు .... ఊఁగుచున్ను & c... ఊఁగ్ .. ఊఁగ
.. .... .....
ఊను...... ఊనుచున్ను .. & ఊని ఊన . to lean aipon;
.... ...
ఎక్కు . ·JKz_ ¿BV» &.……………
c D83– ··· J§— ···· to mount.
....to dry.
ఎండు ..... ఎందుచున్ను .. & c...... ఎంది .... ఎండ

అడుము .. అదుముచున్ను & c... అదిమి . అదమ ... to press.

YK ...Q +vKubz . &c ....Yes. ……

.. …... to insert ( in writing. }

ఉదుకు .... ఉడుకుచున్ను .& c ఉదికి .... ఉడక ..... to boil.

ఉతుకు...... ఉతుకుచున్ను .& c. ఉతికి .. ఉతక .... to wash, to bleacli.

.....
ఉటుకు .... ఉబుకుచున్ను.& c. ఉబికి ఉబళ ...to overflow .
 108 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

Root. Present verbal participle. Past verbal participle. Infinitive.

కొఱఱుకు .......కొఱకుచున్ను & కొక లుక to bile .

దొలుకు...... కొలుకుచున్ను & దొఱికి .... దొలుక .....to be found ,
....
నఱఱుకు....... నలుకుచున్ను & నటికి నలుక ........to cut.
పగులు ....... ..&c. 7
λε.. Xe ...... to break.
పగులుచున్ను .. & c... పగల
EXCEPTIONS.
338
The undermentioned and a few other roots ending in , when fol-
lowed by or , change or 2 , at pleasure, into or cE,
or o ; and in these verbs , the syllables 2 or , followed by e , are
invariably changed into c, the e being at the same time, converted into és.

అను .....to say.

.....
to sec, to bring forth .
.
to buy, to take.
విను ....... to hear.
తిను ........ to cat.

339 For instance, to buy, in order to form the present affirmative ver
bal participle , adds , and makes or or so buying;
and in the affirmative aorists orr s
కొన్దును or కొ c దును . In the

second and third persons plural of the affirmative aorist, instead of o

, we may, by a rule applicable to these verbs only, change the of

, or the itself, into e ; thus, soos or c ), you or theybuy,

didbuy, or will buy,thus also followed by, , makes c

buying; and, in the perfect tense, , followed by 9 , makes ce

I have bought .

340 The foregoing verbs, together with

చను ... ··to go……….. 15x …………………..to laugh or smile.

.................to be corrupted
T ... ………………..to suit, to fit.
పడు .. to fall * ........ ……to break.
to 10 place, to keep & ..
…………….. to descend.
ఇడు ......
 OF VERBS. 109

may at option change , atthe commencement of any of the terminations

mentioned in the table, into 9 ; thus , & or she has
bought , కొ నెదను or కొనియెదను I shall buy .

All the roots mentioned above as exceptions, instead of forming the 341

past relative participle of the affirmative verb in the regular manner, may,
at pleasure, form it by changing the final v of the root into u and
doubling the preceding consonant ; thus , we say cither 2 or

that bought, or 5X that fitted.

The roots in specified in rule 338 , together with the three roots in 342
mentioned in rule 340 , contract the second form of the past tense, in a

manner peculiar to themselves ; by doubling the consonant of the second

syllable, which coalesces with the vowel ofthe third syllable, and reject-
ing both the vowel of the second syllable, and the consonant of the third

syllable ; tlhus , కొనినాను Ibought , becomesకొన్నాను, and పడినాను,

Ifell, becomes D.

The verb § , to buy, is here given at full length, as an example of 343

the irregular verbs of this conjugation .
Root………
. కొను . common. common.

Present verbal participleకొనుచున్ను ..కొంచున్ను..కొనుచు..కొంచు..

[ కొంటున్ను..ంటు....buying .
Past do ………….. ...•having bought
.
కొన ... ... ..to buy.
Infinitive ...
Verbs in , such as , do not derive any form of the present tense $44

from the participle in నుచు .

AFFIRMATIVE VERB,
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT.
st
ular
.12d

కొనుచున్నాను ..I buy.

ంచున్నాను .......
Sing

Thou buyest.
కొనుచున్నాను......... కొంచున్నావు ..-
.

..
F.
N
&

He buys..
M

కొనుచున్నాడు ... కొంచున్నాఁదు .

3d
.

కొనుచున్నది ...... చున్నది

౦ wido w ...... She or it buys.
 110 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

Plural
. st
i2d
కొనుచున్నాము ........కొంచున్నాము We body.
.

M.SF.
You buy .
కొనుచున్నాగు ..........కొంచున్నారు ....
34

.కొంచున్నారు......... They buy

.

నుచున్నారు .....
కొనుచున్నవ ........
( ి
......కొంచున్నవి ........
common. common. common:
.1st
2d

కొంచాను ....కొంటున్నాను .... ?

Singular

"ంటున్నాను ....కౌంటాను...... I buy ,

కొంచావు .... కొంటున్నావు . కొంటావు ..... Thou buyest ,

.

* కొంచాఁడు..కొంటున్నాఁడు ..కొంటాఁడు ..... He buys .

gd

ది
.

కొంచున్నది.కొంటున్నది కొంటున్నది .. She or it buys

必 ? .
" కొంచుంది ....కొంటుంది కొంటుంది .... 5
. ral
st
I.2d

కొంచాము..కొంటున్నాము ...కొంటాము.... We buy.

Plu

కొంచారు.... కొంటున్నారు..కొంటారు .... You buy.

.F& .
N.M
3d

ంచారు .....కొంటున్నారు.....కొంటారు .. They buy .

.

కొంచున్నవి..కొంటున్నవీ......కొంటున్నవి ..S
PAST.
peculiar.
ar
1st
.2d

కొంటిని .... కొనినానినానుకొన్నాను ....... I bought .

Singul

..... Thou boughtest .

కొంటివి ........కొనినావు ..... ..కొన్నావు .
.

M.

నెను .....
&.
F.

నినాఁడు .......కొన్నాఁడు ...... He bought.

N
3d
.

నినది
కొనెను .... common. ...కొ
.... న్నద....
.... ి......
........ She or it bought .
కొనింది ....
1st
.

కొంటిమి .......కొనినాము కొన్నాము..... We bought .

; ral
2d

You bought .
.

కొంటిరి ... కొనినారు

.కొన్నారు ...
Plu

M.
N.
F
&

కొనిరి
.

....... కొనినారు ........ కొన్నార

3d

They bought.
.

( కొనెను ...... కొనినవి ...........

..కొన్నవి ....
 'OF V BB BS .

FUTURE.
common.
Singular

కొనేను ·I shall buy .

st
.12d

కొనెదను

కొనేవు ...... Thou wilt buy .

.

కొనెడవు ..........
M.F.
N
.&

or ......
కొనే He she or it willbuy.
3d

నాడిని ..
.

కొనిని ......
.కొనేము ....... ......... We shall buy .
నెదము ....
.1st

కొ
2d
Plural

.కొనేరు ........ You will buy .

కొ నెదగు .....
కొనేరు .......
.

దరకు
కొనెనెద ు .......
3d
.

A కొనెడిని .. They will buy .

కొనేని ........
కొసని ..

AORIST.
Singular

కొనుదును ....కొందును ... I buy , bought , or shall buy .

l3Ist
.est
d

కొనుదువు .... కొందువు ....Thou buyest , boughtest, or wilt bay .

.

M.F.
~
.N&

.. He , she , or it buys , bought , or will.buy .

' నును .

కొనుదుము .. కొందుము .. We buy, bought , or shall buy .

.Plural
2d

కొనుదురు..కొందురు. } You buy, bought , or veil buy.

.

కాండ్రు ...)

నుదురు . కొందురు .
M.
.N.
F
&

They buy , bought, or will buy .

3d

కొండ్రు ....
.

కొనును .....
IMPERATIVE MOOD .
conimon.
నువి కొను...... .... buy thou .
కొనుము .......
common.

కొనుదము ......... కొందము కొందాము

. ...........let us buy .
common.
buy ye.
కొనుఁడు ....... §JCA…………...... $ 500.....
--RELATIVE PARTICIPLES.
PRESEN T.
common.

కొంచున్న కొంటున్న...that buys ,

కొనుచున్న .....
 112 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

PAST.

కొనిన ...... .....that bought.

INDEFINITE.
common. common.

కొను .కొనెడు .కొనెడి కొనే కొనేటి .. that boys, bought, or will biy .
VERBAL NOUN.
common.
నుట.... కొనడము .... ......the buying.

NEGATIVE VERB.
INDICATIVEMOOD.
AORIST .
ar

కొనను ...
1. st
Singul
2d

I do not, did not, or shall not buy.

..

కొనవు Thou dost not, didst not , or wilt not buy.

.

నఁడు ..... He does not, did not, or will not buy .

3d
.

నడు . She or it does not, did not, or will not buy .

1st

కొనము ... We do not, did not, or shall not buy.

Plural
.

కొనగు ....
2d

You do not, did not, or will not buy.

.
.

నరు ....
3d

They do not, did not, or will not buy.

.

కొనపు ......
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
commen.
S: ing
Plu

.... ....
2d

....
కొనకుము ... -కొనకుమా buy not thou.
.

ja common .

కొనకుఁడు .... కొనకుఁదీ .......... 85

కై 5c buy not ye.
జైతే
VERBAL PARTICIPLE.
కొనక ... without buying, or without having bought.
RELATIVE PARTICIPLE.
that does not , did not, or will not buy.
VERBAL NOUN,
కొనమి .... .the not buying.
……………

N: B: the verb S has two irregular forms in the second person of the affirmative

impeiative, viz . కొమ్ము or కొమ్మి buy thou కొండు or కొండీ buy ye.
 OF VER BS. 113

SECOND CONJUGATION IN .

All verbs having the root.in form the affirmative aorist and im- 345
perative , either in the manner explained in the table rule 308) or by chang
ing ofthe affirmative aorist into , and v of the affirmative
imperative into ; and, in these cases , ifthe vowel preceding. be ,
it must be changed into ; thus, from to do comes wor
Ido, did, or shall do. vxor, let us do ; but the
root తదియు , which has s preceding యు , makes తదియుదును or తడు
తును , and తడియుదము or తడుత ము, never తదితును and తదితము ..
‫آن‬
In the commondialect, roots in form the second person of the affir- 346

mative imperative by changing the into ; thus, to do makes

So do thou.

Roots in , when they affix 9 or , or terminations beginning with 347

these vowels, as shewn in the table, rule 308, invariably change the final

syllable into or ; thus, the root todo, when it adds 9 to

form the past verbal participle, makes 2 or 38 having done, and when

it adds — ద ను to form the future , it makes చే సెదను or చే శెదను , &c .

never &c : when followed by to form the verbal noun, and

by in the third- person singular of the affirmative aorist, such roots.

change the యు into సు at option only ; as చేయుట or చేసుట the doing

BNI or II he she or it does, did, or will do ; and if the vowel

preceding the be , it must be changed into v ; thus, to be

damp, makes the being damp, he, she, or it is, was, or
will be danp , never తడిసుట; and తడిసును.

Roots in ʊ, when followed by or , invariably change the 348

syllable into the letter , which coalesces with the e in it's doubled

form ; thus, followed by or , to form the common pre-

sent verbal participle always becomes and respectively,

never
చేయుతున్ను and చేయుతు .
 114 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR .

349 The following isan example ofthis conjugation.

Root ...... చేయు common . common.

Present verbal participle చేయుచున్ను ... చేయుచు... చేస్తున్ను ... చేస్తు

[doing.
Past ............tho .. చేసి
$ చేశా .......
k .... $4 .... having done ,
Ffinitive ............ చేయ ...... .............to do.

Verbs ofthis conjugation do not derive any form of the present tense from

the participle in యుచు.

AFFIRMATIVE TERB.
INDICATIVE MOOD.

N. PRESENT .
common. .common .
.1st
za
ular

చేయుచున్నాను...... చేస్తున్నాను . చేస్తాను . I do .

చేయుచున్నా These ...... Thou lost .
Sing

వు
. చేస్తున్నావు చెస్తావు......
.

(జ చే యు చు న్ నా ఁడ ు ... చేస ్తు న్న ాఁడ ు ... చేస్తాఁడు .--- He docs . .. a

చేసా
3d
.

చేయుచున్నది ..... చేస్తున్నది... చేస్తున్నది . Shever to adds.

చెస్తుంది .... o abba ti

28.
Ist
Plural

చేయుచున్నాము .... చేస్తున్నాము .... చేస్తాము... We‹do.

.

Weilo,

చేయుచున్నారు .... చేస్తున్నారు ..... చేస్తారు .... You lo

PS

చేయుచున్నారు ...... చేస్తున్నారు...... చేస్తారు ...?

They do.
చేయుచున్నవి......... చేస్తున్నవి చేస్తున
కున్న్న వి)
PAST.
ist
.
ular

చేతిని .... చేతిని ... చేసినాను చేశాను......Y diu.

Sing
28

తివి ... చేశితివి.... చేసినావు

.

చేసావు ... Photu dist.

.

చే సెను శ్వశ్యానం చేసినాడు.... చేశానాఁడు ... Hedu.

M.
N.
F.
S.
34

చేసినది చేసినది
.

or for
చే సెను ... చేశాను :3
common. common. She or it did.
చేసింది చేశింది .
 OF VERB S. 415
.1st
2d

చేసితిమి .. చేశితిమి .... చేసినాము .... చేశినాము.... We did .

Plural

చేసితిరి .... చేశితిరి ... చేసినారు...... చేశినారు..... You did .

.

మా బేగిరి ...... చేశారి ..... చేసినారు .....చేశారు ....

They did
3d
.

తేజ చే
చే సెను ... చే రెను... చేసినవి ..... .చేశినవి .......
FUTURE.
common. common.
Singular

చే ఫెదను ...... చే శెదను .... చేసేను ....చేను Isuallüto .

.

చే సెడవు ....... చే రెడవు .. చేసేవు... చేశేవు . Thou will do .

1.F.
N
.&

చేసేని .... చేజేని ) He , she , or it will

Sd

చే సెడిని ......,, బే రెడ్డిని..

.

( చేసిని.... చేశని ) [ do .
1st

చేసేము .. చే శేము We shall do ,

.

చే సెదము ..... చే రెదము

Plural
2d

చే గెదరు ....... చేరెదరు .... చేసేరు ... చే రేగు .. You will. do .

.
.

చే సెదరు....... చే శెధరు చేసేరు . చేశేరు ?

చేసేనిచే లేని They will do .
or.
$ has fan..... or
చేసిని .... చేశీని...
AORIST.
Singular
.1st
,2d

చేయుదును....... చేతును ......Iedo , did, or shall do.

..

చేయుదువుచేతువు . Thou dost, didst, or wilt o.

M.F
.&N
3d

చేయును . చేసును ...... He, she, or it does, it , or will to ,

1st
.2d .

చేయుదుము ...... చేతుము ...We, do, did , or shall lo .

Plural

FXv w x......F ........ You do, did, or will do.

.

జ్ఞ చేయుదురు చేతురు ......?

3d

They do , did, or will do.

.

చేయునుచేసును .....
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
common.......
ug

2d
: in

వె చేయుము ........ చేయువి .... చేయి do thou ,

Pl

common.
S
;
:
Ist

చేయుదము ..... చేతము చేశాము.. let as do ..

.

common,
gar
.

చేయుఁడు ........ చేయుఁడి చేయండి . do ye .

 116 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

RELATIVE PARTICIPLES,
PRESEN T.. -
common.

చేయుచున్న... చేస్తున్నా .... ..that does.

PAST.
చేసిన ...... ...... చేశన ......
... that did.
INDEFINITE.
చేయు .. చే సెడు..చేశాడు .. చేసెడి.. చే రెడి ..)
common. common. common. common. that does, did, or will do.
చే సే ........ చే శే ......చేసేటి..
.. చే సేటి.... చే కేటి......
VERBAL Noun .
33 common:
చేయుట....... . . . . . . ...
. చేసుట ... ...... చేయడము the doing.
NEGATIVE VERB.
INDICATIVE MOOD,
AORIST..
ar
. st
12d

....I do not, did not, or shall not do.

Singul

చేయను .....
చేయవు. Thou dost not, didst not, or wilt not do.
.

చేయఁడు......... ...... He does not, did not, or will not do.

3d
.

చేయదు . ... She or it does not, did not, or will not do.
Plural
.12st
3d d

చేయము ..... .....

We do not, did not, or shall not do.
చేయరు .................. You do not, did not, or will not do.
N.M.
.

&
F

చేయరు ....
.

They do not, did not; or will not do.

చేయవు ..
IMPERATIVE.
common

చేయకుము............. చేయకుమో ... చేయక .. do not thou

common.,

చేయకుఁడు............చేయకుఁడి . చేయకండి . do not ye,

VERBAL PARTICIPLE.

చేయక .... .......... without doing, or without having done

RELATIVE PARTICIPLE.

చేయని... ............ that. does not, did not, or will not do.
VERBAL NOUN.
చేయమి ........... ... the not doing,
 OF VERB S . 117

According to the common dialect, the syllables సి or 8 , in this conju- 350

gation, when followed by the consonant , te , are at pleasure changed into

the letter s ~ , which coalesces with the t o in it's doubled form ;; thus,

the 1st . and 2d . persons in the first form of the past tense of may

become .
1st

• I did
,2d

చేస్తిని .....
Plu

జై
:

* చేస్తివి .... ...... Thou didst .

We did .
.lst
Sing

,2d

చేస్తిమి .....
.... You did .
:

నే చేస్తిరి .....

The following , with all other verbs in యు , are conjugated under the 351
foregoing rules.

Root. Present verbal participle. Past verbal Infinitive..

participle.

అలము .... అలయుచున్ను .... అలసి ..... అలయ .... to become fatigued
[ or tired .

అవము .... అవయుచున్ను .... అవసి .... అవయ .... to become blind.
....
నవయు ....నవయుచున్ను.... నవసి నవయ ....to linger in discase

పడయు .... పడయుచున్ను .... పద సి ...పదయ .... to obtain .

పెనము.. పెన యుచున్ను .... పెనసి .... పెనయ ....to twice.

మొనయు- మొనయుచున్ను మొనసి .. మొనయ to attack in the fields .

[ of battle :

మొరయు- మొరయుచున్ను - మొరసి.. మొరయ to make a noisc , to

[ sound.
వలయు...వలయుచున్ను ... వలసివలయ ....to love, to desire.

కోము.......కోయుచున్ను ....కోసి......కోయ ....to cut ..

తీయుచున్నను ....... తీ తీయ ...... to take, to purchase ,

తీయు తీ ..........తీయ
[ to pull.

నేయము ....... నేయుచున్న ..... నేసి....... నేయ ....to weave .

పూము....పూయుచున్ను.. పూసి పూయ ... to rub , to bloom .

 118 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

Root. Present verbal part ciple. Past verbal Infinitive.

participle.

పోయు....పోయుచున్నుపోసి పోయ ..... to pour .

మేము....మేయుచున్ను ....మేసి మేమ ....to graze.

మోము మోయుచున్ను మోసి......మోయ ....to bear a burden.

......
లోము... రోయుచున్ను ... రోమ to feel disgust .
..to
ప్రేము .... శ్రేయుచున్ను .... ప్రేసి ŵX…………… to cast, to throw.
·

కలియు....కలియుచున్ను కలిసి కలియ ..... to mir .

కురియు....కురియుచున్ను . కురిసి కురియ .... to ran.

జరియు .... జడియుచున్ను .. జడిసి జడియ .... to tremble rith fear ,

[to fear.
352 Roots in of two syllables, ofwhich the first ends in a long vowel,

often shorten that vowel ; and , in this case, double the ; thus, the
•
root చేయు may become చెయ్యు , the iufinitive తీయ , తియ్య.& c. & c.

THIRD CONJUGATION IN .
353 All verbs having the root in , form the aorist and imperative, either

in the manner explained in the foregoing table, rule 308, or by changing

in the affirmative aorist into , and in the affirmative impe-

rative into . If the root has a double , the and are also doubled,
into త్తు and త్త ; thus, దీవించుదును or దీవింతును - దీవించుదము or దీవింత

ము , మెచ్చుదును or మెత్తును, మెచ్చుదము or మెత్తము.

254 In the common dialect, the terminations and , in the second

person singular of the afirmative imperative, are often dropped in this

conjugation.

355 The undermentioned verbs terminating in , likewise deviate from

the rules given in the foregoing table, ( 308 ) by forming the infinitive in 3,

instead of , and taking instead of before the terminations for the

affirmative imperative .
 OF VERBS. 119

e ....10 make a loud or clamo- Dev ...to stand

[ rous noise. evro...to call.

aw .... to weep, to lament. Leto forget.
... to bite. Bwevoto grow, to shoot ,
......only when it signifies to ...to quit, to leave.
[protect.
3
లేచు .......
..... to rise. (This verb has
Low....to suck, to eat.
also an irregular form in the 2d .
...to measure, to serve .
person of the affirmative impera-
x ....to pass, or clapse.
tive , viz . లెమ్ము rise thou , రెండు
Revro...to win.
Dow ...to walk. rise ye:)

thus, we to call, makes, in the infinitive wev , never ev , and in

the imperative పిలువుము never పిలుచుము .

The following, and a few other roots in , may at pleasure form the 356

before the ter-

infinitive either in or , and may take either or s
వు

minations of the affirmative imperative.

..to draw, to drag. åecto draw up any thing with

...to swecp. the breath, as an elephant does

water with his trunk.

www .....to strip offany thing na-

turally attached to a substance . to protect.

Ekw ....to suffer. wow....to cut, or carve stone ; to

.....to churn. separate sandfrom grain.

Bow .....to cleanse by rubbing, to 3. to bear a burden.

[ effuce. x .... to grieve.

to perforate, to cleanse
... to love.

apot or vessel, to carve wood, to blow as the wind.

New ...to thresh. Sev ...to sacrifice .

నలుచు....
Jev to squeeze, to crush.
... to 3 ......to place, or put.
 120 TELOO 00 GRAMMAR,

thus, & to sweep makes , in the infinitive or S, and in the

affirmative imperative & or ఉడ్యుము & c .

357 The only deviations from the general rules given in the table, rule 308,
ofwhich the following roots in admit, are those mentioned in the two
first rules for this conjugation (353 & 354. )

Jow ....to reckon, to think. σ ....to rub.

...to attend. అచ్చు .... to owe.

so.....to move a piece, as in a

Bow....to share, to divide.
[game of chess & c .
Doto lurk, to lie in wait secretly :
Gus .... to love, to desire.
2o ...to surpass, to go beyond.
....to claw.
Ju ...... to harrass, to torment.
...to string ( pearls &c. )
Ac ..... to scrape, to scratch .
...to dig.
...to take , to receive.
to churn.
c ...to imagine, to think.
.....to trust, to confide.
c ...to rob.
....to send, to command, to rot,
..to perform a ceremony in
··
which a string is consecrated to to prefer, to approve.

a particular deity, and then tied .... to break in pieces.

round the arm or wrist ; it is ge-
nerally performed by females . వాక్రుచ్చు to say .
éroc ...to weigh. · to increase.

358 All other roots in have the infinitive optionally either in or in 3,

and, when followed by to form the present verbal participle, by

to form certain parts of the affirmative aorist, or by the terminations
for the affirmative imperative, they may, at pleasure, convert into ;
thus, o , to bless, makes in the infinitive so or 20 , in the

present verbal participle దీవించుచున్ను or దీవింపుచున్ను ; in the aorist

దీవించుదును or దీవింపుదును , and in the imperative దీవించుము or దీవిం
పుము.
 OF VERBS. 121

The verbs ofthe class last mentioned being more numerous than any others, 359
in , one of them has been selected as an example of this conjugation .
Root .... ..... దీవించు

Present verbal participle.. దీవించుచున్ను..దీవింపుచున్ను .. దీవించుచు..

common. common.

[దీవించుతున్ను .. దీవించుతు ..blessing .

Past .............. do .దీవించి .... having blessed.
............. Dow ......
·ADOW ...... to bless .
Infinitive.....
Verbs in this conjugation do not derive any form ofthe present tense from
the participle in చుచు .
AFFIRMATIVE VERB.
INDICATIVE MOOD .
PRESENT.
Singular
.Ist
,2d

దీవించుచున్నాను........ దీవింపుచున్నాను . I bless.

.

దీవించుచున్నావు ........ దీవింపుచున్నావు . Thou blessest.

దీవించుచున్నాఁడు ....... దీవింపుచున్నాఁడు .... He blesses .

3d
.

దీవించుచున్నది .......... దీవింపుచున్నది ..... She or it blesses.

Plural
st
1.2d

దీవించుచున్నాము ...... దీవింపుచున్నాము ..... We bless .

.

దీవించుచున్నారు ........ దీవింపుచున్నారు ... You bless.

N.M.
F
&
.
PE

దీవించుచున్నాడు.... దీవింపుచున్నారు. They bles .

( * దీవించుచున్నవి ......... దీవింపుచున్నవి
common. common..
· I. Bless .
.1st
2d
Singular

జై దీవించుతున్నాను ....... దీవించుతాను .....

..... Thou blessest.
దీవించుతున్నావు ........ దీవించుతావు .
.

దీవించుతున్నాఁడు .......దీవించుతాఁడు ....... He blesses .

3d

జ్ఞ దీవించుతున్నది ........... దీవించుతున్నది

.

She or it blesses .
་་་་
* దీవించుతుంది..దీవించుతుంది ...
.Ist
,2d
.Plural

* దీవించుతున్నాము ...... దీవిం చుతాము....... We bless .

.
దీవించుతున్నారు....... దీవించుతారు . You bless .
3d

కృష్ణ దీవించుతున్నారు ....... దీవించుతారు .. They bless .

.

- దీవించుతున్నవి . ...... దీవించుతున్నవి .

(ఇ
 122 TELOOGOO GRA M M AR .

PAST .
Singular
,1. st
దీవించితిని ............... దీవించినాను........
2d
... I blessed .
దీవించితివి ...... .దీవించినావు.... ............ Thou blessedst .
.

దీవిం చెను . దీవించి నాఁడు . He blessed.

3d

( దీవించిన
or ది ..... )
&;N.
F.
.

దీవించెను .... common. .....She or it blessed .

( జీవించింది .... )
Plural
2.
let

దీవించినాము
,

దీవించితిన ... We blessed.

.

దీవించి తిరి -దీవించి సాగ You blessed .

దీవిం చిరి .దీవించి నాగు ......
3d

They blessed.
.

దీవించెను .......... దీవిం చినవి .....

FUTURE .
common.
Singular
. at
l2d

దీవించెదను దీవించేను . ..... I shall bless .

M.P.S.N.

దీవించెడవు .. దీవించేవు . .... Thou wilt blessi

.
3d
.

దీవించెడివి .... He , she, or it will bliss .

al

( దీవించేని )
Ist
Plur
.2d
N.M.SF.

దీవించేదము ...........దీవించేము......
దీవించేము......... We shall bless.
.

దీవించెదగు .......... దీవించేరు ... Yois will bless.

జీవించెదగ్గు ....... ..దీవించేరు......
Zal
.

ఉ దీవించెడినీ .... దీవించిని ............

.. They will bless ;

దీవించేసిని ....
AORIST.
ular
.1st
2d

దీవించుదును .... దీవింపుడును .... దీవింతును . I bless, blessed ,or shall

Sing

( bless .
M.F.
.

దీవించుదువు.... దీవింపుదును ....దీవిఁతువు. Thou blessest , blessedst ,

&

[ or wilt bless .
N.
3d
.

దీవించును ....... దీవించును ..... దీవించును He, she, or it blesses ,

[ blessed , or will bless .
1st
Plural
.

దీవించుదుము . దీవింపుదుము . జీవింతుము We bless ,_blessed , or

[shull bless.
.2d

దీవించుదురు .... దీవింపుడుగు .... దీవింతురు ... You bless, blessed , or

.

[ will bless .
( * దీవించుదురు ... దీవింపుడుగు .. జీవింతురు ? They bless, blessed, or
3d
.

దీవించును … .....దీవించును .... దీవించునుక [ will bless .

 OF VERBS. 123

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

దీవించుము ........దీవింపుము
..common. .......... దీవించుమా
common . bless thou,
దీవిఁపమా ........ దీవించు .దీవింపు ...

దీవించుదము ..... దీవింపుదము . దీవింతము ..

comition. common. common . let us bless .
ు
దీవించుదాము .... దీవింపుదాము::: దీవింతామ .

దీవించుఁడు ........ దీవింపుఁడు ..... దీవించుఁడి

common . common bless ye .
.దీవించండి .... .దీవిం పండి
దీవింపుఁడి ..
RELATIVE PARTICIPLE .
PRESEN T.
common.

దీవించుచున్న.... దీవింపుచున్న ....... దీవించుతున్న .......that blesses.

PAST.
దీవించ ిన ... .... that has blessed.
INDEFINITE .
common. common.

జీవించెడు ...- దీవించేది.... జీవించే... దీనింబేట్ ...that blesses ,

[ blessed , or will bless .
VERBAL NOUN.
common. common.
దీవించుట ...... ... దీవించడము ...... వింపదము..... • the blessing.
NEGATIVE VERB.
INDICATIVE MOOD .
AORIST.
Singular
lst

దీవించను.... దీవింషను...I do not, did not, or shall not bless.

.

దీవించవు .... దీవింపవు ::: Thou dost not, didst not, or will not bless .
.

దీవించఁడు..దీవింపఁడు He does not; did not, or will not bless.

Sd
.

ལ་ཕུ

దీవించదు.... దీవింపదు.... Sheor it does not ; did not , or will not bless.
Plural

దీవించము...దీవింపము. We do not, did not , dr shall not bless,

.

* దీవించరు ... దీవింపగు .... You do not, did not, or will not bliss.

వత్తి దీవించరు.... దీవిం పగు They do not, did not, or will not bless.
3d
.

నా జీవించవు దీవిం పవు .) .

 124 TELOOGOO GRAM M A R.

.IMPERATIVE MOOD.
దీవించకుము .... దీవింపకుము .. దీవించకుమా ....
common. common. bless not thou4 .
దీవింపకువి . దీవించక దీవిం పక .....
దీవించకుఁడు ....దీవింపకుఁడు . దీవించకుఁదీ......
common. bless not ye .
దీవిం పకుఁడీ ..... దీవించకండి ..
VERBAL PARTICIPLE .
దీవించక దీవింపక without blessing or without having blessed .
RELATIVE PARTICIPLE .
దీవించని ........ దీవిం పని ........that does not, did not, or will not bless ,
VERBAL NOUN.
దీవించను ...... దీవిం పమి ...... the not blessing',
SCO
In the common dialect, the syllables or , in this conjugation, when
followed bythe consonant t ) , may at option be changed into the letter
s ~ , which coalesces with the t e , in it's double form .
→. In this case,

if o precede చు or చి it is dropped ; thus, దీవించుతున్ను becomes దీవిస్తు

న్ను, and దీవించుతు - దీవిస్తు ; the two last forms of the present tense are ac-
cordingly converted into
common. common.
Singular

జై దీవిస్తున్నాను ... .... దీవిస్తాను ............ I bless.

.... Thou blessest.
.

దీవిస్తున్నావ............ దీవిస్తావు.....
* దీవిస్తున్నాఁడు .. ......... . ......………. He blesses.
. . .. . .
.
3d
.

దీవిస్తున్నది ........ ......

..దీవిస్తున్నది .. .. She , or it blesses .
.Plural

We bless.
క... దీవిస్తున్నాము ....దీవిస్తాము....

దీవిస్తున్నారు......... ... DD.............. You bless.

3d

దీవిస్తున్నారు............దీవిస్తారు..... They bless :

.

దీవిస్తున్నవి..............దీవిస్తున్నవి......
and the first and second persons in the first form ofthe past tense become.
: ing

.l21st
2d d
Plu

దీవిక్తిని ...... .... I blessed .

:
S

...• Thou blessedst.

దీవిస్తవి .
దీవిస్తిమి . .. We blessed .
జీవిస్తిరి .... ...... You blessed .
 125
OF VERBS .

361
The following, with many other verbs in , are conjugated under the

foregoing rules .
Past verbal Infinitive,
Root. Present verbal participle.
participle.
-
అప్ప గించు అప్ప గించుచున్ను & c. అప్ప గించి అప్ప గించ orంప ు to deli ver into
ప ్ ప గ ి f one's charge .
అ
న్ను
ంచుచు
చు. .ఆరగి ి d
ఆరగిం & c. ఆరగించ .... ఆర గించ.. ) to eat , applie
ఆర గింప.. only to persons
of distinction .
న్ను
ఆవులించుచు
ఆవులించు.. & c. STO చి.... SSE
OD....
ఆవులిం OW…
ఆవులిం చ ..I to yawn , to

ఆవులింప gape .

or
ఇ గిలించు.ఇగిలించుచున్ను & c. ఇగిలించి .... ఇగిలించ } to grin.
ఇగిలించ

పెల్లగించు . పెల్లగించుచున్ను & c. పెల్లగించి .. పెల్లగించుto root out, to

పెల్లం ప pluck out ,

మన్నించు .మన్నించుచున్ను& మన్నించి .... మన్నించ

or ... ?
to forgive.
మన్నింపు.. toj

రెట్టించు .. రెట్టించుచున్ను &ఁ , రెట్టించి.. రెట్టించ ...} to double .

......
రెడ్డింప

లెక్కించు. లెక్కించుచున్ను & c , లెక్కించి .. లెక్కం చ to calculate to

...
లెక్కింపు reckon

కూచు F ... కూచుగా చున్ను & c.గూచినా ..... కూచ F & c . to join ,to sew .

మాచుF “మాచుచున్ను & c.మాచినా .... మా చ F & c .. ..to change .

......
..
తీచు ....... చుగా చున్ను & c. తీచిగా తీచగా & c....... to settle , to
[decree.

చేచుగా .... చేచు F చున్ను & c , చేర్చి చేర్చ & .....tojoin , to unite .

తలఁచు .....తలఁచుచున్ను & c. తలఁచి ..... తలఁచ & c.... .... to think .
......
కాల్పు .... కాల్చు చున్ను & c. కాల్చి శాల్చ & c....... to burn ,
...
మార్చు .. ‘ మాడ్చు చున్ను మార్చి
& c.. మార్చ & c. to roast.
 126 TELOO GOO GRAMMAR.

EXCEPTIONS .
362 The following roots in are irregular in the infinitive, and in the
second person of the affirmative imperative.
Root, Infinitive. Imperative.

2d. person singular. 2d . person plural .

ఇమ్ము.... .. ఇండు
common.

ఇవ్వ ...... ఇప్పుము ........... ఇవ్వు ఁడు..... ఇవ్వండి

common. common.

ఇచ్చుto give ఇయ్య ....ఇయ్యుము . ఇయ్యి . ఇయ్యుఁడు ... ఇయ్యంది

ఈ వ .... ఈ వుము .....

ఈవుఁడు

( ఈయ ... ఈ యుము ......... ఈయుఁడు

common. common .
......... రా .... రండు రండి
వచ్చు to come.... రా ......రమ్ము common . common,
.... ....
తెచ్చు lo bring. తే....... తెమ్ము తే తెండుతెంది
common. common,
చొచ్చుto center బొచ్చు ( చొచ్చుమ్ము చొచ్చుఁడు )
(చొరుఁడు చొచ్చంది
common.

నెవ్వ ( నెవ్పము .. మెచ్చు common.

common. ..నెవ్వఁడు..)
మెచ్చు to pain మోవ
నెవ్వండి
మో .. మోవుము .. నెవ్వ మోవుఁడు ...
common. common.

చచ్చు to die చావ or చా చావుము .... చావు... చావుఁడు ..... చావండి

common . .common.
చూచు to see .... చూడ ..చూడుము . చూడు .. చూడుఁడు ....చూడండి

363 These verbs are of course also irregular in all the tenses formed from the

infinitive ; thus , the negative aorist of వ చ్చు is రాను & c . & c .

OF IRREGULAR డేశ్యము VERBS,

364 The following verbs are so irregular that they do not admit of being
classed under any particular conjugation on this account, and because
most of them are in frequent use as auxiliaries, it has been thought proper
to give them at full length .
 OF VERBS. 127

Root.... .ఉండు

Present verbal participle ఉండుచున్ను .. ఉండుచు ..ఉంచున్ను .... ఉంచు

common. common.

[ ఉంటున్ను..ఉంటు-- being .
·do........ ఉంది
Past............ం ..having beem .
Infinitive....... ఉండ ...... .....to be.

AFFIRMATIVE VERB.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT.
ular
1st

.... . I am .
,

ఉండుచున్నాను.......... ఉంచున్నాను .
Sing

ఉండుచున్నావు ... .... Thou

2d

... art.
.
.

... ఉంచున్నావు...
.... ..He is.
క ఉండుచున్నాఁడు ... ఉంచున్నాఁడు
3d
.

. She or it is.
( ప్ ఉండుచున్నది ..... .... ఉంచున్నది .......
st
.I2d
.Plural

ఉండుచున్నాము .. We are ,
.ఉంచున్నాము .
... You are.
ఉండుచున్నారు ...... ... ఉంచున్నారు ..

ఉండుచున్నారు ....... ఉంచున్నారు.......

3d

They are.
.

" ఉండుచున్నవి .
... ఉంచున్నవి
common. common , .common .
st
.12d
ular

ఉంచాను........ ఉంటున్నాను.ఉంటాను .....I am .

Thou art.
Sing

ఉంచావు.........ఉంటు న్నావు........ ఉంటావు...

.

జ ఉంచాఁడు...... ఉంటున్నాఁఁడు ...... ఉంటాఁడు ........ He is.

డు ...... ఉంటాఁడు...
3d

ది ......
.

ఉంచున్నది .... ఉంటున్నది ......... ఉంటున్నది . She or itis.

ఉంచుంది ...... ఉంటుంది . .ఉంటుంది
1st
.2d
Plural

ఉంచాము...... ఉంటున్నాము ...... ఉంటాము....... We are.

.....
ఉంటారు....... Youare ,
.

ఉంచారు...... ఉంటున్నారు .

( ఉంచారు.... -- ఉంటున్నారు .......ఉంటారు .....

3d

They are .
.

ఉంచున్నవి ...- ఉంటున్నవి . ........ ఉం టు న్నవి .....

 128 TELOOGOOGRA
M M A R.

PAST .
. gular
. st
12d
ఉండితిని .... ఉండినాను ఉంటిని ... ఉన్నాను ... I was .
Sin

ఉందితివి .... ఉంది నావు .... ఉంటివి .... ఉన్నావు .... Thou wast .

= ఉండెను .... ఉందినాఁడు .. ఉందెను .. ఉన్నాఁడు .. He was.

3d
.

ఉండెను .... ఉందిన

ఉందింది..} ఉండెనుక ఉన్నది .She or it was .
2008......).
ral
.Ist
2d

ఉందితిమి..ఉఁడి నాము. ఉంటిమి ....ఉన్నామ

ు..We were.
Plu
.

ఉందితిరి .... ఉంది నారు.... ఉంటిరి .... ఉన్నారు .... You were .

ఉండిరి ...... ఉండినారు . ఉందిరి

ఉన్నారు ?
3d

They were.
.

ఉం డెను . - ఉండిన వి .... ఉందెను .... ఉన్నవి..

. ngular

FUTURE.
common .
i ఉండెదను ......... ఉం డేను ...
......... I shall be ..
Si

M.F.SN.
.24

ఉం డెడవు ......... ఉండేవు... •Thou wilt be

3d
21st

ఉండెదిని ... or
.

ఉందీని S ... He, she or it will be.

ఉండెదము .....
.. ఉండేము
. ral

... We shall be .
Plu

ఉం డెదగు.... ... ఉండేరు ........

- You will be .
ఉండెదరు ....... ఉండేరు .......
3d

( జ్ఞ ఉం డెదరు
.

or ి
డే ఉండేది.ఉండేవ They will be .
ఉండీని
AORIST .
. gular

common .
1st
.2d

ఉండుదును ... ఉందును

......
Sin

. I am , was or shall be .
ఉండుదువు ........ ఉందువు ......
& F.

. Thou art , wast, or wilt be .

M.
.N

ఉండును .......... ఉండును ...... He , she , or it is, rwas, or will be .

.3st
12dd

ఉండుదుము .... ఉందు ము .... We are, were , or shall be .

Plur al

ఉండుదురు .... ఉందుగు .... You are , were, or will be .

.

ఉండుదురు ఉందుకు ...

ఉండుదుగు ...... ఉందుకు .
ఉండును .......... ఉండును They are , were, or will be .
...
 TATROF VERES. 129

IMPERATIVE.
.common.......
Sing

ఉండుము ....... ఉండువి .. ·

Go be thou.
:

1st
,2. d

ఉందము : ::Co..let us be.

á ఉండుదము

కై ఉండుఁడు ....... ఉంచుఁదీ .....ఉండండి ....be ye .

RELATIVE PARTICIPLES,
PRESENT.
common.
19.

ఉండుచున్న ......... ఉంచున్న .... .ఉంటున్న.. that is ,

SPAS TT.. sigibiting Judros hasta
PAS
is
...that was.
ఉందిన .... ......
INDEFINITE...
common. common.
ఉండు ..ఉండేదు .. ఉండేది ....ఉండే .... ఉం డేటి.... that is, was, or will be

VERBALNOUN
common.
" ఉండుట .... ఉంట ... Tot L .......... the being.
WOTATO
STROS I NEGATIVE VERB.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Jebrood wor AORIST.
ar

Iam not, was not, or shall not be.

.1st
2d

ఉందను
Singul

ot be.
illnnot
...Thou art not, wast not, or wilt
ఉండవు .
.

He is not, was not, or will not be,

3d
.

சேக ... •She or it is not, was not, or will not be..

151
.Plural

* ఊండము . !.. We are not , were not , or shall not be.

......
5
Yo
Y ou
uaar
ree not, were not, or will not be.
ఉండరు
2d
.

675
S ఉండరు ...
They are not , were not, or will not be.
3d
.

Iz ఉండవు .... で
IMPERATIVE .
fasmoned aroMT ... common.
:Sing

600 $ be not thou.

:Plu

2d

ఉండకుము......... ఉండకువి-
.

Good be not ye
ఉండకుఁడు .. ఉండకుఁ ......... ఉండకండి .
2d

VERBAL PARTICIPLE .
.

2400 TO 92
without being, or without having been.
ఉండక ...
 130 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR

RELATIVE PARTICIPLES.
ఉండని ......... ....... that is not, was not, or will not be,
VERBAL NOUN.
ఉండమి ...... ..... the not being ,

the fourth form of the past tense of this verb, ఉన్నాను &c , is constantly
used as the present tense, in the common dialect ,

Root .. ..ఆవు
common. common, common.
Present verbul participle ..అవుచున్ను .. ఆవుచు .... అవుతున్ను ....ఆవుతు

Tbecoming .
Past .... .........do ..........
.... .అయి .... ...
•having become.
Infinitive ........... కా .......
......to become .
AFFIRMATIVE VERB .
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT .
common.
ular
. st
Id

క్ష అవుచున్నాను ........ ఆవుచాను.

·ఆ వుబాను...... ·I become.
Sing

అవుచున్నావు .......... అవుచావు... • Thou becomest .

.

F..&.M
N

అవుచున్నాఁడు ........... ఆవుచాఁడు ....... He becomes .

3d
.

అవుచున్నది ..... ?
అవుచున్నది ........ legio & .......) She, or it becomes.
అవుచుంది .....
...
అవుచున్నాము ........ C Fw zw........ We become.
....
· ఆవుచారు . You become,
దేశ ఆవుచున్నారు .
ఆవుచున్నారు ......... - ఆవుచారు.......
PS'

They become ..
అవుచున్నవి అవుచున్నవి ...
common. commn.
ular
st
I.2d

....·
CSFD
* అవుతున్నాను ........ అవుతాను.........I
...... become.
Sing

అవుతున్నావు ... ... అవుతావు

.. . .. Thou becomest
.

అవుతున్నాఁడు . అవు తాఁడు ....... He becomes .

శే అవుతున్నది ....
అవుతున్నది...? She, or it becomes .
" అవుతుంది అవుతుంది ......
 OF VERB S. 131
. ral
1st
.2d
Plu

అవుతాము ..... We become.

అవుతున్నాము ...... అవుతాము....
అవుతారు..... You become.
అవుతున్నారు ....... అవు తారు .....

అవుతున్నారు ....... అవుతారు.

3d

క
.

They become.
అవుతున్నవి .......... అవుతున్నవి ...
..
PAST.
common.
.lst
,2d
ular

అయితిని ....... అయి నాను ........ I became .

Sing

Cavi ......... Cav

. JJ ... ... Thou becamest.
.

M.

అయ్యెను ....
N.
F.
&

...... అయినాఁడు ........ He became.

ఆయెను ..... ... అయినాఁడు....... He
3d
.

అయ్యెను అయినది ..
She , or it became :
ఆయెను.....
Gai .......... Gavow...
1, st
2d

Card D... Gav v z ........ We became.

Plural

అయితిరిఅయినారు ....... You became.

.

అయినారు ..
అయిరి ...
3d

.
ex.............. }
.

.They became.
( ఆయెను
FUTURE .
common.
Singular
.1st
,2d

అయ్యెదను - అయ్యేను ...I shall become.

అయ్యెడవు ......అయ్యేవు ..... Thou wilt become.
.

M.P.

....
N.&
.3d

or He , she , or it will become.

..య ా.
. ........
అ . ....అయ్
# అయ్యెదము.... ఆయ్యేము We shall become.
Plural

.......... You will become,

అయ్యెదగు ..........ఆయ్యేగు
.

N.
M.
.F
&

రక్ష అయ్యెదరు ........... ఆయ్యేరు .....

3d

They will become.

.

or
( అయ్యో ........ అయ్యే ..
అయ్యీని ........
. gular

AORIST,
Sin

అవుడును . I become, became, or shall become.

st
le.3d
d

అవుదువు ...........
..... Thou becomest , becamest, or wilt become.

He, she , or it becomes, became, or will become.

{ నవు .......e, she , or it becomes , beeame, or :
 132 TE LOO GOO GRAMMAR.

2st
d
.1.3d
తవుడుము . We become, became, or shall become.
Plural
¤s✩*……………………
.. You become, became, or will become.

N.M.S
.

అవుదురు ..
They become, became, or will become.
అవును .....
ral

IMPERATIVE .
: ing

common.
Plu

2d
S

ཌུ 88༨
కమ్మ༽།... అగుము.......... కా ..become thou ,*
.

common.
...
జై అవుదము ఆవుదాము . let us become
2d

షే కండు ..... -కండి . "become ye.

.

RELATIVE PARTICIPLES.
L PRESENT.
common.
....
అవుచున్న ·that becomes.
అవుతున్న
PAST.
అయిన ....... that became.
INDEFINITE.
"common.

అవు ....అమ్యెడు....అయ్యెso
ది ...అయ్యే....అయ్యే ..that becomes, bea
[ came, or will become,
VERBAL NOUN.
common. common:

అవుట........ - కావడము ...... the becoming.

· Ls
NEGATIVE VERB..
こ INDICATIVE MOOD,
AORIST.
Ist
.2d
Plural

I do not, did not, or shall not become.

Thou dost not , didst not, or wilt not become.

.

M.

TC ..........He does not, did not, or will not become.

N
&
3d
.

కాదు
$ 6 ......
. She, or it, does not, didnot, or will not become.
Singular
st
1.2d

కాము...... We do not, did not, or shall not become.

.

5 ........... You do not, did not, or will not become.

........
N.M.
3d
.

They do not, did not, or will not become.

&

లేవు..
 OF VERBS. 133

IMPERATIVE MOOD.
: ing
Plu

common.
S

2.2d

...... become not thou .

d

కాకుము .......... కాకుమా . ......కాక

కాకుఁడు .......... కాకుఁడీ ............

C కాకండి ...... become not ye.
VERBAL PARTICIPLE.

.... without becoming or without having become.

RELATIVE PARTICIPLE.

కాని .... ..... that does not , did not, or will not become .
VERBAL NOUN .

కామి .......... - the not becoming .

Root .... ....పోవు

Present verbal participle . పోవుచున్ను ....పోవుచు ....పోచున్ను..పోచు

common . common.

( పోతున్ను..పోతు-- going .
Past.......... do .... పోయి ........ ... having gone .
Infinitive................ ..పో ......పోవ........ ........to go.
AFFIRMATIVE VERB .
INDICATIVE MOOD.
-PRES FNT.
1st
.Singular

.I go .
,

పోవుచున్నాను............పోచున్నాను......
2d

పోవుచున్నావు ...... Thou goest.

.

-పోచున్నావు ...
&.
F.
N

పోవుచున్నాఁడు.......... పోచున్నాఁడు . He goes .

.M
3d
.

పోవుచున్నది .---- .. ..పోచున్నది ..... ... She , or it goes .

Ist
.

పోవుచున్నాము..... పోచున్నాము .......... We go .

Plur al
2d

You go.
.

పోవుచున్నారు ............పోచున్నారు........
.

...
SS పోవుచున్నారు ..... “ పోచున్నారు
3d

They go.
,

డి పోవుచున్నవి............. చున్నవి ...

 134 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

common. common. common.

ar
st
1.2d
పోచాను ........ పోతున్నాను ..
Singul

పోతున్నాను .....పోతాను ..... 1 go .

పోచావు....... పోతున్నావు
M..N.

పోతావు...... Thou goest.

.

శ పోచాఁడు ...... పోతున్నాఁడు ...... పోతాఁడు .... He goes.

F
3d
.

పోచున్నది.....పోతున్నది..... పోతున్నది ?R She or it goes .

పోచుంది ......-- పోతుంది పోతుంది )
, st
1.2d
Plural

పోచాము ...... పోతున్నాము ........పోతాము ...We go.

......
.

N.M.

పోచారు ......... పోతున్నారు పోతారు .... You go.

F
.&
3d

పోతున్నారు .......పోతారు .. ? They go .

పోచారు.......పోతు
.

......
పోచున్నవి .....పోతున్నవి పోతున్న వి )
ular

PAST.
2.
Ast

పోతిని ..... పోయితివి ........పోయినాను ...... I went .

Sing

పోలిపిపోయితివి పోయినావు ...... Thou wentest.

.

పోయెను ....... .పోయినాఁడు .... He went .

3d
.

పోయినది...
పోయెను .... common. She, or it went .
పోయింది .....
. ral
1st
.2d

పోతిమి ........ పోయితిమి -పోయినాము

పోయినా ము ..... We went .
.
Plu

పోతిరి .........పోయితిరిపోయినారు ...... You went.

పోయిరి..
3d
.

పోయెను ............ ........పోయినా ......} They went ,

. gular

FUTURE.
common.
Sin
2st
d

• I shall go .
.13d

పోయెదను ...
పొయ్యేను .
Thou wilt go .
పోయెడవు ........ -పొయ్యేవు ..
M.F.
N
&

పోయెడిని ...
.

or
పొయ్యేవి .....
} He , she, or it will go .
పొయ్యీని
I. st
. ral
2d

పోయెదము . .... We shall go .

..పొయ్యేము .....
Plu

పోయెదరు .......... You will go..

పొయ్యేరు ...... go ....
N.M.

పోయెదరు .......
F& .

..పొయ్యేరు
3d
.

( పొయ్య They will go .

పోయెడిని. or ేని ...
పొయ్యీని ....
 OF VERBS. 135
ular

AORIST .
Sing
.. st
1232d d

పోదును ..... పోవుదును .... I go , went , or shall go .

.

FHWH.... Thou goest , wentest, or wilt go .

& .

FLF
M.F
.N

FD He , she, or it goes , went , or will go .

F FI........
Plural

పోదుము ...... పోవుదుము . We go , went, or shall go .

am12
..... You go, went, or will go.to
పోదురు ...... పోవుదురు ...
.

ul
శ్రీ పోదురు ......పోవుదురు .. )
3d

They go, went, or will go .

.

పోను ...........పోవును ......

IMPERATIVE MOOD..
to gniog tortur common.
og anion tool
Sing

ు
పొమ్మ .... పోవు ము .... పొమ్ మీ......పోవుమీ ... పో .... go thou .
:

.........let us go.
కే . పోదము ....పోవుదముపోదాము
common.
Plu

2d
:

పొండు. .... పొండీ ......

grపోవుండు పోవుండీ ... పొండి ...go ye s
.

og or sn
RELATIVE PARTICIPLES.
MOHAIRSE TIMOSKY TO CO TO
PRESENT.

పోవుచున్న ...............పోచున్న పోతున్న .........that goes .

guiǝd modenɔ yd bonolone PAST.basis end did to
20 980 od vina
onipaalad. plus.......that went.
ats
పోయ avJ .... ............
ిన......
dai : 09 10 drop INDEFINITE IS 900088 80197 doua oogoolsT
common. common.
wi917210 102
పోవు..పోయెడు..పోయెడి
yue to ca ll పొయ్యే-
t
peso 101s odi పొయ్యేటి
ofo ngu that
ino s goes
. , went, or
and to c willogo .
VERBAL NOUN,
d lliw si olur nouse eidt di noleg commonal out to d197 19dto

పోవుట .......... పోవడము .... go పొయ్యేది ...the going u

NEGATIVE VERB.By Bas
876 0919ib av INDICATIVE MOOD . batgobs ons oor insens
Singular

ve
ONA HANGAORIST.l funnet goignado yd dál
i nuon
ist
.2d

....Ido not, did not, or shall not go slani 10?

Buy ....
పోవు ..... ... పోవ ..Thou dost not, didst not, or wilt not ,
...
..వు
.

go as
1=పోడు
d ......... He does not, did not, or will not go.
....
TC
..........She or it does not, did not, or will not go, 196
 136 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR .

1st
.2d
As L .....to
పోము £ 500 ........
......పోవము . We do not, did not, or shall not go.
Plur al

mo .......
... - 28. You do not, did not, or will not go.
.

పోరు..... పోవరు
పోవరు ..2
3d

They do not, did not, or will not go.

.

Fo పోవవు ... S
......FsLG..
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
:Sing

common.
Plu

తే పోకుము .·పోవకుము..పోకుమి -పోవకుమీ పోక go not thou.

2d

పోకుఁడు..పోవకుఁడు . పోకుఁడీ ..-ఫోవకుఁడీ . పోకండి . go not ye .

.

VERBAL PARTICIPLE.

పోక ......పోవక .......

. ............ without going, or without having gone.
RELATIVE PARTICIPLES.

పోని ......పోవని ..... ....... that does not, did not, or will not go.
VERBAL NOUN.
సోమి ..... ....the not going.
1
OF SHLLNCY OR VERBS OF SANSCRit derivation.

365 All Sanscrit verbs cannot, at pleasure, be adopted into Teloogoo; those

only the use of which has already been sanctioned by custom being

considered as properly belonging to the language. When admitted into

Teloogoo, such verbs assume either the termination oor ge ; in the

former case, they are conjugated like 50 and other regular so

verbs in of the 3d . conjugation ; in the latter case, like , or any

other verb of the Ist, conjugation . With this general rule, it will be

sufficient to shew howthe Teloogoo root is formed from the Sanscrit root.

366 Sanscrit roots are adopted into Teloogoo in five different ways.

1st. by changing the final syllble ofthe Sanscrit verbal noun into 90 ;
for instance, the Sanscrit root to protect, makes it's verbal noun in
Sanscrit , this by changing the final syllable into 90 makes the
Teloogoo root o , which is conjugated precisely in the same man-
neras దీవించు .
 OF VERBS. 137

A few other examples are subjoined. 367

Sanscrit root. Sanscrit verbal noun. Teloogoo root.

ను ............ నుతి .... నుతించు to praise.

వై..........ధ్యాన.........
ధ్యాన ధ్యానించు...... to contemplate , to meditate.
ధ్యానించు.......

... ...
9 - స్తుతించు ..... to praise .

క్రుధ్ శ్రీనక్ర
.క్రోధి
ోధిం ......
ంచుచు .. ...
to be angry.
....
కుప్ . కోప కోపించు
కోపించు .......

x .......................... xDow ... to pass , to go.

కప్ .50
కంప ... 0wo
కంపించు......
rto tremble, to shake &c.

స్తభ .......... స్తంభ ...... స్తంభించు to stand without motion.

2dly, by changing final or of Sanscrit roots into work, final

vor , into — Dow, and final or Jo into ~ do .

2.... జయిws
.......... wo ంచు...
...... ... to conquer .

ců ..... .... కుయించు...

..cravou ...... to be exhausted .

ద్రవించు. ... …to

to damp.
ద్రు .

భరించు .... to bear.

భృ ....
హరించు .... ......
...to take.
హృ ....

Abo …………… to think, to reflect.

.... స్మరించు ...
ధర
480ించు .... ……………………… to bear.
ధృ ...
8 ..........
..వరించు
.... ...... .........to select.
వృ ......
3dly, by affixing co to the Sanscrit root ; thus,
ganscrit Root, Teloogoo Root,

త్యజించు.... ..........to renounce, to quit.

z .............. ......నశించు
800 .........
........ ....... to be destroyed.
 138 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR,

Sanscrit Root. Teloogoo Root.

శప్ ... శబంచు .... to curse

త ప్ ................. తపించు..
to perform penance .

..... to sound .
-శబ్దించు .........
35 · భ్రమించు ....... ........... to be confused.

భజ్....... ..భజించు ...... to praise, or meditate onGod.

రచ్ ................రచించు . to compose.

............ Dow .......

లిఖించు ....... to write.

నట్ ......... ... నటించు ..... ..to dance.

27
37

Xε ........ ..X & Co. to calculate.

૪૩

వస్ ..... ..... Lac wo...... … to dwell.

4thly, by changing the final syllable of crude Sanscrit substantives or

adjectives into ow ; thus,

Sanscrit nouns. Teloogoo Root.

F ....obstinatec ...to insist obstinately,

…
.మూర్ఖం

So ... independent.... cc .to make one self independent.

......viciniły …·
·vicinity ........ 2 wow to approach.

.......·Ican..
శుష్క .. ....
..to become lean ,
·way cw ……

........ ...
XES.... pride ………………………. Xoso to be proud ,

FOTO ....ornam ent..

...ornament...... శృంగారించు to adorn.
to adorn.
 OF VERBS. 139

5thly, a fewneuter verbs areformed by adding to certain Sanscrit words

the affix , sometimes also converted into o .
Sanscrit Root, Teloogoo Root.
ఖ ē ..... భేదిల్లు .... ..... to be afflicted.

శుభ్ ....... 2ev to shine.

D .....
·Wodey or accou to reflect, to study,

PASSIVE VERBS.
Neuter verbs, from their nature, do not admit of a passive significa- 368
tion ; but all active verbs in Teloogoo, of whatever description , may be
come passive, by adding to the infinitive the different tenses of the verb
tofall, meaning in composition, to suffer.

The verb which is made passive continues invariably in the infinitive, 369
the auxiliary only being conjugated through all its persons , numbers,

and tenses . The infinitive being a ( ద్రుత ప్రకృతిక ,the ప of పడు isgenerally
changed, in composition, into es ; and in the superior dialect c is placed
before that letter.

The following is an example of a passive verb. 370

Root ....
కొట్టఁబడు
common.
Present verbal participle కొట్టఁబడుచున్ను .. కొట్టఁబడుచు . కొట్టబడుతు
common.

( న్ను..కొట్టబడుతు...- lbeing beaten .

Past do .......
కొట్టఁబడి...
&cold . having been beaten.

Infinitive -కొట్టఁబడ . to be beaten.

AFFIRMATIVE VERB.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT.
ar
.,1st
2d
Singul

కొట్టఁబడుచున్నాను ....కొట్టబడుచాను....I am beaten.

కొట్టఁబడుచున్నావు కొట్టబడుచావు .
.

Thou art beaten,

&.
.F.
N

కొట్టఁబడుచున్నాఁడు..కొట్టబడుచాడు.... He is beaten .
M
3d
.

కొట్టఁబడుచున్నది... కొట్టబడుచున్నది . She, or it is beaten .

కొట్టబడుచుంది ..5
 140 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

181
. ural
కొట్టఁబడుచున్నాము ..కొట్టబడుచాము.. We are beaten
,

.2d
Pl
కొట్టఁబడుచున్నారు . కొట్టబడుచారు .... You are beaten .
కొట్టఁబడుచున్నారు
(శ .....కొట్టబడుచారు .. ) They are beaten .
.31

కొట్టఁబడుచున్నవి...... కొట్టబడుచున్నవి
)
common .
common .
sth
, ngular
.I2d

కొట్టబడుతున్నాను ......కొట్టబడు తారు.....I am beaten ,

Si

కొట్టబడురు న్నావు ..... కొట్టబడుతావు . · Thou art beaten .

M.

కొట్టబడుతున్నాడు .......కొట్టబడుతాడు .... He is beaten .

3d
&.
F.
.
N

కొట్టబడుతున్నది
ట్టబడుతున్నది.. ? She , or it is beaten
2
ట్టబడుతుంది ........ కొట్టబడుతుంది ... )
1st
. ural
.

ట్టబడుతున్నాము ....కొట్టబడుతాము . We are beaten ,

Pl
.24

కొట్టబడుతు న్నారు .... కొట డుతా

తారు
కొట ్టబడుతున్నారు .... ...కొ
.... ట్్టబ
టబడు రు .... You are beaten .

ట్టబడుతున్నారు .......కొట్టబడుతారు.. )
.3d

ట్టబడు తారు . They are beaten ,

కొట్టబడుతున్నవి ..... కొట్టబడుతున్నవి )

PAST .
at
. ngular
l.ad

కొట్టఁబడితిని కొట్టఁబడినాను కొట్టఁబడ్డాను ... Iw

.... as beaten .
Si

కొట్టఁబడితివి..కొట్టఁ
బడినావు..కొట్టఁబడ్డావు .... Thou wast beaten,

కొట్టఁబడెను .కొట్టఁబడినాఁడుకొట్టఁబడ్డాఁడు . He was beaten .

3d
.

కొట్టఁcom
బడిmon
నది. ..
కొట్టఁబడెను గుబ్బ } కొట్టఁబడ్డది..She, or it wasbeaten.
ట్టబడింది ....
1st
. ural
.

కొట్టఁబడితిమి కొట్టఁబడినాము.
కొట్టఁబడ్డాము .. We were beaten
Pl
gd
.

కొట్టఁబడితిరి ...కొట్టఁబడినారు .కొట్టఁబడ్డారు .... You were beaten,

.3d

కొట్టఁబడిరి ....కొట్టఁబడినారు ..
కొట్టఁబడ్డారు)
They were beaten .
" 22 కొట్టఁబడెను . కొట్టఁబదినవి ...కొట్టఁబడ్డవి . )
 141
OF VERB S.

FUTURE.
common.
.Singular
24.

కొట్టఁబ డెదను ......కొట్టబ

Ist

డేను ..... I shall be beaten .

.
M.F.SN.

.... కొట్టబ దేవు ....... Thou wilt be beaten ,

కొట్టఁబ డెడవు ..

en
కొట్టఁబ చెడిని...... కొట్టబ డేని..... He, she, or it will be beat .
3d

కొట్టబ దేని } He , she , or

.

ని
కొట్టబడి .....
Ist

కొట్టఁబ దెదము .....కొట్టబ డేము . - We shall be beaten .

.2d

క్ష.
Plural

కొట్టఁబ డెదరు .........కొట్టబ డేరు ..... You will be beaten ,

AFA
....
.

కొట్టఁబడెదరు కొట్టబడేరు ..
3d

జ కొట్టఁబ డెదిని...... కొట్టట డేని.... They will be beaten .

.

పెట్టబడిని ..... )
AORIST.
టఁబడు ుదును .... am ..
కొట్ట ను .. m.....
కొట్ ఁబడ . .ు....... I am , uas, or shall be beaten .
బ డ ు ద ు వJon anor fon etro 92
కొట్టఁ
M.F.SN.

లై Thou art , wast , or wilt be beaten .

ును .... ram
కొట్టఁబడ .......... d·a
He , she , or it is, was, or will be beaten .
d.-
, st
312d

“ We are, were, or shall be beaten .

కొట్టఁబడుదుము
Plural

.... You are, were, or will be beaten .

కొట్టఁబడుదురు .........
.

క్షీ కొట్టఁబడుదురు .....crow at They are, were, or will be beaten,

Sd
,

శేస్ట్ కొట్టఁబడును .........

ainedsoil forad & CIMPERATIVE MOOD.css och
common.
ఎలను .. కటఁబడు మీ ....కొట్టబడు... .... be
.... thouu bea
be tho beatten .
కొట్టఁబడుము ....కొట్టఁబడుమీ . కొట్టబడు
కొట్టఁబడుదము.......... కొట్టబడుదాము ..... let us be beaten .

కొట్టఁబడుఁడు ....కొట్టఁబడుఁ ....... కొట్టబడండి ....... · be ye beaten .

to
asinod od son or To RELATIVE PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT .
common.
కొట్టఁబడుచున్న............ కొట్టబడుతున్న ....... ....that is beaten .
 142 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR .

PAST.

కొట్టఁబడిన .. కొట్టఁబడ్డ -that was beaten .

·
INDEFINITE .

కొట్టఁ రెడు.కొట్టఁబ రెడ్డి ?

కొట్టఁబడు commబon. common. s .. that is, was , or will be beaten .
ట్టలు కొట్టబడేటి.
VERBAL NOUN .
common.
కొట్టఁబడుట ..
కొట్టబడడము.................the being beaten .
NEGATIVE VERB.
INDICATIVE MOOD.

ACRIST .
Singular
I. st
2d

కొట్టఁబడను ..... · I am not , was not, or shall not be beaten .

కొట్టఁబడవు .....
.

... Thou art not, wast not, or wilt not be beaten.

( కొట్టఁబడఁడు ....... He is not, was not , or will not be beaten.

3d
.

కొట్టఁబడదు ........She or it, is not, was not , or willnot be beaten.

1st
.

కొట్టఁబడము ....... We are not, were not, or will not be beaten .

. ral
Plu

కొట్టఁబడరు ........ You are not, were not , or will not be beaten .
N.M
F N.M
F,&
.&
. .

Ë కొట్టఁబడరు ..
3d

They are not , were not, or will not be beaten .

.

...
కొట్టఁబడవు

IMPERATIVE MOOD.
common:

కొట్టఁ బడకుము ....కొట్టఁబదకుమీ ....

కొట్టఁబడక ...... be not thou beaten ,

కొట్టఁబడకుఁడు ....కొట్టఁబడకుఁడీ....కొట్టఁబడళంది. be not ye beaten .

VERBAL PARTICIPLE.
కొట్టఁబడక ......... without being , or without having been, beaten ;
RELATIVE PARTICIPLE .

.................that is not, was not , or will not be beaten !

కొట్టఁబడని .......
VERBAL NOUN.

కొట్టఁబడమి .................. the not being beaten .

.....the
 OF VERBS. 143

OF CAUSAL VERBS.

All verbs in Teloogoo admit of being converted into causals. It is 371

however to be observed that neuter verbs , in this language, when they
assume the causal form, become in fact active verbs : the Teloogoo root
to rise is a neuter verb, to cause to rise is it's causal, which
corresponds precisely with the English active verb to raise .

Except verbs in of the 3d conjugation , and a few others hereafter 372

noticed , all roots, by changing the final into o , convert active
verbs into causals, and neuter verbs into actives ; thus,

wyś …………….to salute makes ………………

.. (3 ) }_ ow
…….. to cause to salute.

to vomit ... do 8 or .... to cause to vomit.

$ xy
DOX .... to bubble.... do ... Do noto cause to bubble.

Dok ........to swallow..do .......... No now

now ..………… to
to cause to swallow.

.......to be raised do ... 20 ......to heighten.

Te ....... to flame up do .........

రాజు ..... 20s ...... to enflame.

Coco ..... to cause to touch.

eod .....to touch .... do

………………..to sting …….. dv . 3o ...... to cause to sting.

మెట్టు .......
Lot
పండు .... o ripen ..... do LoDow to cause to ripen.

20%
Lo ... to burn v.n.do ...
to woDow
BoD ow ........ to burn v. a.

I ..............to raise up do ……………… I How to cause to raise.

విత్తు ...... •••• to sow ••••••·do. Dow ... to cause to sow.

obca ........to swim………..do ……………….... Sichow ...... to cause to swim.

దున్ను...... ..to plaugh v . n . as ap- to plough v . a. as

[ plied to oxen &c. [applied to men ,

........... to cover do joto cause to cover.

*200 ··to swell. ··do ………………………. to cause to swell.

~ Lv...........to sell. …….. do …………………… D¸to cause to sell.

v .......... to make .. do .......... ovo ....... to cause to make.

 144 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

Loo...... to shut.makes
మూయు ......to avoto cause to shut.

........ to cut ….............. do.. § avow .....to cause to cut.

X ………………
..to write .... do Javc - to cause to write .

So .......
వేయు to throw, or put - do. Savo to cause to throw, or put.

.......... to weave .......... do .. avows...... to cause to weave.

S ...
ow pour·····
to pour ... do..avow - to cause to pour.
.
ఎగురు ........ ....do .. 780 .... to cause tofly.
.to fly ....

అల్లు ………… …………… · to plait ………… ...do

do cow
coro. ....…… to cause to plait .
·
మళ్లు . to return ……………………… do ……………..to
to cause to return,

తొవ్వ .... ....to dig .....

do.. sows.... to cause to dig.
EXCEPTION.

....to burst v. n. applied to soft or to burst v. a.

[ substances such as fruit &c.
SCK ....to boil v. n. 5.co.......
కాఁచు .. . to boil v . a,

CK .....to conceal one's self, to ab- c ... to hide v. a.

[ scond v. n.
éc ....lo be weighed ……….. doc ...to weigh.

so ...... to fall, to sink, to be hum- ∞ow ……

.............. to cause tofall, or
[ bled. [sink, to humble.
Loks ..... to bend y . n .. …………… .. do Low .... ..to bend v. a.

& cs ....to be rocked (as a child in c .............. to rock,

a cradle)
Lo
మణ c³
ఁగ ు to be folded
or .......... do -మణఁచు..మడఁచు to fold :
మడఁగు ..

Dα ....to be broken
....to ....... ..... to break,
w ...
dous

ack ......to befryed do or Savowto fry.

c .... to sound v. n.......... do.. ceravow to sound v. a.
2002UCKO
or
NECK to be drowned, to sink .. ..………..to drown, to sink ▼. a.
or
ముడుఁగు
 OF VERBS, 145

XXJ..... 10 grow ........... makes oto cause to grow, to nourish .

సాఁగు ...... to be stretcheddy ( సాఁచు .... సాఁపు ) ....⚫to stretch.

( చాఁచు ..చాపు
to pass, to go ; added
to the infinitive of a-
Dock •Joc2020........to cause to pass &c.
nother verb, it signi-
es to continue ………….doj
Loxto be beaten in a mortar do..Low or O to beat in a mortar.
Jeux ....to be crushed .do Jevor Jevto crush.

చినుఁడు ..
or to be torn ……………. ...... doow or Do … ..to tear.
DXcx
JIC ....to be broken ....... do..vooro …..to break.
Exto be broken or cut - door or Toto break,to cut.

& x-
& x- ·to descend .. ... do or … to put or pull down.
దిగు దించు... దింపు

మెదుగు .. { to bebeatenin a mortar, 3 వెదుపు ...... to beat, to inure .

(to be inured ..........
…..doS
Lev ... ... to extinguish.
……………
Levx ....to be extinguished do Les
Locks... to be habituated .... do ... .... to habituate.

to drink do త్రావు
5c .. to cause to drink.

tok .....to cease … ..….. do stone

twz.. to cause to cease.

eto creep, to slide, topassdoe - 28 noto cause to creep,

[slide, or pass.
DK .......to wander ...... ·do... ) .......• to turn.
to be buried ……… ... door
పూడుచు to bury.
tofade ... …………..do Tow ........... to cause to fade,
L ………… ...……………. to roast .
..to be roasted ……………..do .. Lowo …
....
to fall ……………………….. ....do.att ... to spread.
to become bad ...do.. Woo. We...to corrupt.
........to be disunited…….. ···do … D ....to leave.

Do ... to be filled ... do .. Dori- cz- 2cbox to fill.

.....to be heated, to ceasc door to heat &c.
№
°Ñ …………..to be soaked door .. to soak, to steep.
 146 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

... to eat.... ··makes Dow ..... •••*•··to cause to eat.

........ to say ………………… .. doe అనిప ించు.......

Dwow to cause to say.
DDI to hear ............ ·do.. Dero
వినుచుఁ వినిపించు to
to cause to hear.
ళను ..... to see, to produce, to bring to shew, or to deliver in
forth..do..S child birth.
voto
to awakev . n.......... do .. Less ... to awake. v . a,

..... to grazedo · 2 to feed cattle.

6 to be tarnished do . LJ..... ...to tarnish.

2:a to be afraid……… ... do ….eavor to frighten .

Wow....to rain . . . .. . ... .. .. do …. sua & c or Kdavo
to cause to
[rain.
3wv..to shine ........... do . 3 wwow ... to
wwow……………… to cause toshine.
to leak do.... to cuuse to leak.
$ .........to arrive . ............ do ......to cause to arrive

Sexs ……………..to be extinguished- do - Ceo or ex.to extinguish .

Nto change v . n . …………..do.. rex wore to change v. a.
TW ... to burn v . n. ...... do .. 5 evro ... ……… to burn v. a.
35°05………………to
355 to fall down ………..... do..sev vito cause to fall
[ down .
to drop down …………..do .. Teror Texto cause to drop
[down.
.... fl
es
తేల ు .........to oat ... ......... vux.or éé o to cause to float,

to move, to shake v . n. .... do ševutors Leo tomovesc . v . a.

పంపు to send
పోవు.......to go ....... ..do
పంపించు- అంబంచు )
373
neuter verbs in cey become active by changing into
cow ; thus caes to be pleased makes c20 to please ; he to
be afflicted makes how to aflict.

374 Roots in ofthe third conjugation by changing into & o , and

wy into you , convert actives into causals ,and neuter into active verbs
thus,
woo ....to cull .............. makes word……………toto send for.
తెలుచు ... to open •• .... do.. Te vows.....to cause to open,
 OF VERBS. 147

దీవించు...to bless .... .... mulkes దీవిం పించు ....... to cause to bless .

ఇచ్చ .... to give..... ... do .. ఇప్పించు ..........to cuuse to give .

తెచ్చు .... to bring do .. తెప్పించు ....... to cause to bring
EXCEPTIONS .
లేచు ...... to rise .... ..makes లేపు ........ •to raise.
నిలుచు ... to stand . ............ do …. Der
నిలుI ...
వు... to stop .
మోచు ... to bear a burden ....... do .. మోపు ... .......to load .
wows...10 sce ...
.. do .. చూపు చూపించు to shero .
వచ్చ ::··· to come ............ - do .రబ్పంచు . రావించు to causeto come.
ఎచ్చు .....to increase....... do ఎచ్చించు ....to cause to increase.
చచ్చు : ....to di .... ... ఎం ..చంపు ... to kill .
The following is an example of a causal verb . 375
Root ........ .కొట్టించు

Present verbal participle

కొట్టించుచు కొట్టింపుచున్నుకొట్టించుచు
common. న్ను or common.

[కొట్టించుతున్ను ..కొట్టించును .causing to beat,

Past ...... పట్టించి ...... having caused to beat ·
Infinitive............ కొట్టించు or కొట్టింప ...... to cause to beat.
Causal verbs do not derive any form of the present tense from the parti-
ciple in చు చు .
AFFIRLATIVE VERBA
INDICATIVE MOOD .
PRESENT.
Singular
l. st
2d

కొట్టించుచున్నాను....కొట్టిఁపుచున్నాను.. Icause to beat. +

.

కొట్టించుచున్నావు .....కొద్దింపుచున్నావు . Thou causest to beat.

Sd

కొట్టించుచున్నాఁడు ....కొట్టింపుచున్నాఁడు . He causes to beat,

.

(ష్కొట్టించుచున్నది....... కొట్టింపుచున్నది . She , or itcauses to beat,

Plural

1 . కొట్టించుచున్నాము ....కొట్టింపుచున్నాము . We cause to beat,

ట్టించుచున్నారు ..... కొట్టింపుచున్నారు ... You cause to beat,

కొట్టించు
ని చున్నారు..... కొఁపుచున్నారు.
3d

They cause to beat .

.

కొంచుచున్నవి . కొట్టింపుచున్నవి )
 148 TELOOGOO GRAM M A R.

common.
. gular common .
1.£dst
... కొట్టించుతాను...I cause to beat .
ను...
కొట్టించుతున్నాను
Sin

ట్టించుతున్నావు. కొట్టించుతావు.... Thou cuusest to beat.

M.

కొట్టించుతున్నాడు ....
కొట్టించు
తాడు ... He causes to beat.
3d
.

ట్టించుతున్నది.కొట్టించర
ున్నది ?
or She, or it causes to beat,
ప్రకాశక్షి
ించుతు
ంచుతంది
ుంది. కొట్టించుతుంది ..
1st
al
.
Plur

కొట్టించుకున్నాము .. కొట్టించుతాము .. We cause to beat.

2d
.
.

కొట్టించుతున్నారు ... కొట్టించుతార.... You cause to beat,

క్ష కొట్టించుతున్నారు ....

3d

కొట్టించుతారు .. ?
.

They cause to beat.

కొట్టించుకున్నవి .... కొట్టించుకున్నవి
)

PAST.
ar
st
Singul
1.2d

కొట్టించితిని ...... ' ట్టించి నాను .... I caused to beat,

.

కొట్టించితివి ..... " ట్టించినావు..... Thou causedst to beat ,

M.
N.
&

శిక్షించెను ... · కొట్టించినాఁడు .. He caused to beat.

'PS

కొట్టించినది .
common.
కొంచెను She or it caused to beat.
కొట్టించింది ..
Plural
21. st
3d d

కొట్టించితిమి ...కొట్టించినాము .. We caused to beat ,

.

కొట్టించితిరి . ...కొట్టించినారు..... You caused to beat.

కొట్టించిరి .......
కొట్టిం
చినారు. .... }They
They caused to beat.
కొట్టించెను .......
కొట్టించినవి......
;
FUTURE .
ar

common.
Singul
. st
l2d

కొట్టించెదను ............కొట్టిఁచేను .... I shall cause to beat ,

.

కొత్తించెడవు ...... ..కొట్టిఁకేవు .....Thou will case to beat,

& .
M.F
.N

కొట్టిం చెదిని .... కొట్టించేవి... ?

He, she, or it, will cause to
కొట్టించి,ని ... ) [ beat .
 1st OF VERBS. 149

3000.00
.2d

కొట్టించెదము .కొట్టించేము .. We shall cause to beat ,

Plural

కొట్టించెదరు .......కొట్టించేరు .... You will cause to beat ,

.

కట్టించెదరు ......... చేరు.7

3d
.

ంచేవి.. They will cause to beat .

కొట్టించెది ......
౦ దీని ...)
Singular

AORIST .
1st
.

· కొట్టిఁపుదును ..
కొట్టించుదును ...కొట్టిఁపుదును కకొట్టింతును
... .. I cause, caused,
ొట్టింపును ..
.

[ or shall cause to beit .

2d
.

కొట్టించుదువు .. కొట్టింపుదువు కొట్టింతువు . Thou causest,

'Ps

[ causedst, or wilt cause to beat.

కొట్టించును.......కొట్టించును ....
కొట్టించును .. He,she , or it caus-
[ cs, caused , or will cause to beat .
Plural

ణ్ణి - కొట్టించుదుము..కొట్టింపుదుము.కొట్టియుము. We cause , caused ,

[or shall cause to beat .
2d
.
.

కొట్టించుదురు ....కొట్టింపుదురు ...కొట్టింతురు.... You cause, cāus-

[ ed , or will cause to bert .
కొట్టించుదురు....కొట్టింపుదురు ...కొట్టింతురు.. ) They cause, caus-
ట్టింపుదురు ...కొట్టింతురు .. )
3d

ed, or will cause

.

కొట్టించును ......కొట్టించును ... కొట్టించును ) to beat.

IMPERATIVE MOOD .
ular

ట్టించుము.... కొట్టింపుము ...కొట్టించుమీ

common.
Sing

common. cause thou to beat.

2d
.
.

కొట్టింపుమా .....కొట్టించు ..... కొట్టిఁపు .... )

కొట్టించుదము..కొట్టిం పుదము కొట్టింతము )

common. -common. common. let us cause tobeat.
Plural

' ట్టించుదాముకొట్టింపుదాముకొట్టింతాము )
.

కొట్టించుఁడు ....కొట్టింపుఁడు.....కొట్టించుఁదీ
common. common. cause ye to beat.
2d
.

(కొట్టిఁపుఁ .....కొట్టించంది ... కొట్టింపండి.... )

RELATIVE PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT .
common.

కొట్టింపుచున్న ....కొట్టించుతున్న . that causes to beat ,

కొట్టించుచున్న ....
PAST.
• that caused to beat .
కొట్టించిన ........
 150 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

INDEFINITE.
common. commoni

కొట్టించు..కొట్టించెడు..కొట్టించెది.. కొట్టించేటి .....thatcauses ,

కొట్టించే ..
( caused , or will cause to beat,
VERBAL NOUN.
common. common.
కొట్టింపడము.
కొట్టించుట ...కొట్టించదము.... the causing to beat,
NEG ATIVE VERB .
INDICATIVE MOOD.
AORIST .
.Singular

* కొట్టించను .. కొట్టింపను .. I do not,did not ,orshall not cause tobeat.

కొట్టించవు .కొట్టిండు... Thou dost not, didst not, or rwill not cause
[ to beat.
. .M

కొట్టించఁడుకొట్టింపఁడు. IHe does not, did not, or will not, cause,

3d
F.
&
N
.

[to beat.

ట్టించదు. కొట్టింపదు . She, or it does not, did not, or wiiinot cause

• to beat.

* కొట్టించము.కొట్టింపము . We do not, did not, or shall not cause la

Plural

[ beat .
24

కొట్టించరు..కొట్టింపరు .. You do not, did not, or will notcause to

.
.

[ beut .

ణ్ణి కొట్టించరు..గొట్టింపకు They do not, did not , or will not cause

3d
.

[ to beat .
ట్టించవు .కొట్టింపవు
IMPERATIVE MOOD .

కొట్టించకుము..కొట్టింపకుము .. కొట్టించకుమీ . cause not thou

comman. common.
కొట్టింపకుమీ కొట్టించక ..... కొట్టింపక ...... to beat.
• Sto

cause not ye to
Plu

కొట్టించకుఁడు..కొట్ట ింపకుఁడు . కొట్టించకుఁడీ

common.
2d
:

Sbeat.
కొట్టించకంది............
కొట్టింపకుఁదీ ...
VERBAL PARTICIPLE.

కొట్టించక ....కొట్టింపక .... without causing to beat;

RELATIVE PARTICIPLE.
కొట్టించని ...కొట్టింపని ...that does not , did not, or will not cause to beat.
VERBAL NOUN.

కొట్టించమి ..కొట్టింపమి . the not cuusing to beat,

 CHAPTER SIXTH .

SYNTAX.

An extensive command of words , a knowledge of their various inflex-

ions, and the choice of such as are most fit to convey our ideas, are neces-
sary to the correct use of every language. But these alone are not suffi-

cient : the force, the elegance, and even the meaning of our expressions,
must still depend, in a great degree, on an idiomatical arrangement of
the terms which we employ. To illustrate the particular disposition of
words which is most consonant to the genius of the Teloogoo language,
is the object of the present chapter, and as immediately connected with this
subject, I shall here take occassion to treat of the adverbs, conjunctions,
interjections, and other indeclinable words, unnoticed in the preceding
part of this work.

A strict adherence to the rules which have been laid down regarding
the permutation and elision of letters , might possibly distract the reader's
attention from the main subject of the present chapter . I shall therefore
purposely neglect them, in the examples adduced in support of the follow-
necessary for
ing remarks, except where the observance of them may be
the elucidation of any particular part of the syntax ; and in order to ren-
der the study ofthe Teloogoo more easy to thosewho have acquired a know-
ledge of the Tamil tougue, and to shew in what respects the two sister
languages coincide , I shall endeavour as much as possible, in this part
of my work, to follow the Jesuit Beschi, an author of established autho-

rity in the Tamil language,

 152 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

OF THE CASES OF SUBSTANTIVES, AND THE USE OF THE POSTPOSITIONS.

276
The reader has been already informed , that in nouns denoting inanimate
things, the nominative is constantly used for the accusative. This will be
explained more fully when we treat of the government of nouns by verbs,

277
The genitive, possessive, or inflected case, seldom affixes the postpo-
sition . We constantly find Davey, used for
రామునియిల్లు , రాముని
యొక్క యిల్లు Rama's house ; ఇంద్రుని సభ for ఇంద్రుని యొక్క సభ,
the court of Indra ; మన్మధునిబాణము for మన్మధుని యొక్క బాణము

the arrow of Cupid ; and కు చేరునిధన ము for కు బేగుని యొక్కధనము,

the wealth of Koobera (the God of riches ) &c. Deprived ofthis affix , the
genitive in Teloogoo has frequently, as in English, thepower of an adjec-
tive, X means a beast of the forest that is, a wild beast, o
37 the season of sun shine, or the sultry season ; the
sand of the river, or river sand; the water of the lake, or lake
water.
278 Two or more substantives relating to the same object agree in case ;

but if they refer to different objects, the one governs the other in the geni-

tive ; thus, దేవుని or డేవుని యొక్క డయ The favour ofthe deity మనుష్యు
e
ల or మనుష్యుల యెక్క పాపములు the sinus of men 8gc .
279 The inflected or genitive cases of substantive nouns or pronouns , with
the terminations of the neuter demonstrative pronouns affixed to them , viz .
in the singular, and in the plural number, are constantly used , without

any verb, to denote the affirmation of possession ; as, LYDE that

property is mine, యోగు అములు వారి వి these horses are theirs అదిరా
LDE that is Rama's & EDE this belongs to the Bramin,
యీతోటరాజు ది this garden is the King's, ఆపుస్తకముమా తండ్రిది
that book belongs to my father, we p§ DE this house
belongs to a Banian.

280 The dative case has generally the same force as the prepositions to , for

in English ; thus☺EWKLLOW & modesty is essential to women,

మొ X వాండ్లకు ధైర్యమగత్యము courage is requisite for men . It some-

 OF SYNTAX . 153 .

times represents the English genitive ; as ,మాటకు ప్రాణము సత్యము the

soul of a promise is truth , the soul of a

woman is her honor. Soomutee Shutukum, literally, truth is life to a

promise, honor is life to a woman.

The dative is also often used , without a verb , to denote actual posses- 381
sion, as expressed by our verb to have; Dhe has much
money ; literally, to him, much money L& Los the
King has ten sons, literally, to the King, ten sons. This coincides with

the latin rule " Est pro habeo regit dativum, " only that in Teloogoo
the est is not expressed but understood .

The dative case, used with the positive degree of an adjective, gives the 382
adjective the force of the comparative degree ; and the sign of the dative
case serves to represent the Englishthan ; thus, ¿ âkwa por bthis

man is more clever than that person, literally to that person, this man is
clever.

In stating the distance of two places from each other, either one or both 383
ofthe names of these places may be in the dative case ; thus, 250

చికిన్నిమున్నూ రామడదూరము or కాశికళంచిమున్నూ రామడదూ

8 Benares and Conjeveram are 300 amadas distant ; or Conjeveram.
is 300 amadas from Benares,

, ివత ల on this side , పైన above , కింద below, ముందర

అవతల beyond య 384
before, 38 behind, and other words denoting relation of place, govern

the preceding noun in the dative case ; as , దీనికి పైన above this దానికకింద
below that, so before this, I§3§ beyond that &c.

When we speak of motion towards any place, the name of the place 385
must be in the dative ; as, he, she, or it went to the garden.

TOL DEL TRY ను

D he, she, or it went to the village. It is to be observed
however, that if the object towards which motion is directed be of such a
nature as not to admit of entrance, the postposition or 8 (near)
must be inserted between the noun and the sign ofthe dative ; as,

కిపోయెను he , she or it went to the tree, రాజుదగ్గిరికివచ్చెను he, she on it

came to the King.
 154 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

386 Nouns of time are generally placed in

in the dative ; thus, అది రేపటికియి
sétav

స్తున్నాను I will give it tomorrow యెల్లుందికివస్తాను I shall come the

day after tomorrow.
387 When any end, purpose , or intention is to be expressed, we may either
place the noun denoting it in the dative case, or use the postposition
or , corresponding with the English phrases in order to , with a view

that, for the purpose of, &c. &c . thus, XoáÔŇ or §

° 55

or కైయీశ్వరునియందుభక్తి వుండవ లెను in order to obtain bliss, we

must put our trust in God..

388 Words expressing the different degrees of consanguinity or affinity, or

denoting any connection or dependence, govern the noun, to which they refer
in the dative case . Thus, if we ask NBD . In what re-

lation does that man stand to you ? the answer will be ÚJL.
-
నాకుమాను- నాకుమనమడు నాకుభృత్యుడు - నాకుమిత్రుడు he is my
brother in law, father in law, grandson, servant, or friend; literally, he
is to me a brother in law, & c . & c . In Teloogoo , we may ask, as in En-

glish , మీ పే రేమి what is your nane ?మావయ సేమి what is your

uge ? or we may use the dative, and say మీకు పేపే రేమీ మీకువయ సేమి
To you, what name ? what age ?.

389 The postpositionsకోసరము కొరకు or కై ( composed of the noun ఓ స

85 a side, 28 the dative case of 20, from 28 aside, and the

past verbal participle of the affirmative mood of E to become, all added

to the sign of the dative case) are used nearly in the same sense as the da-
tive itself ; thus , వ తనాళముకో సరము or కొరకు or కైరూకలు పంపించి
She sent money for merchandize, or on account oftrude.
390 Ofthe use of the accusative, we shall treat under the head " General
Rules."
391 The vocative is used precisely as in English ; but, in prefixing to nouns

the vocative participles 28-2 and 2 , particular attention should be

paid to the rank and sex of the person addressed, as explained in rule 157;

thus , ఓరిబోయీ 0 Palanqueen bearer ! ఓసిపాపాత్మురాలా O Wicked

woman ! É ( O Bramin !.
 OF SYNTAX, 155

The local ablative, formed by the postposition , corresponds with 392

our prepositions in, on , upon , among &c . It points out the place where

any thing is ; for example, దేవతులు స్వగణములోవున్నారు The Gods

reside in Paradise, పరమాత్మ ప్రతి హృదయములో వున్నాడు, the Su-
preme Being in every heart : & likewise expresses descent on any object;
thus, ÊL32 the rain thatfalls on the carth . When it
affixes the particle Do , derived from Go , the past verbal participle of
E
Go to place, it expresses motion out of a place ; as DO

ప్రవాహమువస్తున్న &the flood comes floring out of the Curery నేను

శ్రీరంగపట్నములో నుంచివస్తిని I came out of Seringapatam .
is also used in comparison, and marks the comparative or superla- 393
tive degree, according as the objects spoken of are two , or more; thus, 2

లక్ష్మణులలో రాముడధికుడు . Rama is superior to Lutchmana ; literal-

ly among Rama ard Lutchmana ; Rama is superior ; uurija
wwe x ces among men, kings are the most powerful; literally, the pow
erful. The particle s, or the drootuprucrootica affixes & c . may some-
times be added to , which, in this state, is often attached to nouns, in

comparison ; and the same noun twice repeated , either with , or without
this addition, has the force of a superlative; thus, wor§ §8

the poorest ofthe poor మూఖురాలలో ను or లో కమూఖుడు the most

obstinate ofthe obstinate . Like the English in , is also used with nouns
denoting time ; పూర్వ కాలములో in farmer times, వెనకటికాలములో
in after times.
From is derived the word , the inflexion of an irregular 394
దేశ్యము noun which wants the nominative , It is generally used in the
dative or ablative case ; thus , in the dative, లో పలికఆ పుషధముయిచ్చి
Iɔ he has given medicine internally . In the ablative, it has the same
meaning as the English prepositions within, inside &c, as axoce
within the house, inside the box.
పెట్టెలో పం
♫ 。 is an adverb of the same meaning as e , formed by adding 395
, the infinitive of the root, E , to become to the postposition ; as

లోగావచ్చినాడు he came inside,

 156 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

396
is often prefixed to the verbs to fall, or to become, which
then signify to submit, to yield &c . corresponding to the English phrase
to give in . Lɔ he has submitted.

397 Thepostposition , or it's contraction , thesign of the ablative termed

instrumental, is itself the inflected ablative case of the irregular JS =

noun Box the hand. It represents the cause or agency by which any
effect is produced , and may generally be translated by the English pre-

position by; thus, లోకముయీశ్వరుని చేత సృజింపబడ్డది the world

was created by God, వషణ ము చేత భూమిచల్లబడుతున్న ది the carth is

cooled by rain. To the postposition 5 , as well as, to od or Le,
which are synonymous with it, the drootuprucrootica affixes & c are

often added ; as , సూర్యునివల్లను కాక heut is produced by the sun మా X

మువల్లను or చేతనుమోయు ముగలదు bliss is attainable by sacrifice :

literally by the sun, heat- by sacrifice , bliss.

398 §º, the sign of what we have named the social ablative, is equivalent to
the English preposition with ; తండ్రి తనకొమారునితో వచ్చెను the fa-

ther came with his son, రాముని నేత్రంబు లతో చూడనామనంబుతృ

20 viewing Ramu with my eyes , my mind was satiated ; &
• G,
the infinitive of the verb to join, generally written by the vulgar
, is often added to to strengthen the connection ; thus, DID

తోగూడారమ్మని చెప్పు tell him to come along with me. తోడ andతోడుత
are not so much in use as తొ .

399 The postposition , affixed only to nouns denoting inanimate objects

ending in v, has occasionally the power of each of the three ablatives

above mentioned ; thus, Low the fruit ripened on the tree,

రాజు సింహాసనమునగూచుణం డెను the king sut upon the throne , సం

తోషమునగృహంబుననుం డెను he staid at home from joy , బలమునత

Jú X FODEN BI he vanquished his enemies by his prowess.

400 The inflected ablative , peculiar to the irregular nouns , has the
same power with respect to these nouns, as the postposition has with

regard to nouns in denoting inanimate objects ; thus, o xv°25

′
 OF SYNTAX. 157

he is in the court yard, వానినెటవున్నది it is in his mouth , పడమట

in the west, in the nail, Loɖɔ 8 Dhe bit with his teeth , ( literal-
ly,with the tooth) I saw with my eyes, (literally, with the

eye) చేతధనుస్సుప ట్టను he held the bow with his hand, వింటచం పెను he

killed with a bow, నన్ను చేత పట్టిఒలుచుకపోయెను taking me by the land,

he conducted me.

నిమిత్తము and విషయము are nominatives of two తత్సమము nouns, 401

frequently used as postpositions ; denotes some cause, reason,
&c. and a corresponds precisely with our word respecting, or
respect in such phrases as " in this respect" " in one respect." The use of
these words as postpositions will be best understood by the following ex-
మీ ని మిత్తముకొంటిని I purchased this house for
amples.యీయిల్లు.
you , or on your accouut, పెండ్లివిషయముమాట్లాడెను he spoke respect-

ing the marriage, రాచకార్యవిషయమువ్రా సెను he wrote respecting

affairs ofstate : § 3 or 528 , mentioned in rule 389 , has often

the same meaning as నిమిత్తము ; thus, we say మిమ్ముచూచేటందుకోస

రము orకోసము నేను వస్తిని. I came on purpose to see you .

o is nearly synonymous with the postposition . The difference 402

between them will be best defined by examples ; thus, and

o both mean in the garden or forest, but the former refers more
strongly than the latter to the inside; రామునిలో భక్తిand రామునియం
both mean faith in Rama, but the former expression denotes the
faith that exists within Rama, the faith that he possesses in others ; the lat-
ter phrase denotes the faith which others have in him.

is derived from the roote which signifies to resemble ; it de- 403

notes similitude , likeness & c. thus, Zoo L☎ like Vycoontha, (the
residence of Vishtnoo ) like me : the word whence is
immediately derived, is used , in books , instead of 3 ; but being part of
an active verb, it always governs the accusative, instead of the inflexion,
and the of is, in this case, changed into a, the accusative prece-
ding it being included in the class of drootuprukrootooloo; thus, న

బో లె like me, వైకుంఠంబునుంబో లె like Vycoontha.

 158 TELOOGOO GRAMMA R.

404 నుండి - నుంచి are used to denote motion from a place ; asశానా వార

లుక లక త్తా నుంచి or నుండివచ్చినవి a great number of vessels have ar .

rived from Calcutta , చెన్నపట్నమునుంచిమచిలీపటమునకుయెంతదూ

8 howfar is itfrom Madras to Masulipatam ?
405
The following are a few examples shewing the mode in which most of
·
the other common postpositions are used ,యిండ్ల orయిండ్లకు సందున or

మధ్య between the houses, వాని or వానికి వెంబడి or వెనక వచ్చి నాడు
he came behind or after him , రెండు గడియల వెనకయిస్తున్నాను I will
give it in (or after two hours ; in this last example, oa cannot be
used ,because it refers exclusively to situation,not to time. avos or awa
టియెదుట opposite the house , తోటకుయెదురు గా opposite the garden .
406
governs the accusative , thus; శివునికూచిF or గురించిత పస్సు
he performed penance to (or on account of) Shiva, zgr
ముగూచిF పోయినాడు he went towards the city .

407 The very useful and common postposition on, upon, has been
omitted, by mistake, from the list of the postpositions given in rule 130 ;

it denotes rest on a place, and governs the noun preceding it in the obli-
que case ; as DD on the earth &c.

408 The postpositions of whichthe following are examples are found only
in books : విశ్వామిత్రునఋఱత or అజఱు రాముఁ డేఁగెను Rama went with
Viswamitra , శివునిపొం పార్వతియేఁ గెను Paravatee departed with

Shiva; ధన ముపారు గర్వించెను hewas elated. by riches , భ క్తి మెయి or మై

ఁ బ్రాథిFంచితిని Iprayed withfaith, విద్యబట్టుఁడికేతి F through learung ,

fame uccrues , నీవువచ్చుటం జేసిజనులు సంతోషించిరి the people are plea-

sed byyour coming, cavictory is attainable by prowess.

409 With the exception of , all cases of substantive nouns or pro-

nouns formed by postpositions ending in , such as by, & with,
outside, above, upon, 30 down, below, near &c &c, when

immediately followed by other substantives with which they agree, change

the final of thesepostpositions into 9 ; thus, the friend-

 OF SYNTAX. 159

ship with you, గాని బెట్టితోటలు the gardens without the gate, మీ ద్దెపయి
నియిండ్లు the houses above the terrace, కొండకంది నేలలు the lands below

the mountain , పట్టణ మువద్దివనములు the gardens near the city , కుబేరు

Do the wealth of the god ofriches , literally the wealth near the
god of riches. In such constructions , thev of the postposition o∞ is
changed into ~ ; thus, JoLêš the regard towards me.
OF THE FORMATION OF VARIOUS CLASSES OF NOUNS.

Nouns denoting the agent are often formed by adding to the inflexion 410
ofa noun substantive the pronoun for the masculine, and for
the feminine ; thus, from 20 , the inflexion of a house, is formed
avodca a house owner, from o , the inflexion of fruits,
Loc∞ afruiterer, from à & a temple, &&&ɔ an officer ofthe
temple,and from a shop, Soxca shopkeeper &c. & c . Nouns
in , however, in this construction , are not placed in the inflection,
but change the final into , thus ; e a horse, makes
a horsekeeper.

When the agent to be denoted is familiar, or contemptible, is 411

some times used instead of , and instead of ; thus, from

B& D friendship , comes a female friend ; thus, also, we say

విటకాఁడు arake , సొగసుకాఁడు a corcomb, a good looking fellow, సొ
Xan affectedfemale, a fine girl.

Nouns denoting the agent are also formed from nouns in 412
, by changing that termination into 9; thus, from Langer,
comes an angry person, from DL sin, a sinner, from ev
strength, w✪ a strong person, from covetousness , a misér.

Besides the verbal noun denoting the action itself which the verb sig- 413
nifies, there are many abstract nouns derived from verbs : some of these
abstract nouns are the same as the roots themselves ; thus, from.

... to salute ………………..comes..·

the root మ్రొక్కు. ³½ .....
···· salutation .
do..... Lev ... to speak do Leva word.
do..... ..do………………………….a leap.
………… to leap …………………………
 160 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR .

do..... év CX ..……… to sleep ……………… ..do …….. CXJ ........ sleep.

.....
do..... Becks.... to shine …………………….. do……… .. Bescɔ……………..light .
do……………. ……….. to heighten ……….. do… ... ………………….height.
do……
..·· to abuse , tocall names … do ….......... … abuse.

do ..... to flog
...... do............ ………….a lash, a blow.
do…………. I ………………… to kick ·· .... do .... తన్ను akick .

do ....
do నవ్వు ....
.Isto ·to laugh do ...IS .......... laughter.
...
414 Others are formed from roots in v or , by changing these sylla-

bles into , and if 9 precede , it is changed into v .

¿a ........to fear ……………………….. ........

జడుపు... fear .
Besos... to glare …………………. •3: ew H...lightning.
Dow ..... to stab⋅ •
* ........a stab .
ఏడుచు .......
. to cry . ·I .... weeping.
మలుచు ........to forget ........ మలుపు
...Litt LJ........ forgetfulness.
........to learn …….. .... Bia ..skill
… .
Rev ........to vanquish ……………. గెలుపు ... ....
...victory , success.
¿ ........to suffer patiently ...............patience .
secus ....... to think …………………. ST......... thought .
·

to bear a burden ………… .. 3 H... • a load or burden.

చూచు ........ to see . చూపు .………………..sight.
WH
...•

3 to approve ……………….. ·3 35 .... ···· approbation .

415 Some are formed from roots in by changing that syllable into .
and if precede a it is changed in v .

D ….... to tighten ... H ………………..tightness.

Draku....... to fly........ ……………….. •J flight.
........

416 Others are formed from roots in or by changing the final

or చు to ( త or త .

నే
Sv .........
ము....... weave ............ ....Sc
.. to weave ..........texture.

మోము . ... to sound, to roar ….

.. 355 ….……………… a roaring.
…
 OF SYNTAX, 161

∞ …………..to write…. c ...... writing.

$500 to draw a line ........ గీత ............-a line .
Lo ......to shut ........ ·.మూత ....... a lid.
.. delive
అప్ప గించు అపa
్ప గింత .. rance .
to deliver....
వప్ప గించు వప్పగింత ..
sexdow .... to dream ... ...§ 280 3 ... dreaming.
417
Some are formed by changing the final v of the root into §.

~ DD. 5 ......... trust.

నమ్ము to trust
Bes ........... to float ……………..· lightness.
whis ......... tiresomeness ..
wes .......... to befatigued ...
Sev... toʻgovern …….. .... ..... ·a governor.
§ .... to hope........ కోరిక .......... hope .

Some abstract nouns are formed from roots in and by changing 418

డు to ట , and ను to ంట .
Lotto burn ………………………… .................... a flame.
Lott o cook ..... .
…………… ….. 200 ………………………..cooking.
వండు ........
Jo ......... to sing....... ............. a song.
.... . అంట .... ....a saying,
~ ...........to say
కొను ...... ..... to buy కొంట ........ purchase .

The following abstract nouns are irregularly formed from their res- 419
pective roots.
·
అలయు . to be tired .... అలఁత అలపు అలయిక అల సట .. tiresomeness .
graze ……… ·
..to graze ············ మేపు మేత ..... ...grazing.
CICE...
కూయు..to make a noise... కూఁత a noise, a cry.

Bisecto shoot, or sprout -w z 35 §..... a sprout.

eco....to disturb .......FOC - Fock a disturbance .

మడుచు ..to fold మడుపు - మడత ....aa fold .

....... a sale.
అమ్ము .... to sell
.. అమ్ముడు . అమ్మకము
Ikes... to remain …………………….I KW - WXH . ....remainder.

Go ....to be or reside .... &cé - & D§ ...... .....residence .

......to cat- ........
... తింట - తిండి .... cating .
 162 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR .

DD........to hear వినికి వినికిడి hearsay information .

Des…
....to resemble······· DE § - Dεz
… ......... resemblance.
.... ... JL
విత్తు ....to sow విత్తు విత్త నము...... seed .
I a .....to miss …………………. ........
..తప్పు - తప్పితము a mistake ,
పుట్టు ....... to be born.. పుట్టు .......· birth .
పుట్టువు పుట్టుక ....

wy ....to die ...... చావు . ......death.

rvis.. to enter. ...చోటు......

……………..a place.
...........
మెచ్చు .... to pain -227 .pain.
……
sex to have....... ..... కలిమి ..... ...riches .

దున్ను ... to plough.........దుక్క .. ·a plough.

when it means to
serve makes ..
...... కొలువు .. ....... service
కాలు ..)
" లుచు
when it means to ) ....
a measure,
measure makes

So to ripen makes odo a product of the earth and fruit.

420
A great number of abstract nouns are formed by adding the termina-

ticn తనము to దేశ్యము adjectives , and sometimes to దేశ్యము nouns, or

even occasionally to the relative participles of verbs ; thus, from

.....
the adjective ogood comes · LioDITL ... goodness.
.......
do .... గొప్ప ..... great. do 522 greatness.
......
do …................ dull do. I ు ...... dullness.
మడ్డితనమ
do…….. ....... ......
…………… · beautiful· · do ……… W§. II2. beauty.
... ము ....
do .... చిన్న .... small.···· do …··· ··· DIJ II 2 .... smallness .
thus, also, from the

substantive ….. …………………… a child do…………………...... childhood.

and from the relative

DIES L { ignorance.
participle తెలియని .. ( that is, was or......
will not be known } తెలియనితనము}

తన ము is never added to any except pure

II words.
 OF SYNTAX . 163

adjectives or substantives of any termination become ab- 421

stract nouns by affixing or ; as,

∞∞……..great heavy makes …

.. f ..or greatness , weight.
• № .. small, light do was .. or..I smallness , light-
[ness .
*. *····hard ………………………… does …..or·· Lé ·· ‚hardness.
... a master …………… do sv..or...mastership .
వీర ....
. ......... .... ..
Đố …….. a hero …………………… do … D855 3 ··· or ·· D8 5 ·· heroism
··valiant · ... ..
do ...... శూరత్వము or కూరత valour.
OF ADJECTIVES.

In the fourth chapter of this work, we have so fully explained the mode 422
in which adjectives agree with substantives, that little remains to be added
respecting that part of syntax,

The adjective is generally placed before the substantive noun or pro- 423
noun with which it agrees ; as, మంచి బ్రాహ్మణుఁడు a good bramin, మంచి
స్త్రీ a good woman , చెడ్డ గుఱ్ఱుఱ్ఱము a bad horse, చక్కనిమనిషి a beautiful

person.

In English, when the verb to be, inany of it's variations, comesbetween a 424
substantive and an adjective, the sense may be well expressed inTeloogoo
by placing the adjective after the substantive; but, in this case, the verb to be

is not expressed , but only understood in Teloogoo . A. adjective

has no gender or number, except what it receives from the word to which it is

prefixed ; it is therefore necessary, when it thus follows it's substantive, to

add to it the pronouns వాఁడు or అది ,or వారు or అవి , according to the gen-
der and number of the substantive with which it agrees, thus, in the phras-
es that Branin is good ఆ బాహ్మణుఁడుమంచి వాఁడు,those Biramins are

good ఆ బ్రాహ్మణులుమంచివారు, that woman is good ఆ గ్రామంచిది ,

these women aregood ☀ & w2oD♫∞, that horse is good e

Da ,these horses are good - SXR ZENZOR , no verb is used,

the adjective merely follows it's substantive, the pronouns in question being
at the same time affixed to the adjective, because it belongs to the Son.
 161 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

class .
But adjectives do not admit of the addition of these
pronouns , because they possess within themselves the distinction of gen-

der and number ; thus, using a adjective, instead of a

one, we should say that bramin is good eccos, that

woman is good ఆ స్త్రీ శ్రేష్ఠురాలు, thuut horse is good ఆగుఱ్ఱము శ్రేష్ఠము

see rule 285 & c .

425
Many substantives are converted into adjectives, by affixing the word
Xe possessing,from the root sex ; thus, woXo possessing strength,
strong, we wise, that is possessing wisdom, 2X Ohappy, pos-

sessing happiness, HLX wealthy, possessing wealth &c . &c.

426 In Teloogoo, the degrees of comparison are formed, not by any change
in the adjective itself,but by the use of certain particles . In treating ofthe

postpositions, the manner in which -- and are employed

in comparison, has been fully explained ; and it only remains here to observe
that the words క and so are often affixed, in a similar manner, to the
inflexions of substantive nouns or pronouns, to express the comparative

degree . It is generally thought that is the past relative participle of

the root to see, signifying that has seen,and that so is the subjunc

tive of the same verb , si gnifying if any one see ; thus , & sof
there is nothing better than this siguifies, literally, to those that regard

this, there is nothing better ; and & ≈šo Lodd there is nothing
better than this, literally translated, means , if you look at this, there is
nothing better. But it seems more probable that these particles are de-
rived from the corresponding parts of the root & to say, added to the
dative case, and that is formed of 5 or 3 and , and 80 & of

or and &; for ifthese particles were derived from the active verb
& to see they would govern the accusative, instead of the inflexion ; but

we say నాకం & Rever than me: in this sense, the above men
tioned expressions , literally translated, would mean to those that speak of
this, nothing is better ; and ifyou speakof this, nothing is better.
 OF SYNTAX. 165

The superlative degree is generally formed by prefixing to the adjec- 427

tive the words బహు very , నిండా much, & c . thus, బహుబుద్దిమంతుడు a

very wise man, Dowry over a very large house. To express the

wisest, the greatest &c . the phrase o than all is used for the

masculine and feminine, and than all things for the neuter .
If we would express the wisest man we must say in Teloogoo cã 8 šo
బు
wow
w that is, the man wiser than all . If we would express
or the tree
the lurgest tree we must say అన్నిటికంటే
గొప్పవృక్షము ,
larger than all, అందరికం టేగొప్పవాడుthe greatest of men , అందరి
కం పేసొ X నుక త్తె the most beautiful of women .
OF THE USE OF THE SIMPLE TENSES OF VERBS.

Nothing will at first be more perplexing to the Teloogoo Student than 428
the use of one tense of the verb for another. After studying the different
conjugations, he will be suprized to find what I have termed the present
tense constantly used , even by his teacher, in a future signification . I hope
however, that he will not, on this account, too hastily question the correct-
ness of the principles I have endeavoured to inculcate, and recommend
the following observations on this subject to his particu

In rule 325 , it was explained that the particular form of the present 429
tense terminating in is peculiar to the religious Bramins of the
Northern districts ; and the reader was requested to bear in mind that
those terminating in and are the only forms to be employ-
ed in the colloquial use of the language ; that in is seldom found
except in books, and to distinguish the other three from it, the word com-
mon has been always prefixed to them , in the conjugation of the verbs .
These rules cannot be too strongly impressed on the memory ofthe student .

The two forms of the present tense , derived from the verbal participles 430
ending in , spring originally, like those participles themselves ,

from the auxiliary verb & to be . They consist in fact of the partici-

ples in or with that tense of which commences with D

 166 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR .

ను affixed to them , thus, దీవించుచు or విదీంచుతు , with ఉన్నాను afix

ed, by the rules for sund hi given in the second chapter, become respec-
tively దీవించుచున్నాను or జీవించుకున్నాను . The verb ఉండు , there-
fore, cannot, in any of it's forms , be affixed to the verbal participles in
, because it has already been added to them : but, inthe common dia-

lect, when we wish to mark more strongly the present time, we lengthen
the final ofthe verbal participles in or o, and, without sund, hi, add
to them the abovementioned tense of Go , which is commonly written

వున్నాను ; thus, కొట్టుచూవున్నాను or కొట్టుతూవున్నాను denotes that

ను
I am now beating, I that I am now writing & c . &c.

431 The perfect tense is used to denote past time, precisely in the same man
ner as the corresponding tense in english. It does not therefore here re-
quire any elucidation .

432 The first form ofthe future tense scarcely ever occurs, except in studied
compositions ; and the use of the second form is not common. In lieu of
నేటిదినంచెన్నపట్టణము
this tense, the present is constantly used ; thus, ¿ AJOWJ, KOMIN

విడిచివచ్చే నెల ౧౫ తేదిలో . గా ఆ రంగ పట్టణము చేగుతాను harving

left Madras to day, I shall arrive at Seringapatam within the 15th of
next month, literally I arrive; dancesIshall come to your
house tomorrow, literally I come, Jevoke I shall write
the letter the day after tomorrow, literally I write a thousand other ex-
amples might be added . The use of the aorist for the future is explain-
ed in the following rule.

433 The affirmative and negative aorists express, according to the context,
the present, the past, or the future ; but I beg the reader will bear

in mind that, in the common dialect, they are most generally used in
a future sense. The following examples will best shew the nature

of this tense ( Past ) శలికమునుపుజనులు సరిగానూ రెండ్లు బ్రతుకుదురు .

Before the commencement of the Caleyoogum men lived exactly a hun-

dred years,( Present)యిప్పుడు సరాసరియా భైయైదు సంవత్సర ములుబ్ర

av!~
at present they live on an average 55 years, (Future) avš
 OF SYNTAX. 167

కేవలమాయుస్సుశ్రీణమవును and by: degrees , the length

of human life will be greatly shortened, ( Past) దేవదత్తునికినాకుమునుపు

207 208 ∞ There existed formerly a very intimate friend-

ship detrveen Devadatta and me , ( Past) మాయింటికి ప్రతిదినంవచ్చును

నేనున్ను వాడియింటికిపోదును he came to my house frequently , and

I went to his , ( Present) ఇప్పుడువానికి నారు ద్వేషముగనక నేనువాని

యింటికి పోను , వాడుమాయింటికి రాడు at present , as enmity exists be-

tween us, I never go to his house, and he never comes to mine. In the

common dialect , we constantly say ∞ I shall do so, మీరువత్తు

willyou come ? I shall not come & c. In fact the student

can seldom err in translating the English future by the Teloogoo aorist.

In explaining the Teloogoo aorist in English , he must be guided chiefly

by the context.
OF THE FORMATION OF COMPOUND TENSES OF VERBS.

The present, the past, the future, and the aorist, are the only tenses 434
mentioned in the conjugation of the verb. The compound tenses, formed
by auxiliary verbs , were reserved for consideration in this place.

Tenses corresponding with the imperfect and pluperfect in English are 435
formed by prefixing the present and past verbal participles of any verb to
the perfect tense of Go to be; thus,
IMPERFECT.
.Singular
.123. st

I was singing.
2d d

పాడుతూవుంటిని ...

సాడుతూవుంటివి .. ……………………………… . Thou wast singing.

M.F.
པི་
ད
N
&
.

9 He, she, or it was singing.

.........
పాడుతూవుం డెను
Plural

పాడుతr
Dwa JocD.
ూవుంట ిమీ ..... We were singing.

.......... You were singing.

.

పాడుతూవుంటిరి ..
N.M.
F
.&
3d

పాడుతూవుండిరి ..... *** They were singing .

.

Dowego B .............
 168 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

Singular
PLUPERFECT.

.2st
I3dd I had sung.
పాడివుంటిని .
.

Thou hadst sung.

M.F.
పొడవుంటివి .....
.N
&

సాదివుం డెను ..... ·He, she, or it had sung.

.12dst

.... We had sung .

Plural

పాడివుంటిమి ......

పాదివుంటిరి ...... You had sung.

.

M.

..
F
.&

14 585028
PE'

ཚ༨
They had sung.
12 DO DO
పాడి వుంBN J.............
డెను

436
For example, if we say భరతుడు అయోధ్యకు వచ్చినప్పుడు అతని అన్న
రాముడువనమునకుపోతూవుం దెను when Bhuruta came to Oude, his el-
der brotherRama was going to theforest . As far as regards the present time,
Bharata's arrival is past, as well as Rama's departure, but the two actions
were simultaneous , and this is represented by adding the past tense ofo
to be tothepresent verbalparticiple of to go ; but ifthe actions denot-
ed by both verbs are not only past as regards the present time, but the acti-
on denoted by one verb is antecedent to the action denoted by the other, then
the past verbal participle is prefixed to the past tense ofco , to formthe

pluperfect; thus , రాజు యుద్ధరంగమునుంచిపట్టణమునకువచ్చేటందుకు

మును పేఅతనికి పకకొమారుడుపుట్టివుం దెను before the Kingreturned

to the city, from the field of battle, a son had been born to him . The re-
turn of the King and the birth of his son are both past, but the birth was

antecedent to the King's return.

437 Certain others tenses are formed by affixing to the infinitive of any verb

particular tenses of the verbs s to go, še to possess, to be able,

y to learn, es to suffice, and to be able, used as auxiliaries,

The original verbremains in the infinitive, whilst these auxiliaries are con-
jugated through all the persons ofthe tenses thus used .

పోవు to go
The present, perfect and aorists of this verb may be affixed , as in en-
glish , to the infinitive ofany verb, to denote a future signification ; but the
 OF SYNTAX , 169

infinitive being a ద్రుత ప్రకృతిక , the వ ofపోవుis , in the superior dialect ,

changed into బ, according to rule 115 ; thus.

పాడఁబోచున్ ..... I am going to sing.

నాను
చేయఁదోచున్నావు .
Thou art going to do:
F. & N.
చూడఁ-బోచున్నాఁదు -బోచు- న్నది orంది He, she , or it is going to see;

వ్రాయఁబోచున్నాము . We are going to write.

పంపించఁబోచున్న * ..... You are going to send .
ారు .

చెప్పఁ -బోచున్నారు - బోచున్నవి . They are going to say.&c . &c .

కలుగు to be able.

కలుగుదును or కలను the affirmative, and లేను the negative aorist ,

together with the perfect tense of this verb, added to the infinitive
of any other verb , imply the possession , or rwant, of porver or ability : the

of sex , however, is changed into X when preceded by an infinitive,

or any other word of the class named ద్రుత ప్రకృతిక
పాడఁ - గలుగుదును - గలను ...... I can sing .
- Thou canst do .
చెయ్యఁ - గలుగుదువు M.
గలవు ..
M. F. & N. F. &N.
చూడఁ - గలుగును గలఁడు - గలదు ........
...He , she, or it cam see.
· .....
వ్రాయఁ- గలుగుదుము గలము . We can write .
పంపించం - గలుగుదురు - గలకు
గలకు ...... You can send .
M. F. M. & F. N.
· ....- They
చెప్పఁ - గలుగుదురు గలరు గలవు .. can tell.

పాడ లేను ....... •Icannot sing.

చెయ్య లేవు .. Thou canst not do .

M. F. & N.
చూడ లేఁడు- లేదు . He, she, or it cannot see.

( వ్రాయలేము ........... ......... Ve cannot write .

పంపించ లేరు ........ ... You cannot send.
M. & F.. N.
3x3 ........ .... ...... They cannot tell.
చెప్ప లేరు - లేవు .....
పాడఁగలిగెతిని .......... . II could sing .
170 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

చెయ్యఁగలిగితివి
........ Thou couldst do .
M.F. & N.
చూడఁగలి గెను ....... ......... He , she, or it could see.

వ్రాయఁగలిగితిమి . We could write.

పంపించఁ X లిగితిరి .... You could send .

M.
చెప్పఁ గలిగిరి - గలి గెను . They could tell

గలను & c. is a contraction of x లు గుదును & c ; the former sometimes

implying futurity, but the latter ability only ; ce may mean

either I will or I can do , but cxex means only I can do: the

relative participle Xe is often used, after an infinitive, in a future sense ; the

phrase చేయఁగ లవిన్నపములు the requests which I am about to make , oc-

curs at the commencement of almost every Teloogoo letter addressed by
an inferior to a person in a superior station.

నేచు to learn
The affirmative and negative aorists, and the perfect tense of this root,
added to the infinitive of any verb, have the same power as the correspond-

ing tenses of కలుగు .

పాడ నేరుగాను .I can sing .

చేయనేతువు.... . Thou canst do .

చూడ నేచును.... He, she , or it can see .

రాయనేతునాము .. • We can write.

పంపించ నేతునారు ...... You can send .

M. & F. N.
...
చెప్ప నేతుగారు . నేచునాను .. They can tell.
పాడ నేరను .... ... I cannot sing.

Thou canst not do .

చెయ్యనేరవు
M. F. & N.
చూడ నేరఁడు- నేరదు .... He, she, or it cannot sec.

వ్రాయనేరము .... We cannot write.

పంపించ నేరరు .. You cannot send.
M. & F. N.

చెప్ప నేరరు నేరవు . They cannot tell,

 OF SYNTAX. 171

పాడ నేచితిని .... ................... I could sing .

.... Thou couldst do.
చెయ్య నేచితివి ........
చూడ నేచెను ...... ...... He, she , or it could see .
... We could write.
వ్రాయనేచితిమి .....
పంపించ నేచితిరి . You could send.
M. & F.
చెప్ప నేచిరి -. నేచెగాను . •They could tell.

చాలు to suffice ఓపు to be able.

The affirmative and negative aorists of these verbs are used , after infini-
tives ,in the same manner as the corresponding tenses of కలుగు and నేచు ;

but the infinitive being included in the ద్రుత ప్రకృతికలు the చా of

we is changed into and the 2 of 2 into in conformity to
rules I15 and 92 .

పాడఁజాలుదును ..... ...

.. I can sing.
చెయ్యఁజాలుదువు ..... Thou canst do.
చూడఁజాలును .... ... He , she, or it can see.

' యఁజాలుదుము ........ .... We can write.

పంపించఁజాలుదురు ....... You can send .
M. & F. N.
చెప్పఁ జాలుదురు -జాలును . They can tell ,
పాడఁజాలను ......... ........ I cannot sing .
• Thou canst not do.
చెయ్యఁజాలవు
M. .F.&N.
చూడఁజాలఁడు - జ వాలదు ............. .. He, she, or it cannot see.
We cannot write.
వ్రాయఁజాలము .....
పంపించఁజాలరు .... You cannot send.
M.& F. • N.
• They cannot tell.
చెప్పఁ జాలరు - జాలవు
పాడమోపుదును .......... ..I can sing.
... Thou canst do .
చెయ్యమోపుదువు .
•
చూడ సెూపును ........ .He , she , or it can see .
.... ............ We can write .
(వ్రాయనెపుడుము

పంపించ మోపుదురు ........ You can send .

M. & F. N.
.....• They can tell,
చెప్ప మోపుదురు - సెూపును
 172 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

పాడనెపను .. .. ..•I cannot sing .

....•Thou canst not do .
చెయ్యమోపవు
M. ... F. & N.
చూడనెూపఁడు-నెూపదు ∙He, she, or it cannot see.
• We cannot write.
వ్రాయనెూపము .....
పంపించమోపరు ...... You cannot send .
M. & F. N.

చెప్పనెపకు - మోపవు .They cannot tell.

The affirmative and negative aorists of to join are sometimes

placed after an infinitive, and conjugated through all the persons, in the
same manner as the corresponding tenses of e : they denote expediency
rather than ability; but the use of the third person neuter only of these ten-
ses is more correct, as explained hereafter .
438
Some other tenses are formed by affixing to infinitives the third person neu-
ter only of certain teuses of a few verbs, used as auxiliaries. In this case the
nominative only undergoes a change ; the original verb remains in the in-
finitive, and the auxiliary in the 3d , person neuter ofthe singular number .

వ లెను or వలసినది the third person of the past tense , and వలయును
the third person of the affirmative aorist of the root o , when affixed to
the infinitive of a verb , imply obligation or necessity without reference to

any particular time . They may be translated by the English auxiliary

must, and are governed by any of the three persons in the nominative case ;

thus , నేను చెయ్యవ లెను I must do , నీవువిచారించవ లెను you must in-
quine, వాఁడు రావ లెను he must come.
The third person neuter of the negative aorist of this verb is irregular,
namely LoL or Lo , more commonly contracted into . It is us
ed negatively, in the same manner as the affirmative tenses above mention-
ed; but, when affixed to infinitives, it has rather an imperative than an in-
dicative meaning, and is therefore applied more frequently to the second

and third persons than to the first; as, నీవు రావద్దు dont come, వారుపోవ
let them notgo . Interrogatively, however, it is sometimes used with
the first person, must I not come ?
 OF SYNTAX . 173

These tenses of the verb e are also occasionally added , in the

same indeclinable state, to nouns in the nominative case , to denote want
or desire. In this construction , the affirmatives LTD - JOJ& and
invariably take before them the infinitive "" , but the nega-
tive does not require it ; thus, JELUTUTLTD I want a

horse Key √ I do not want a horse . The noun denoting

that which is wanted is placed in the nominative case, but the noun or

pronoun denoting the person who desires or wants is placed in the dative.

or the third person neuter of the past tense, and 5 × 5

the third person neuter ofthe negative aorist of the root I to be becom-
ing, decent, fit, proper &c. are respectively used, after infinitives, to ex-
press propriety or impropriety, without reference to any particular time,
and may be considered to represent the English auxiliary ought : the

may be changed into & after an infinitive, see rule 115 .

.......... I ought to do.

నేను చేయఁదగ్గది...

Thou oughtest to write.

నీవు వ్రాయఁదగ్గది........
.....
వాఁడు or అదిచదవఁదగ్ He , she, or it ought to read,
గది
We ought to be there .
మేము అక్కడవుందఁదగ
్గది
You ought to stand.
మీరునిలవఁదగ్గది ..

వారు పంపించఁదగ్గది . They ought to send.

నేను చేయఁదగదు .. ...... I ought not to do . &c .

&c .

Band , the third persons neuter of the affirmative and

negative aorists of the root to come, are respectively added to in-
finitives to denote liberty or want of liberty ; thus,

Imay do.
నేను చేయవచ్చును........
..... Thou mayst write.
నీవు వ్రాయవచ్చును ......

వాఁడు or అది – చదవవచ్చును .......... He, she, or it may read.

మేము అక్కడవు౦ డవచ్చును ........ We may be there.

 174 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR .

విూరునిలవవచ్చును ....... You may stand .

వారుపంపించవచ్చును ...... .. ....

They may send.
నేను చేయరాదు .... ......
• I may not do .

నీవు వ్రాయరాదు Thou mayst not write ,

వాఁడు or అది- చదవరాదు ........... He, she, or it may not read .

....
మేముఅక్కడవుండరాదు . We may not be there .
విూరునిలవరాదు........ You may not stand.

వారు పంపించరాదు... They may not send.

కూడును and కూడదు, the third persons . neuter of the affirmative and
negative aorists of the root to join are added to infinitives to denote,
possibility or impossibility ; the s being changed to X according to rule
115 ; thus ,

నేను చేయఁగూడును ... I can do.

నీవు వ్రాయఁగూడును :Thou canst write ,

వాఁడు or అది చదవఁగూడును ...... He , she or it can read .

.... We cam be there.
మేము అక్కడవుండఁగూడును .
మీలాగునిలవఁగూడును ............. You can stand .

వారు పంపించఁగూడును ....

... . They can send .

నేను చేయఁగూడదు .... ........I cannot do.

నీవు వ్రాయఁగూడదు.. .. Thou canst not write .

వాఁడు or అడిచదవఁగూడదు .......... He, she, or it cannot read .

మేము అక్కడవుండఁగూడదు .......... We cannot be there.

విూరునిలవగూడదు
...... You cannot stand.

వారుపంపించఁగూడదు . They cannot send .

439 Various negative compound tenses may be formed by affixing the seve-
ral tenses of the verb to go, to the negative verbal participle of any
 OF SYNTAX . 175

verb : the original verb remains in the negative verbal participle, whilst
the auxiliary tenses of are conjugated through all the persons ; thus,

నేను వ్రాయకపోతిని . •1 did not write .

నీవు చదవకపోదువు .... Thou wilt not read.

నేను పంపించకపోను ... •

I will not fail to send.

We have already explained , under rule 437 , that ∞- és- c.35

లేము - లేగు - లెవు , the negative aorist of the root కలుగూ , when added 440
to infinitives as an auxiliary, denotes want of ability , as I cannot & c . But
it is often used alone as an original defective verb, representing the nega-
tive of the perfect tense of o to be ; thus,

D … . I was there.…………….§ ..I was not there .

అక్కడవున్నాను

అక్కడవున్నావు .. Thou wast there అక్కడ లేవు . Thou wast not there .

H & c . He was there ....--He was not there,

అక్కడవున్నాఁడు ..
అక్కడవున్నది orండి She , or it was there అక్కడ లేదు She,or it was not there,

అక్కడవున్నాము .. We were there.. అక్కడ లేము We were not there.

H &H X ... You were there . You were not there.
అక్కడవున్నా M. & F. M. & F.
CH_STIJX.... They were there . They were not there.
N.
అక్కడవున్నవి .... They were there అక్కడ లేవు .. They were not there.

In these two senses agrees with it's nominative in gender and

number,

, the neuter of the third person singular, is used indeclinably, in

two other senses, as explained under the head " Particles . ”

Condition or contingency, is expressed, in the superior dialect of the 441

Teloogoo, by changing the final vowel of each of the different persons
in the first forms of the several affirmative tenses into ; and in the

common dialect, by merely changing the termination of the first per-

son in the first form of the past tense into ; thus, in the superior dia-

lect, from
 176 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

కొట్టుచున్నాను D
…… ..
.... 1 beat ……………………..comes... if I beat.
I
.......... I have beaten.. ....
కొట్టితిని........ కొట్టితి ³
నేన ....... if I beat .

......·I shall beat …..... ...... ifI beat,

కొట్టెదను .... కొట్టదనేని .
Ibeat, did beat, .....
కొట్టుదును .... or shall beat .S ..కొట్టుదు నేని .........if I beat

చేయుచున్నాను ... Ido..... చేయుచున్నా నేని .... if I do ,

Sko d .........
చేతిని ·I did.. .... if I do .
చేసితి నేని ..........
చే సెదను .. ... ... I shall do....... చే పెద నేని ......... . if I do.
చేయుదును .... … ..xvx 32
........I do , did, or shall do
do 32 ... ifI do.

bless ......
దీవించుచున్నాను I
I bless .దీవించుచున్నా నేని .. if I bless.
దీవించ
ADO DID.....
ితిని ......
... .. I blessed … . …….. .. .......Á . . . . .........……….if I bless .

దీవించెదను .... .... I shall bless ...........

... దీవించెద
Do B & D
నేని...
........... if 1 bless .
D

DoD. {]I bl bles

s ,al
దీవించుదు ను ... [ byessh l blse
esds., 2 ....
or S దీవించుదు నేని ......... if I bless .

*************** *********************************************

and in the inferior dialect, from

కొట్టితిని ............ •I have beuten .. comes ...... . ...... if I beat.

కొట్& ..
టి.తే .
చేసితిని ........ I did..... •
.....చేసి తే ... SifI do , contracted by
rudo
Şifi , 350 to చే
le

ADoDD............ I blessed... ..of Sif I bless do, do. 360

స్తే
to దీవి స్తే
442 The word ending in varies with the numbers and persons, thus ;

I సితి నేని .......•. if I do .

Sing. 2 గీతి నేని
చేసితి .........
నేని ...... .... if thou do.

3 M. F. & N………….. $ 33......... if he, she, or it do

చేసితిమేని ..... if we do.

S2 .Fagó ....... .... ..ifyou do .
Plu:....

3 {M. & F.. && .......

N...... if they do.
.. చే సె నేని .......
 OF SYNTAX . 177

but the word terminating in is used for every person and number ,
means ifI, thou, he, she, it, we, you, or they do .

Although the above examples are translated in English by the present 443
tense ofthe subjunctive mood, it is to be observed that, in the superior dia-
lect, the present tense with is seldom used , the past tense with
often occurs in a past, or future, as well as in a present conditional mean-
ing; the future tense with is used in a future conditional sense only,
and the aorist with in a conditional sense, indefinite as to time ; thus,

Present. వాఁడుపోవుచున్నాఁ
If he goes, he will meet him .
( నివీఁ డెదుగుపడును .....

రాజు లెస్సగా రాజ్య

Past .... ముపాలించె నేని ప్రజ
ప్ర జ If the king governs the kingdom

లుసుఖముగానుందురు well, his subjects will be happy .

in a present sense. .....

తి
రేపు నేనువచ్చితి నేనివా
If I should come tomorrow, I will
నితో మాట్లాడుదును ( speak with him .
{ in a future sense-

నునిన్నవానిఁ
జూచి ) I
తి నేనిమాట్లాడుదును If I had seen him yesterday , I would
have spoken to him.
in a past sense .

Future .. రేపువచ్చెద వేని నేనిచ్చెదను If you come tomorrow, I will give.

రాజు లెస్స గాఁబాలిం
If the king govern well, his subjects
Morist . చునేని ప్ర జ లు సు ఖ will be happy .
(
ముగానుందురు .......

నేవా
నితఁడు రేవువచ్చు....నేని } If he come tomorrou , I willgive .
్తును

In the common dialect, this form of the verb is not restricted to any time;
but , according to the context , represents a present, past , orfuture condi-
tional meaning .

నేనుయిచ్చి తేవాఁడువచ్చును ....... If I give , he will come.

రేపు నేనుయిచ్చి తేవాఁడువచ్చును IJI give tomorrow , he will come.

నిన్న నేనుయిచ్చి తేవాఁడువచ్చును If I had given yesterday, he reould

[have come

* by rule 360, యిచ్చి లే may be contractel into యిస్తే

 178 TELOOGOO GRA M M AR,

444 By using the conditional form of the verb o to be, commonly

written , with the present or past verbal participle of any other verb,

we give that verb a present or past conditional meaning ; thus,

డుయిప్పుడుముత్యాల పలాపమునకుపోతూవుం పే ఇతరులకం పేము ౧

To Lay if Devaduttu be now going to the pearl fishery, he will

arrive before all tue rest , శ్రీమ వాతలు ముందర నేవచ్చివుం

శ్రీమవాడలుముందర పేయీ నా సరుకు

లుయింత నిరాశ్రీకాబొయ్యేది లేదు If Europe ships had arrived before

this period, these articles would not have become so dear.

445 In the superior dialect, each ofthese conditional forms of the verb, by

affixing , represents the English subjunctive with the words although,

notwithstanding prefixed to it ; thus , ‡‡ although Icome,

came, or should come. The same meaning is expressed by the past re-
lative participle of the verb, with the addition of the indeclinable par-

ticle ను in the superior dialect , and ప్పటికెన్ని or గానిన్ని in the common

dialect ; thus వాఁడు , వచ్చినను . వచ్చినప్పటికిని or వచ్చినా దానిన్ని al-

though he come, came, or should come, avez az although

he give, gave, or should give; 353

& although he write,

wrote, or should write; when is added , the final of the past rela-

tive participle is lengthened ; thus , వచ్చి నా గానిన్ని never వచ్చిన గానిన్ని ;

and the past relative participle itself, with the final - thus lengthened , is

often used in this sense; as, D° c ) although he come, came, or

should come.

146 The conditional form of any verb may also be expressed in the common

dialect by adding to it's past relative participle the particles av and

నాయెనా ; as పినట్టయి తే చేసినట్టాయెనా if I, thou , he , she , it,

we, you , or they do. & ∞∞ is composed of the particle meaning so

as, as if, and the conditional form of the root to become;

టౌయెనా is composed of the same particle అట్టు , and ఆమెను the third
 OF SYNTAX . 179

person singular in the first form of the past tense of , with it's final v
changed into

When the condition or contingency is of a negative nature, it is express- 447

ed in the superior dialect by adding to the respective persons of the

negative aorist, and in the common dialect by affixing to the negative verbal
participle the common conditional form off to go or Go to be;
thus, in the superior dialect we say

…….. ........
…….………..if I do not beat , have not beaten , or shall not beat .
కొట్ట నేని .. ....
చేయలేని .. .... •ifthou dost not do , hast not done, or will not do .

Doc Ed.... if he does not bless, has not blessed, or will not bless ..
and in the inferior dialect

కొట్టకపో తే orకొట్టకుం టే చేయకపో తే or చేయకుంటే- దీవించక

పోతే or 5 Dow so
33 If I, thou, he, she, it, we, you , or they beat,

do, or bless have beaten , donc, or blessed - or shall beat, do , or bless.

CONSTRUCTION OF THE PARTICIPLES.

VERBAL PARTICIPLES.

There is no part of the verb of more frequent occurrence in Teloogoo

than the verbal participles, with the proper use of which, therefore, it is
ofgreat importance that the student should be well acquainted : they can
never, like the English participles , be used as adjectives, but must inva-

riably be governed by some tense of a verb .

The verbal participles are used in Teloogoo when we wish to express 448

any minor actions of the person who performs the chief action mention-
ed in the sentence. The verbal participles, denoting the minor actions
performed , are placed first in the sentence, and are governed by the verb
denoting the main action , with which the sentence elegantly terminates.

The peculiarity in these participles, therefore, is that they always refer 449
to some subordinate action , performed by that particular agent only
which is the nominative to the final governing verb, and never can ex-
press actions performed by others ,
 180 TELOOGOO GRAMMA R.

450 If the minor action be simultaneous with the main action in the sen-

tence, the present verbal participle is used ; if antecedent in point of time

to it, we use the past verbal participle ; and if it be of a negative nature,
the negative verbal participle is used .

The following examples are subjoined in illustration of these rules .

PRESENT.

451 శత్రుబాణంబులనుపొడి సేయుచుతనబాణంబులు శత్రువుల దేహంబు

ల నాటం జేయుచుశ త్రు బలంబులమనంబున కుభీతియుతనబలంబులమ
నంబునకును త్సాహంబును గలుగ జేయుచు అజు ౯ నుండు రణంబు సలి పె
Reducing to dust the arrows of his foes, piercing the bodies ofhis enc-
•mies with his own arrows, exciting a panic in the minds ofthe opponent's
forces, and animating the spirits of his own soldiers , Arjoona ruled the

battle. ప్రజలనుపాలించుచు పేదలనురక్షించుచు పెద్దలను సమ్మానించు

చుధ ర్మరాజుదొరతనముచే శెను . Fostering his subjects , protecting the
poor, and honoring the great, Dhurmarajah conducted the government .

కృష్ణుఁడుకోపాలులతోడనాడుచుబాడుచునవ్వుచుయమునాతటంబు ప్ర

వేశించెను Playing , singing , and laughing , with those who attended cine,
Krishna arrived on the banks of the river Jumna.
PAST.

452
విక్రమాకునాడువేటపోవ లెనని తలచిసారధిని పిలిపించి రధము తెమ్మ

నితన స్నేహితులతోగూడి అడవికి పో యెను Vikramarka,Juaving resolv-

ed to proceed to the chase, having sent for his charioteer, and having or-
dered his car , accompanied by his friends , proceeded to the forest . రా

ముడులంకలో ప్రవేశించిరాకు. సులను చంపి విభీషణునికి పట్టాభిషేక

ముచేశిది
దివ్యపుష్పకవిమాన మెక్కఅయోధ్యకు వచ్చెను . Rama , having
entered Ceylon, having killed the giants , having installed Vibhishana,
and having mounted the divine car, named Pushpuku, returned to Oude.

NEGATIVE.
453 బాణములను ధరించకకవచముతొడుగుకొ
పరిజనులను పిలవకధను

నక కొంటిగా శత్రువులతో అతడుయుద్ధము చే శెను Without calling his

retinue, without taking his bow and arrows, and without putting on his
armour, he singly fought with his enemies .
 OF SYNTAX. 181

It will be observed that, in each of these examples, the verbal partici- 454
ples are placed first in the sentence, and invariably denote actions subor-
dinate to that expressed by the verb at the conclusion of the period , by
which they are governed ; thus, in the three examples given of the present
verbal participle, ruled, conducted and arrived, are the main actions ex-

pressed ; and the participles reducing, piercing &c. fostering, protecting

&c. playing, singing &c . are all minor actions subordinate thereto . It will

further be perceived that the minor actions in question were all perform-
ed by that agent only which is the nominative to the governing verb .
Arjoona ruled, and it was he also that reduced and picreed ; Dhurmura-
jah conducted, and it was he also that fostered and protected ; Krishna
arrived, and it was he also that played and sung. Had any one else perform-
ed these minor actions, the verbal participles could not have been used.

As the minor actions of reducing and piercing were simultaneous with

the main action of ruling , the fostering aud protecting with that ofcon-
ducting, and the playing and singing with that of arriving , the present
verbal participles are used , in these cases : but, in the examples given of
the past verbal participle, it will be perceived that the resolution of Vik-
ramarka to proceed to the chase, his sending for his charioteer, and his
ordering his car , were all, in point of time, antecedent to the main ac-
tion of his proceeding to the forest ; so also Rama's entering Ceylon ,
killing the giants , &c . were actions performed by him previously to his
return to Oude ; hence, in these instances, the past verbal participle is us
ed ; and in the last example, because the minor actions are of a negative
nature, we use the negative verbal participle.

As an exception to the foregoing rules, it is to be observed that when 455

we speak of the time that has elapsed since any particular event occurred ,
the past verbal participle may be used absolutely, and then has a nomi-
native of it's own, independent of that of the final governing verb ; thus,

ÎJLysââ№aCD it is ten days since I came, literally, I hav-

ing come, ten days have passed ; here & e days is the nominative to the

final governing verb passed ; but I is the nominative to the

verbal participle having come, which is used absolutely .
 182 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR .

456
The verbal participles always govern the same case as the verb to which

they belong ; thus, వానికొట్టివచ్చినాడుhaving beaten him he came, వాని

being governed by the active verbal participles in the accusative case.

The foregoing remarks will give the student some idea ofthe importance
of the verbal participles in the construction of the Teloogoo ; they are pe-
culiarly well adapted to a language that abounds in discriptive passages ,
and the Student will occasionally find them carrying on and connect-
ing the sense for pages together, but suspending the full meaning until
the conclusion of the period . Hence, in some degree, the rare occurrence
of conjunctions in Teloogoo ; for the connexion between the subordinate
and chief action in a sentence, which is implied by the verbal participles,
often supersedes the use of them.

RELATIVE PARTICIPLES.
457
Separate relative pronouns are rendered unnecessary in Teloogoo, by
certain participles of the verb which have the power of the relative in-
herent in them, and which, like the adjectives, must always be
followed by some noun or pronoun .

458 The relative participles also denote the action of the verb to which
they belong ; and the present, the past, the indefinite, or negative parti-
ciple is used , according to the sense intended to be expressed .

459 The peculiarity of these participles consists in the relative inherent in

them invariably referring to the noun or pronoun which immediately
follows them , and which is also the agent to the action denoted by them,
unless the relative participle stands between two nouns or pronouns ; thus,

వచ్చుచున్నమనుష్యులు the persons that are coming , కాఁగుచున్నపాలు

the milk that boils. FELD the person that beat, 0DJO the
tyger that killed, owes the parrot that talks , talked, or
will talk, the man that writes , wrote, or will write, FOT

DÊ the county that is, was, or will not be to be seen, D

the country in which there is not, was not, or will not be a king.
 OF SYNTAX, 183

• If the relative participle of an active verb stands between two nouns 460
or pronouns, and the first be in the nominative case, it is the agent to the
action denoted by the participle, and the noun following, in whatever
case it may be, is the object affected by that action ; thus,
పులి the tyger that they killed, విూరు చూచిన వాఁడు the man that you

SAW, LED theperson that he called ; but if the first noun

or pronoun be in the accusative, it is the object affected by the action
which the active participle denotes, and the following noun, in whatever
case it may be, is the agent thereto ; 8o the tyger that

killed him , మిమ్ముని చూచినవాఁడు the man that saw you , వానిపిలి
DILD the person that called him. If, independently of the agent and
object, the relative inherent in an active participle, refers to the instrument,
place, or other subordinate correlative to the action which it denotes, the
agent is placed first in the nominative case, then the object in the accu-

sative, next the relative participle, and finally the instrument, place, or
other correlative to which it refers ; thus నేను పులిని చంబన కత్తిo చోటు

the sword with which , or the place in which, I killed the tyger; 20

వునిచ్చిన బ్రాహ్మణుఁడు the bramin to whom the king gave the cow . In
these examples 1 and the king are the agents, and therefore in the nomi-
native case, the tyger and the cow are the objects, and therefore in the accu-
sative, and the sword , the place, and the bramin are the subordinate corre-

latives referred to, and therefore placed immediately after the participle.

If the relative participle of a neuter verb stands between two nouns or 461
pronouns, the first must always be in the nominative case, because neu-
ter verbs cannot govern the accusative ; and it is also always the agent
to the action denoted by the participle, the noun following being merely
the subordinate correlative thereto ; thus, so Javes the house

in which I was,మీరునడుస్తున్నదో వ the road in which you walk , వాఁ

డుకూచుండిన స్థళ ము the place on which he sat, మీరుపడుకొన్నయి

the house in which you slept.

 184 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

462 The foregoing and following examples will best explain the manner
in which these participles supply, in construction , the cases ofthe relative
pronouns, and the mode in which they must be translated in English by

corresponding prepositions .
....... .
N: వారినిచంపినపులి
JODWOJ ..
... The tyger which killed them .

మిమ్మున చూచిన వాఁడు The man who saw you.

JOEY LODJLDA.... The person who called him .

G: WODDIJDD . The man whose clothes are torn.

పూలువారిన చెట్టు The tree of which theflowers are faded.

№ 7Javen .... The house of which the wall is inclined .

పంటపండిన చేను ........ The field of which the produce is ripe.

D: నేనుJY JL
వచ్చిన పని ........... The business for which 1 came.
J's Jave .... The house to which he came.
వాఁడువచ్చినయిల్లు .
Ac: .
Wow న పులి .... • The tyger which they killed.
వారుచంపి

మీరుచూచినవాఁడు . The man whom you saw .

DCL WEDJL ... The person whom he called.

Ab: 2:57 ...... The treefrom whichflowers were gathered.

నేను పండుకొన్నయి.ల్లు The luouse in which I slept ..

20058582 .... The knife with which the fruit was cut .

JJKO &Javes . The house on which it rained.

It is not easy, by any general rule, to define on what the case of the re-
463
lative depends; in rule 460 the mere substitution of the word a

place, for a sword, changed the relative with which, into for which;
and in rule 462 the substitution of ovey a house, for business, chang-
ed the relative for whichinto to which. In the examples given in 462 the
relative participle constantly stands between two nouns in the nominative

case, yet the relative itself,which in Teloogoo is inherent inthe participle,

 OF SYNTAX .. 185

is inthe genitive, dative, or ablative ; and it is curious that in Teloogoo

when an active participle is placed between two nominatives , the relative
in English must be in the objective case (see examples of the accusative ) ;
while ifthe objective case in Teloogoo precede an active participle , the
relative in English must be in the nominative case (see examples ofthe
nominative) . In rule 460 , the correlative a bramin is in the
nominative, yet from the nature of the verb to give, the relative to whom,
which is inherent in the Teloogoo participle, is in the dative case ; thus,
therefore, the case of the relative would seem to depend in some instances
on the nature, rather than the case of the following word ; in others , on
the case of the preceding word; and in some, on the nature of the verb

itself.

The common indefinite relative participle, by affixing , has often the 464
same signification as an abstract noun ; thus, using the abstract noun, we
maysay seoservice is excellent, or we may use the common re-
lative participle with , and says ; but, while the abstract
nouns are declined and construed as substantives, the relative participles as
well as the verbal nouns ( such as sew and § 352 ) being integ-
ral parts of the verb, although declined like nouns, are invariably constru- .
ed like verbs, and govern the same case as the verb from which they are de-
rived ; thus, using the abstract nouns , we say Dragona
your service is excellent, being placed in the possessive case ; but

when we useకొలి చేది - కొలుచుట or కొలవడము , we must place the pro-

·
noun in the accusative case and say మి మ్ములకొలిచేది మంచిది - మిమ్ము

ల కొలుచుట or మిమ్ములకొలవడము మంచిది to serve you, or the serving

you is excellent .

Nouns denoting the agent may be formed from every verb , by adding 465
to the relative participles , either affirmative or negative, the pronoun
forthe masculine, and for the feminine and neuter, in the singu-
lar number ; and for the masculine and feminine, and for the

neuter, in the plural ; thus, the man who beats, the beater,

the woman or the thing that beats, o ♫ the men or

 186 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR .

women that kill , the killers , చంపేది the woman or the thing that kills ,

కొట్టనివాఁడు the man who does not beat, has not beauten , or
. will not beat ,
కొట్టనిది the woman or the thing that does not beat , has not beaten , or
will not beat.

466 - o &&& c.
466 కొట్టేది - చంపేది & c. have , by some, been called infinitives ; but they

are no more infinitives than కొ ట్టేవాఁడు or చం పేవాఁడు . They are merely ,

as above stated, relative participles , with the pronouns and s

added to them ; tleus , చంపేవాఁడు is composed of చం పే the common in-

definite relative participle ofthe root o to kill, with the pronoun

added to it ; and ois composed ofthe same word wo with

the pronoun added to it; such compound words may be declined
through all the cases of the pronoun and in the following
manner .
SINGULAR.

M. N. & F.
N: చదివేవాఁడు .... .చదివేది

G: చదివేవాని-వానియొక్క… .చదివే- దాని దానియొక్క

D: చదివేవానికి .. .... చదివేదానికి

Acc : చదివేవాని ....... ...... చదివేదాని

Ab : చదివే దాని -లో- చేత- తో ..... చదివేదాని లో- చేత - తో

PLURAL.
M. & F. N.
N: చదివేవారు ......... ........ చది వేవి

G: చదివేవారి వారి యొక్క చదివే వాటి-వాటియొక్క-

D: చదివేవారికి .... .చదివేవాటికి

Acc : చదివేవారిని ......... .......

. చదివేవాటిని

Ab: చదివేవారి -లో - చేత - తో .......... చదివేవాటిలో - చేత - తో

So , also may we decline చంపుచున్నవాఁ డు and చంపుచున్నది- చం

పిన వాఁడు and చంపినది - చంపనివాఁడు and చంపనిది .
 OF SYNTAX . 187

GENERAL RULES .

In Teloogoo, the word agreeing with the verb is always in the nomi- 467

native case, and has generally the first place in the sentence, then follows
the word denoting the object governed by the verb, next any intermedi-
ate explanatory clause, and the verb itself closes the period .

A verb agrees with it's nominative in gender, number, and person ; 468
but when two or more nominatives agree with the same verb , it is placed
in the plural number, and agrees in gender with the masculine or femi-
nine nominative, in preference to the neuter; thus, XXXw Jović

బ్ర కాశించిరి the moon and the lotus shone, గొల్లలు పశువులు వచ్చిరి the
cowherds and cows came : but such forms of expression are very uncom-

mon, it would be more elegant to say HoF LajƐ the cow-

herds came with the cows ; and to express in Teloogoo that the king, the
minister, their horses, and elephants, all entered into the city, we never

should say రాజుమంత్రి యుగజతురంగంబులున గరము ప్ర వేశించిరి but

వారిగజతురంగంబులతో ప్రవేశించిరి they arrived with their elephants
and horses .

Iftwo or more nouns and pronouns, of different persons , connected by 469

a copulative conjunction are nominatives to the same verb, the verb is

placed in the plural number, but agrees with the second person in prefer-
నేనుమీరు
ence to the third, and with the first in preference to both; as,
DI, you, and he came.

Neuter verbs, from their nature, never can govern a noun or pronoun; 470

when made causal they are construed in the same manner as active verbs.
Active verbs govern substantives in the accusative case ; thus , we say 0
ముఁడు రావణుని సంహరించెను Rama killed Ravana ; but all nouns de-

noting inanimate objects , when governed by active verbs , may be placed

in the nominative, instead of the accusative case ; and, unless the use of

the nominative would render the meaning obscure, this is the more cor-

rect and elegant construction ; thus, రథమునెక్కెను or రథమెక్కెను

he mounted the ear , చదరంగమును or చదరంగము ఆడితిని I played
 188 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

at chess, నేనుకొండను or కొండచూస్తిని , I saw the mountain , తోటవా

డు చెట్లను or చెట్లు నాటి నాడు the gardener has planted trees .

471 The verbs పితుకు to milk , అడుగు to ask , దండగతీయు to amerce, గెల్చు
F.
to win, to rob, with a few others, may govern two accusatives ; but
if one of these accusatives denote an inanimate object, it may be placed

in the nominative instead of the accusative case , గొల్లవాడావునుపాలను

or పాలుపితి కెను the cowherd milked the cow ,దొరనునూరువరాలను or
FK Low he asked his master for one hundred pagodas ,

న్యాయాధిపతి నేరస్ధులనునూగువరాలను or వరాలుద్దఁడగతీ సెను the

magistrate amerced the guilty one hundred pagodas, IDJ²✩∞

వరాలను or వరాలు గెల్చి నాను I won from him one hundred pagodas,
దొంగలుభాటసాలను సొమ్ములను or సొమ్ములుదో చిరి the theives rob-
bed the travellers of their jewils .
472 Active verbs, when converted into causals, govern the noun which would
have been the agent in their active form in the instrumental ablative ;
the noun which would have been the object in their active form continues
in the accusative, or, if it denote something inanimate, in the nominative

case ; thus, వాడుయిల్లుకట్టినాడు he built a house, నేను వాని చేతయి

ల్లుకట్టి స్ర్తీని I caused him to build a house, నా కొమారుడుపుస్తకమువ్రా

సెను my son wrote the book , నేను నాకొమారుని చేతపుస్తకము వ్రాయి

Icaused myson to write the book, i so the tyger kill-

ed the sheep, నేనుపులి చేత మేళ నుచంపి వస్తిని I caused the tyger to kill the

sheep ,మీరుయీవతమానము చెప్పి తిరి you mentionedthis news , మీ

చేతయీవత F మానము చెప్పి ప్తిని I caused you to mention this news :

473 But verbs denoting to read, to sing, or to eat, with perhaps a few others,
when converted into causals , govern the noun which would have been the
agent in their simple form either in the ablative or accusative case ; ag

తన శిష్యులను or శిష్యువుల చేతపుస్తకములు చదివించెను the master caus-

ed his pupils to read books, గాయకులను or గాయకులచేత సంగీతము

పాడించిరి they caused the songsters to sing, బిడ్డలను or బిడ్డల చేత అన్న
NgDWOW he caused children to eat boiled rice.
 OF SYNTAX, 189

When a verb directly affects two nouns, the one denoting a whole, and 474
the other a part of that whole, the noun denoting the part stands in the
nominative, but the principal noun is placed in the genitive case ; thus,

గుఱ్ఱముల యొక్క తోకలుకోస్తారుthey are cuting off the tails of hor-

ses. The principal noun may also stand in the dative ; thus eIF
ళలుకోస్తారు , or the principal noun may stand in the accusative ; thus,
NON IWS and this, in Teloogoo, is considered the most
గుఱ్ఱాలను
elegant mode of expression.

The verb to be, which so often occurs in the English language, is gene. 475
rally omitted in Teloogoo : it may occasionally be used , but it is thought
more elegant to dispense with the use of it. The mode in which it is

omitted in Teloogoo when it is placed between an adjective and a substan-

tive noun or pronoun, has been already explained (see rule 424 ) . where it
would intervene in English between a substantive pronoun and a substan-
tive noun, it is also omitted in Teloogoo . Indeed, as the personal terminati-
ons of the verb are derived from the substantive pronouns , it does not seem
strange that these pronouns themselves should partake in some degree of
the essence of the verb.

In Teloogoo, when a substantive pronoun immediately precedes a sub-

stantive noun, the latter has the force of the present tense of the verb to be
inherent in it ; and ifthe pronounbe of the 1st or 2d person, the noun as-
sumes certain affixes.

If the pronoun be ofthe Ist person, the affix to the noun is in the sin-

gular, for nouns in or for nouns in v, and for nouns

ofany other termination; and in the plural, for all nouns.

Ifthe pronoun be of the 2d person, the affix to the noun is inthe singu-
lar, for nouns in or , for nouns in v , and for nouns in any

other termination ; and in the plural for all nouns.

If the pronoun be of the third person, the noun takes no affix .

190 TELOOGOO GBAMM A R.

The following examples will more fully explain this construction,

నేను కవిని
..... I am a poet .
నీవు క వివి ....... ... Thou art a poet .
వాఁడుకవి ........ He is a poct .
....•I am a bramin.
నేను బ్రాహ్మణుఁడను
Thou art a bramin
నీవు బ్రాహ్మణుఁడవు..

వాఁడు బ్రాహ్మణుఁడు . He is a bramin .

ఇది గుట్టుము .... . This is a horse.

mae ...... .... This is a cow .

....· I um a child .
నేనుబిడ్డను ....
.... Thou art a child.
నీవు బిడ్డవు .
He is a child .
వాఁడుబిడ్డ .....
మేము or మనము కవులము .... We are poets .
మీరుళవులరు ..... Ye are poets .
వారుకవులు ........ .... They are poets.
మేము or మన ము బ్రాహ్మణులము . .... We are bramins.

Ye are bramins ,
మీరు బ్రా ) హూణులకు
వారుబ్రాహ్మణులు . . They are bramins.
..... These are horses .
ఇవి Kుణములు ..
.. These are corws ..
ఇవి ఆవులు .....
మేము or మనము బిడ్డలము . .... We are children .

.... Ye are children.

విూరు బిడ్డలరు ...
.... They are children .
వారుబిడ్డలు

It will be observed that a poet, with the singular pronouns of the

1st & 2d persons prefixed to it , in the one case affixes ని , and in the other వి ,

because it terminates in ; but బ్రా హ్మణుఁడు a bramin ends in v , and

therefore affixes and , or rather changes the final v into these

terminations ; and as a child ending neither in 9 or , nor in v, takes

simply ను and వు .
 OF SYNTAX. 191

Each of these nouns, viz . కవి- బ్రాహ్మణుఁడు and బిడ్డ , with the pro ,
nouns ofthe 1st and 2d persons plural prefixed to it, takes and ~ ;

and none of them , when preceded by the pronouns of the third person , take
any affix whatever.

One verb governs another that refers to it, or depends on it, in the 476
infinitive; but the infinitive invariably precedes the governing verb, in-
stead of following it as in English ; thus, I wish to conquer myfoes &

వులను జయించనిచ్ఛయిస్తున్నాను , Ihoped to adore Shiva శివునిపూజిం

కోరితిని .

When the speaker states what another has said , he does not, as in En. 477
glish , use the infinitive mood ; he repeats the words of the original
speaker, adding the particle having said; thus, he told me to write,

would in the Teloogoo idiom be rendered namely

J
~ write thou, having said, he told; thus also , the

sentence వాడుసామును చంపమనివానికివుత్తరువుయిచ్చెను he ordered him

to kill the snake,consists of the words che, the snake, ọ

పుము kill thou, అని having said, వానికి to him ,వుత్తరువు order,యిచ్చెను
gave; Java and B preceding are changed, by the rules
for Sund, hi, to and respectively, for in the common
dialect the before the ofthe imperative is generally dropped in this
construction, for the sake of alliteration ; thus, also, we say I heard that
Devadutta went LLTID &c . In this sense, the rela-
tive participles , with either in the nominative or accusative case, are

sometimes elegantly used in Teloogoo ; as, దేవదత్తుడుపోయినది or పో

avITI DO & I, or the particle , hereafter mentioned, may be add-
ed to the participles joined with in the nominative case; thus, దేవద

IN CANDE TDDI heard that Devadutta went ; thus also, we

say విష్ణువు అవతరించపోతున్నాడని చెప్పుచున్నారు or అవతరించపొ

య్యేడి చెప్పుచున్నారు or అవతరించపొయ్యేదిగా చెప్పుచున్నారు they

affirm that an incarnation ofthe god Vishnoo is about to take place.
 192 TELOOGOO GRAMMA R.

478 e is used, in the same manner, when we address to a second person

orders to be delivered to a third, tell him to send oo , liter

ally పంపించుము send thou, అని having said , చెప్పు tell ; వ్రాయమని చె

ప్పు tell him to write, చదవమని ఆజ్ఞాపించు direct him to read & c.

479 When we wish to represent various minor actions performed by

others as contemporaneous with the chief action performed by a parti-
cular person mentioned in the sentence, a number of infinitives , denot-

ing these minor actions, are placed together in the sentence, which ter-
minates, in an elegant manner, with the verb denoting the main action

placed in it's appropriate tense ; thus, మిథిలాపురములో ఛప్పన్న దేశా

ధిపతులువచ్చి సేవింప- వరాంగనలు నాట్యమాడ- గాయకులు సంగీతము

చేయ - భేరి మొదలుగాగలవాద్యములు వాయించ- దేవతలు పుష్ప వస్తూ
ముగురియింప - వందిమాగధులుస్తో త్రముచేయ - పట్టణములో నుండే
జనులుప్ర మోదముబొంద - దశరథుండు తన పుత్రుండు రామునికివివా
LOWThDDT . While the rulers offifty six countries , hav-

ing arrived at the city of Mid,hila, were in attendance, while fair dam-
sels sported in the dance, white choiresters chaunted songs, while they
sounded the great drum and other musical instruments, while the gods
showered flowers, while the bards and genealogists proclaimed pan-

egyrics, while the people of the city were filled with joy, the king Dasa-
rad, ha celebrated the nuptials ofhis son Rama . Even in familiar conver-
sation this mode of expression is sometimes used .

480 If the infinitive of a verb with the particles added to it, be twice re-

peated , it denotes progression ; thus , అతు రాలు వ్రాయగా వ్రాయగాకు

దురును writing improves gradually as we write, చదవగా చదవగా తెలు
సును it will be understood gradually by reading, నడవగా నడవగా దోవ
జరుగును as we walk the roud gradually shortens, వస్తూ ముకురియగాకు
రియగా చెరువులు నిండును as it rains the lakes will be graduully fiued .

The root to buy, conjugated through all its moods, tenses, and

persons, is frequently added to the past verbal participle of another verb,

 OF SYNTAX . 193

when it is intended to restrict the action denoted by that verb exclusively

to the benefit of the agent ; and often in the superior, but always in the
inferior dialect, final ofthe past verbal participle is changed to when
కొను is thus added ; as చేసికొను or చేసుకొను to do for one's own benefit,
25I or I is to write for one's own benefit ; thus we

say సినాను I wrote , వ్రాసికొన్నాను or సుకొన్నాను 1 wrote

for my own benefit ; చేస్తాను I do, చేసికొంటాను చేసుకొంటాను I

do for my own benefit ; చెప్పి నాడు he told, చెప్పికొన్నాడు or చెప్పుకొ

Dhetold for his own benefit. Sometimes, however is added
merely for the sake of elegance; thus we may say either a or
wwwvous oI saw the letter ; at other times, it alters the sig-
nification of the verb to which it is added in a manner scarcely to be de-

finedవాడుచక్క గానడుస్తాడుhe walks well, వాడు చక్క గానడుచుకొం

he behaves well; it occasionally makes a neuter verb active
లిపిన ది it was understood to me , నేను తెలుసుకొంటిని I understood ,తీయు
to draw , to pull, తీసుకొను to bring , మ్రొక్కు to prostrate , మ్రొక్కుకొ
to invoke & c.

The present verbal participle of a verb prefixed to any tense of the verb 481

By to come denotes that the action expressed by the participle is habi-

tual or of long continuance ; thus, అతడుమాయింటికివస్తూవచ్చెను he
roas in the habit of coming to my house, వాడుచక్కగానడుచుకొంటూవ

చ్చెను he continued to behave himself well,యీభూమిలో మునువు ధాన్య

Z Low Wygrain formerly used to be produced in this land,
రాజుధ ర్మముగా రాజ్యపరిపాలన చేస్తూ వచ్చెను the king continued to

govern the kingdom in a just manner ,మీరుజాబులు పంపి స్తూరావ లె

ను you must continue sending letters.

It has already been stated that active verbs become passive by adding 482

to the infinitive the verb to fall, to suffer. By affixing this verb to

the nominative case of neuter nouns, particularly to such as denote any
bodily suffering or mental affection, a compound verb is formed of a neu-
ter signification ; and if the noun end in 2 , this termination may be
 194 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

changed into o, or may be dropped altogether ; the latter is the more

common form ; thus, from fear is formed or
యం పడు or భయపడు to fear ; from దెబ్బ a blow comes8దెబ్బ పడు to be
beaten &c . But if instead of the neuter form , the active form w
be added to the substantive, it makes an active verb ; thus , from 25

fear comes tofrighten, and from o3w glad-

nesscomes సంతోషపడు to be pleased , and సంతోష పరుచు to please .

483 The verb which properly signifies to deliver any thing from one's

own possession into that ofanother, although it may be translated in English

bythe verb to give, is not in Teloogoo synonymous with that english
verb . It cannot be used unless the thing delivered is taken by the receiver ;
for example, if a bramin invites another to dine with him, we cannot in
Teloogoo say with propriety that he gave him boiled rice అన్నమిచ్చెను ;

because the boiled rice is not delivered into the hands ofthe bramin invited ,

but_only placed on a leaf before him. We must therefore say &≈2 2

he placed rice before him . But if he were to give the food to
his palanqueen bearer, who, being ofan inferior cast, is not allowed to pol-
lute the house of a bramin by eating in it , he does not place the boiled
rice before him, but delivers it into his hands, and in this case therefore we

might say ఆ బ్రా హ్మ డుతవబోయీకిఅన్నమిచ్చెను that bramin gare

rice to his palanqueen bearer. In the same manner, ifyou give grass to a
horse, you cannot say in
in Teloogoose సువుయిస్తిని
Hank? I I gave
gave grass to
to

the horse , but నేను xుఱ్ఱానికిక సువు వేస్తిని I threw grass to the horse,

OF PARTICLES OR INDECLINABLE WORDS .

484 There are scarcely any proper adverbs in Teloogoo , jus now,

ప్పుడు then , ఎప్పుడు when , నేడు to day, నిన్న yesterday ,రేపు tomorrow,
& c are not adverbs ,but substantive nouns which are declined: adverbs how-
ever are easily made, or rather their want is supplied , by adding to any
noun substantive or adjective the infinitive , from the verb to be-
 OF SYNTAX. 195

come, which, following a nominative, is changed into , according to the

rules given in Chapter Second ; thus,

from ....
...... happiness is derived ......happily.

.......Goz ... beauty... · voŏ..beautiful

ly.
.........
.. గొప్ప . ・great….. .......greatly.
గొప్పగా .
·ES quickness · ..త్వర గా .......quickly .
WO... ........ cold .....
.
.చల్లగా... coldly .
...
··soft, slow……..
..... తిన్న .. ... తిన్నగా ...... softly, slowly.
...
................... sweet ·········
తియ్య .........sweet- ... LSTO .... sweetly.

bitter. ....... bitterly .

$

గాలిచల్ల గాకొట్టుతున్నది the wind blows coldly , గుఱ్ఱముతిన్న గాన

డుస్తున్నది the horse goes slowly .
It is to be remarked that can never be added to the nominative 485

with which the verb agrees, but only to an adjective or substantive quali-
fying that nominative. If I would express that the water ofthe sea is salt,
to the word denoting salt I may add , and say సము ద్రపునీళ్లువుప్పు

nominative to the verb, it only qua-

గావున్నవి ; ; because salt is not the
lifies the water of the sea which is the nominative. But if I wish to state
that there is salt water in the sea, the sentence refers not to the essence or

quality ofthe water, but to it's existence; therefore without adding I

should say సముద్ర ములో వుప్పునీళ్లు వున్నవి : we say ఆపుష్ప ములువా స

3 thoseflowers are fragrant, but when we merely assert that

there is fragrance in flowers we say పుష్ప ములయందు వాసన వున్నది .

Besides converting substantives and adjectives into adverbs, when 486
added to them may deuote resemblance, similitude, &c. JL2

చిచూసేపర్వతములుధూమముగా అగు పడుతున్నవి if mountains be

viewed from a distance, they appear like smoke.

The infinitive , added to the pronoun , also represents the 487

English expressions spontaneously, of his own accord ; for example,

 196 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

supposing a person to die voluntarily by eating poison, if I wish to as-

certain whether he died of any disease, or of his own accord , I should

say in Teloogoo అతడురో గ ము చేత చచ్చెనా లేకతనకుతానే or తాను

గా నేచచ్చెనా , I might also say తా నేచచ్చినా , but తానే is liable to

equivocation , for besides meaning spontaneously in contradistinction to

forcibly , it may likewise signify that he himself died in contradistinction

to any other person.

488
Sometimes the past verbal participle or infinitive of a verb is used as
an adverb ; thus,

from the root...... to turn ... comes .... x..or.. 8 .... again .

..................... to return ......

. ·· or..L
or ··Lɔ ..... again.
…………..again.
నిండు
........ ... DO ........to fill Do Torc ... much.
489
The following Sanscrit particles cannot properly be termed adverbs,
but they enter so frequently into the composition of 5 words that
some notice of them seems to be necessary ; and I know not that I can
offer the few observations which I have to make, respecting them in a

more appropriate place. They are prefixes compounded with substan-

tives, adjectives, or verbs of Sanscrit derivation .

ప్ర denotes excess ; as హష joy , ప్రహషన్ excess of joy , ధనము

wealth, great wealth.
is a privative implying oppossition, reverse ; as DL victory, 35
రాజయము defeat .

is also a privative ; as fame, infamy, xXL vic-

tory , అపజయము defeat, ధనము money , అపధనుఁడు a poor man .
is an incrementive denoting also goodness , or connexion; as
తుఁడు udored , సమచితుఁడు well adored , వాదము declamation , సం
Lan argumental dispute.
అను signifies after , near, each, every ; as సరణము going , అను సర
ణము following , వనము a garden , అనువనము near a garden , జన
ము a day , అనుదిన ము every day .
 OF SYNTAX.
197

అవ is a privative, meaning also below ; as , తరణము going , అవతరణము

descending ; నత ము bent , అవనత ము bent down ;

మాన ము honour , అవ
మానము dishonour .

25.25are privatives, meaning also going through, the whole ; as , Ố ∞∞∞

juice, నీర సము juiceless ; గ్రామము a village , ని గ్రా రా ముఁడు a man

who went through a village; &5 L given, DLF H30 given altogether.

దుర్- దు స్ ill, bad, reverse ; as, కర్మము busincss, దుష్కర్మము bad business ;

గమ్యము passable, దుగ F మము impressable .

signifies excess , variety, badness; it also denotes opposition; as, VẤN
victory , విజయము a great victory ; విధము manner or method , వివిధ ము
various methods;రూపము form , విరూపము deformity ;వాదము talk-

ing , వివాదము a quurrel ; మలము jfülth , విమలము purity .

signifies as far as, from, every where; as, o the end, So

ము as far as the end ;మూలము the root , ఆమూలము from the root .

excess, within ; as 5JJtorturing, D555L killing.

అధి means above, excess ; as, ఆహినుడు sitting , అధ్యాసేనుడు sitting upon
any thing; DLL a foot, FL a foot over.
e in most Sanscrit words adopted into Teloogoo is a mere expletive.

అతి means much, beyond moderation ; as , మధురము sweet , అతిమధుర

ము very sweet; వేల a

a limit, అతి వేలము beyond the limit; భోజనము

eating, fx eating immoderately.

సు good , well ; as, పథము a road , సుపథము a good roal ; గుణము the
disposition , a good disposition or temper .

ఉద్ denotes up, beyond ; as ధృత ము held, ఉద్ధృతము held up; స్థానము

not moving & $300

rising ; e limit, & beyond the limit.

అభి before ; as ముఖము a face, అభిముఖ ము before the face; సూర్యు

డు the sun, అభిసూర్యము before the sun.

 198 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

again, in return, back, each , opposite, in exchange, towards ; as,

వనము a garden , ప్రతివనము each garden ; ఉపకారము kindness ,

MaSă 58 20 areturn of kindness; & a complainant, IT&

a defendant; సూర్యుడు the sum , ప్రతిసూర్య ము towards the sun ; విష్ణు

వు Vishnoo , ప్రతివిష్ణువు a second Vishnoo .

పరి signifies well ; as , ఆలోచన consideration, పర్యాలోచన conider-

ing well, deep reflexion; 45 a trial, L885 well tried.

ఉప ncar ; as గ్రామము a country , ఉప గ్రామము ( nvirons.

490 Conjunctions are seldom used in Teloogoo ; they are necessary chiefly
in works on science, where a chain of reasoning is required for the eluci-
dation of some position ; but in short detached maxims regarding moral
conduct , and in poetical compositions, which form the principal part of
Teloogoo literature, the frequent use of conjunctions would destroy that
simplicity and elegant conciseness of phrase, which is the great charac-
teristic of the language .

491 In the superior dialect, is equivalent to the english conjunction

——— ०६
and, but it is added only to words ending in or 2. This

particle being included in the class of words termed drootuprucrootica,

is liable to all the changes mentioned in the second chapter of this work
as peculiar to words of that description . If the word end in any other
vowel thanthose abovementioned, the drootuprucrootica affix is added to
it, instead ofX , to express the conjunction and ; thus, TEXN- IWD
a carriage, a bullock, and a sheep.

492 In the common dialect , or నిన్ని are added to words ending

in &
or 2; and - or నున్ను to words in any other terminations,
to.words

to express our conjunction and; however is seldom affixed to any nouns

6
except to those in v ; if affixed to a word ending in long & requires it to
- ·
be shortened into ; and as well as - always lengthen

the final vowel of the word to which they are affixed ; thus,
 OF SYNTAX. 199

ట్టే నున్ను a staff, a whip , and a stick; బండిన్ని గా

-కకట్టే
న్నుకొరడానున్ను .

దీన్ని బాగావున్నవి the cart and thc carriage are in good order ; రాముడు

న్నులక్ష్మణుడున్ను యుద్ధముచేశిరి Rama and Lutchupana fought. A ter-

minational emphasis , or the lengthening of the final vowel, is also equi-

valent to the conjunction ; asకొయ్యకొరడా కట్టె a staff, a whip, and a

stick; సేనలోయేనుగులూ గుఱ్ఱములూ ఒంటెలూరధములూ అన్ని

వున్నవి elephants , horses, camels , and cars are all in the army , యి ౧

గ్లూతోటలూదొడ్లూ నేలలుయాలంబడ్డని houses, gardens, godowns ,

and lands, are sold by auction .

The abovementioned particles which are equivalent to the conjunction 493

and may be affixed to all , to any, or to none of the objects enumerated ; but

in the case last mentioned , the final vowel must be lengthened , or pronoun-
-S
ced with emplıasis ; thus , నేనున్ను నా స్నేహితుడున్ను తిగుపట్టూరికిపోతి

మి or నేను నా స్నేహితుడున్ను తిరువట్టూరికపోతిమి or నేనూనా స్నేషి

తుడూతిగువట్టూరికపోతిమి I and my friend went to Treevutoor .

When we wish particularly to mark the nature, rather than the num- 494
ber ofthe objects enumerated , not saying , forexample, two hills , but these
are both hills; then, some of the participles abovementioned must be added
to the word denoting the number, or the emphasis must be laid on the

Jast syllable of it ; thus, అదుగో పొగవ తెఱగుపడుతున్నవే అవి రెండు

or రెండూ - కొండలు those are both mountains that appear yon-
న్నూ
der like smoke ; if we said Bosode it would mean that there are
two mountains, not that both are mountains.

When we allude to the whole of any number of objects, some ofthe 495

participles abovementioned must be added to the word expressing the

object, not to the word expressing the number ; thus , if I were to say
I am wounded in one of my hands, one is not here a complete number, be-
cause I have two hands ; therefore, without adding the particles above-
 200 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

mentioned , I must say నాకు వళ చేతిలో గాయముతగిలినది ; but if both

my hands were wounded, then I must add some of those particles to the

Teloogoo word denoting hands; thus, నా రెండుచేతులలో నున్ను గాయ

257 ; for if I did not add 201 here, it would be understood that

I had more than two: thus also , if I say JoWxH 52

WvX8 గెత్తి FavID four horses ran out of my stable, as
లుపరి RD is not

added, it is understood that I have yet more horses ; for if these four were

all that belonged to me, then I should have added ~ , and said

లాలో నాలుగుగుఱ్ఱములున్ను పరిగెత్తిపోయినవి .

496 and its synonymous particles abovementioned often represent the

English words also, even & c ; thus, this also is mine. Hence,

if be added to the word one thing, and a negation follow, it

expresses the English word nothing ; thus ♫ ED FLD I will do

nothing; in other words I will not do even one thing. These particles fol-

lowed by a negation , are likewise equivalent to our negatives neither,

nor &c ; thus, DoD, TLBARD, FL it is neither good, nor bad.

If these particles are added to any interrogative pronoun or adverb begin-

nig with the letter , more commonly written 3 , they denote universality;

thus, ఎక్కడ where ? ఎక్కడనున్ను every where ; ఎవరు who ? ఎవరున్ను

all; des how? De any how, at any rate ; Dă when ?

Jajo z always &c . This is also the case when these particles are
added to the past relative participles of verbs, with an interrogative pro-

noun prefixed ; thus, వాడు ఎక్కడవుంది నానున్ను wheresoever he may

be , వాడుఎట్లా వ్రాశినానున్ను housoever he may write & c . It will be

observed that in this construction the final ofthe past relative participle

is lengthened to .
 OF SYNTAX. 201

The following is a list of the most common interjections in Teloogoo . 497

అయ్యో
express as8 అయ్యో & c . ఆయన కొమా
అయ్యయ్యో
pain , grief , or compas- రుడునష్టమైనాడు alas ! his son
అయ్యయో sion ......
కటకటా .... is dead ,
అకటా .... ( as ఓ హె or ఓ హో పోతమద
ఓహో .... శ ౯ నముచేతధన్యుడ నైతిని ah !
} astonishment ..
.. how fortunate have I been to
meet you.

ఛీ . as ఛీ or ఛీఛీ అవతలపో pshaw !

aversion .... go a long , ఛీ or ఛీఛీవాడుదు .
$$ ........... మా ౯ Éుగొడు pshaw ! the fellow
Lis u rascal .
శాబాసు
as శాబాసుయితడు యెంత సమ
భరా
-praise , excellence .....
మఝా థు ౯ డుయెంతగట్టివాడు bravo !
ap how clever and expert he is.
"
....
అద్దర
( సద్దుకుయ్యకండి hush ! do not
..............hush ! silence ! ....
సద్దు ....... make such a noise.

( as అహహయెంత వేడుక how de-

అహహా ..... - admiration.....
lightful ! how charming !

-In Teloogoo there are three final significant letters , which may be added 498
1
to all words : namely . to denote interrogation , to express doubt or

ignorance , and S to mark emphasis .

— is purely interrogative , and should always be affixed to the word_499

donoting the object respecting which the question is asked . For example,
in cross-questioning a witness , a person may wish to ascertain whether
he did , or did not go to the house of the complainant on a certain day: in
this case he would ask, నీవు పోయిన ఆదివారమునాడువాడయింటికిపో
యినావా
av did you go last Sunday to the house the complainant? but ifhe
knew that he went to some place, and wished to ascertain particularly

whether it was to the complainant's house or not , in this case he would

 202 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

ask నీవుపోయిన ఆదివారము నాడువారియింటికాపోయినావు Was it

to the house of the complainant that you went last Sunday 2 Supposing
he is aware that the witness went to the house of the complainant, but .

wishes to ascertain the precise day, he would in that case ask, and
ఆదివారమునాడా వాడియింటికిపోయినావు Was it on Sunday last,

that you went to the complainant's house ? Again he might have learned
that some one went to the house in question, but might be desirous to as-
certain whether it was the witness or not, he should then ask Fav
నఆదివారము నాడువాదియింటికిపోయి నాపు was it you that went to

the complainant's house last Sunday ? It is however to be observed that

to words which are already of an interrogative nature, such as the pronouns
beginning with the letter , more commonly written , the significant
letter is never added.

500 6
denotes ignorance or doubt, and must be added to the particular
word expressing that of which we are ignorant, or of which doubt is en-
tertained : for instance, supposing I am in doubt whether you have, or have

not given me money ; to the affirmation you have given I add the parti-

cle ~ and say నీవు నా కురూకలుయిచ్చినా పూ : but if Iam certain of hav-

ing received some money from you , and am in doubt respecting the quan-
tity, not recollecting whether it was Fanams, or Pagodas that you gave
me, thenthe must not be added to the verb, because I have no doubt but

you gave something; it must be added both to the word expressing Fanams
and to that denoting Pagodas, because I stand in doubt respecting both,

నీవు నాకురూకలో వరాలో యిచ్చినావు ; again , if I am aware both of the

payment, and of the amount, and only doubt whether you gave it to me,

or to some one else, then I add the to the word denoting to me

కోరూకలుయిచ్చినావు ; lastly, ifI am certain that I myself received the

money, but am in doubt whether I received it from you , or from another,
then the ~ is added to the word thou నీ పూనాకురూకలుయిచ్చినావు . I n

this manner, the peculiar object of doubt or interrogation is at once

clearly defined in Teloogoo .
 OF SYNTAX. 203

The particle added to the common conditional form of the verb 501
ending in , with the drootuprucrootica affix 5becomes and re-

presents our phrases butif, on the contrary, should it & c; &c , thus,

వషముకురియకపో తేజనులున శింతురు - వషణ ముకురిస్తే

మోజను
లుసుఖమునుపొందుదుగు If it does not rain the people will suffer se-
verely; but if it rains they will be happy.
502
In Teloogoo there are many interrogatives, especially among the pro-
nouns , which commence with the letter , or as it is commonly written ;
thus, who ? Je how ? Jo , డ where ? &c . if ~ be added to

these words the interrogation is converte 1 into an affirmation of ignorance

or doubt. A person asks another who is there ? the an-

swer may be I do not know, or am in doubt who he is . In the same

manner, we say I do not know, or am in doubt where
JB_5

Jhc is , ఇక్కడయెవరోని ద్రపోచున్నారు some pcople whom I do not know

are sleeping here.

- is used to express emphasis, and is added to any word on which 503

particular stress is intended to be laid , nearly in the same manner as the
significant letters —
~ and ~ ; thus , STO
; thus, నాడుమనతో కూడా తోటకు వచ్చి
we call the very man who came with us that day to the

garden ; వాడుమహాయోగ్యుఁడేయేలకొట్టితిరి he is indeed a worthy

man , wherefore did you strike him ? నీవు నిండా పూపు X లవాడ వేవా
° £ 0ZX
25 3 thou in particular art a patient man, why didst

thou quarrel with him ? మీరుకోటకుపోతి రేఅప్పుడు నేనువచ్చితిని at the

very time you went to thefort I came here. This particle is also used when

we wish to select one out of many objects ; for instance, supposing that
there are many ripe mangoes upon a tree from which thegardener is pluck-
ing them, and that I ask for one, but that he throws down another which I
did not want, I reject it, and pointing with my finger to the particular man-

goe which I wanted , say & cut and throw me this very

one. I could not say this if there were only one mangoe on the tree.
 204 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR .

504 The final significant affix in the latter part ofa sentence, preceded
by the final significant letter in the former part of it, have the corres-

pondence of the English as and so ; thus, మీరుయే ప్ర కార ముఆజ్ఞాపిం

చితిరో ఆ ప్రకార మేచేసినాను as you directed , so have I done ;

మీరు

యెట్లా చెప్పి నారో

నేను అట్లాగే వ్రాప్తి ని as you suid,so have I written.
505
the negative verbal participle derived from the negative
aorist of the root sex signifies without; and the negative ver-

bal participle derived from the negative aorist'of the root

signifies besides; thus, ఆయుధములు లేకశత్రువులను జయించ గూడదు

withont arms it is impossible to conquer enemies ; ఇండ్లుతోటలు కాకర్
$
2 ముయెంతవున్నది besides houses and gardens how much is there in

ready cash ? Both 3 and by the addition of So the infinitive

of the root o to be frequently become o కాకుండ without
oro
any alteration in their meaning.

506 means why ? It may be placed either before or after a verb : if

placed first the verb agrees in person, number, and gender with it's
nominative ; thus, యేల చూ పైని why did I look ? యేలచూచినాఁడు
why did he look ? why did they look ? But if this

particle follows the verb it is placed in the infinitive, which, being a droo-
tuprucrootica, takes on before the of e, and it is thus used promis-
cuously for every person, number, or gender; thus, ca or JX

చూడ నేల why did I, he, or they look ? నేను నీవు - వారు అది & c . రానేల
Se &c, why did I, thou, they, she, or it &c come, go &c ?

507
ఐనను or ఐనప్పటికిన్నీ , the forms ofthe root అవు denoting althougī
I, thou, he &c, become, ifplaced at the commencement of a sentence, repre-

sent the English word nevertheless ; ఐనప్పటికిన్నీ వాడు సమథుడు

nevertheless he is a clever man. But if either of these phrases is placed
after two or more words in the same sentence, it will have the effect of the

disjunctive conjunctions either , or ; thus, we say సగకు లైన ప్పటికిన్ని

$
25 8 0 av weither goods or ready money. The same

particles ifnot repeated , but following one word only in a sentence signify
 OF SYNTAX. 205

at least; thus, పదివ రాలయినప్పటికిన్నీయిప్పించు give me at least ten

Pagodas. Lastly, if any ofthese phrases are added to interrogatives begin.
ning with the letters or , more commonly written or 3 , they
give such words a peculiar signification which will be best understood by

the following examples ; ఏవిధము in what manner ? ఏవిధ మైన ప్పటికిన్ని

in what manner soever ; ఎట్లు horu ? ఎ టైనప్పటికిన్ని how soever ; ఎప్పుడు

when? I when soever : the power of these phrases differs essen-
tially from the power of &c added to similar words ; both imply uni-
versality, but these phrases restrict the meaning to one ofall, & c include

all collectively ; thus, ఎప్పుడున్ను always, at every time ; ఎప్పు డైనప్పు

టికన్ని at what time soever ; ఎక్కదనున్ను every where, ఎక్కడ నైనప్పటికీ

న్ని where soever ; ఎవ్వడున్ను Every one, ఎవ్వ డైనప్పటికిన్ని whosoever .

అవును - కాదు - లేదు .

Besides the two senses in which లేను- లేవు- లేఁడు- లేదు- లేము లేరు , 508
the aorist of theroot & ex is used , as explained in rules 437 and440,
the neuter of the third person singular is used in two other senses,

1st, placed after a nominative of any of the three persons and the in-
finitive of a verb, it is a simple negative participle denying the action of
the verb, with reference to the past time only; thus, &c z Já

I &c didnot do this use of the third person neuter must be distinguished
from that ofthe whole tense before mentioned ; thus,

.... I cannot do.......... I did not do.

నీవు చేయ లేవు...... Thou canst not do నీవు చేయ లేదు .... Thou didst not do .

వాఁడుచేయ లేఁడు He cannot do .... వాఁడు చేయ లేదు He did not do.
మేముచేయ లేము .We cannot do.... మేముచేయ లేదు We did not do .

మీరు చేయ లేరు …. You cannot do ....మీరు చేయ లేదు You did not do .
. They cannot do - వారు చేయ లేదు They did not do .
వారు చేయ లేరు -

in the onecase the auxiliarly లేను &c agrees with it's nominative in gen-
der, number, and person ; in the other 3 is indeclinable.
 206 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

2ndly. is used independently by itself as a simple negative particle

denying existence, applicable to all persons, without reference to any time,

and opposed to which denies essence, quality &c : the contrary ofthe
first is , the irregular third person singular of the affirmative aorist
ofthe root sex ; the contrary of the second is the word , the third
person singular of the affirmative aorist of E to become. If I ask is
there a house here ? I enquire respecting existence, and the answer, if
there is one, is ; if not, 3. But if I see something at a distance,
and, doubtful not of its existence but of its essence or quality, ask, is that

a house the answer, if it is not, is ; if it is, ega.

509 అవును indeed may be considered to represent the English word yes, be-
ing constantly used as an affirmative reply to questions of all kinds, and
not restricted like its negative to a denial ofessence or quality ; for
example, yes may be used in reply to any of the following interro-

gations . వాడువూరినుంచి వచ్చినాడా has he returned from the coun-

try ? ఈ కాలంవానలు కురిస్తేమంచిదా uould rain be seasonable at this

time ? ఈ రాజుధర్మాత్ముడా is this King virtuotus ? మీకువిద్యచ

ధువుకోవ లెననిఅ పేతువున్నదా do you desire to learn science ? మీ

దేశమందువషణము సమృద్ధిగా కురి శిన దా have you had abundance

of rain in your country ? దక్షిణ దేశమందు కావేరీ ప్రవాహమువచ్చిన
☎have thefreshes ofthe Cauvery reached the southern districts? Déc
దుమీకొమారుఁడా is he your son ?
?

510 Nowithstanding maythus be used as a general affirmative, its

use is properly confined to affirmations respecting quality or essence only ;
thus, if I ask, isthere rice in the house ? I enquire about the existence of
some thing, not respecting its quality; therefore, ifthere is, althongh we

may say అవును yes , it will be more correct to answer కద్దు, or వున్నది ,
there is: but if seeing a basket with something in it, I ask, is that rice in the
basket ? I enquire respecting the essence or quality of something, not re-

garding its existence, and if it is rice, yes is the only proper answer;
if it is not, W.
 OF SYNTAX 207

Such is the use of these words when used independently by themselves, 511
but when follows a noun in the common dialect, it does not
signify yes or it is, but it will or may be and if used in speaking of
the present time, it also implies doubt ; thus if to my question, what is

there ? they answer it may be rice ; this is the same as say-

ing, I cannot speak with certainty, but I think, or have understood, that
it is rice. The particle do it is said or they say, is often used in this
sense; thus, if I ask, is Gooroomoorty here? and the answer is avo
a this means, I do not know, but they say that he is gone home.

When used in speaking of any future event, the word may imply

either doubt or certainty ; for example, should I ask DüáJ

కాలం టే తెలుగులో సమథుఁడవు నా if he take pains and read , will he

become well versed in Teloogoo , and am answered it
means either that he will certainly become well versed in Teloogoo, or that
hemay perhaps become well versed in Teloogoo : a prevaricating witness
often attempt to shelter himself under the equivocal meaning of this
may
word.
లేకపోతే.

This phrase represents the English wordotherwise ; 512

సరి if you give it, tis well, లేకపోతేనేను బలవంతముగా తీసుకొంటు
న్నా otherwise, I will take it forcibly.It consists of the negative verbal

participle 35 , derived from the negative aorist of sex , pre-

fixed to the conditional form of the verb to go, used here merely as

an expletive ,
వర - మట్టు..

These words imply a term, or limit, they are generally used in the Da- 513

tive case, and often with the conjunction న్ను ; thus , వరకు or వరకున్ను
and మట్టుకు or మట్టుకున్ను signify until ; as ఈ గడియవరకు or వరకు

న్ను-మట్టుకు or మట్టుకున్ను until this hour, hitherto ; వర may also be used

inthelocalablative ; thus, ఈవరలో వాణ్నిచూడ లేదు I never saw him

till this time; we say also 20 this much, thus far ; Vosz

that much, as far as that ; how much ? how far; &c.

¿
 208 TELOOGOO GRAMMA R.

మాత్రము .

514 This word applies to all computation , whether by number, weight, or

యీపొలములో
measure; thus, పండేధాన్యముయెంతమాత్రము what
quantity of grain is produced inthis field ? యీ బంగారు యెంతమాత్ర
ము what is the weight of this gold ? యీబియ్యముయెంతమాత్రము
how much is this rice నిడుపుయెంతమాత్రము /how long వెడల్పు యెం
తమాత్రము how broad ? పొడుగుయెంతమాత్రము how high కి లోతు

యెంతమాత్రము how deep ? The word యెంత alone is also used in

the same sense; thus , యీ బంగారుయెంత యీ ధాన్యముయెంత నిడుపు
యెంత &c . but-so far as regards.number , the .collective pronouns often
represent యెంత &c ; thus ,మనుష్యులుయెందరు how many persons ? రూ

కలుయెన్ని how many fanams సంవత్సరములుయెన్ని how many yearse

కాని .
515 The participle from the root to become, according to circum-
stances represents the English words either, or, unless, only, cxcept, al-
మీదగానీ కాగిదముమీదగానీవ్రాయి write either
though; asతాటాకు
on cadjuns,oron paper ; వాడుయిక్కడికివస్తేనేకానియీపని కానేరదు
this business cannot be effected , unless hecome here ; పుస్తక మునీకే

కానివానికివ్వను 1 will give this book to you only , not to him ; వానివల్ల
గానియీపని చక్క బడదు this business cannot be well done except by him ;
మెడబట్టితో సినాగానీ వాడుపోడు although you push him by the neck,
he will not go. It will here be observed that when follows words be-
longing to the class drootuprucrootica it is charged into ; and when

it means either , or , or although, the final 9 is lengthend into 5 .

 APPENDIX .

OF NUMBERS.

' IST CARDINAL NUMBERS.

The cardinal numbers in Teloogoo, may, like adjectives, te prefixed

to substantives, or like nouns, be used independently by themselves : in
either state, each ofthem, except the first, has two forms ; ofwhich one is
applicable to masculine or feminine, the other to neuter objects. I shall
givethe neuter cardinals first, as the others are derived from them.

English Figure. Teloogoo Figure. Neuter Name .

] ....... -ఒకటి
2...... O ....... 00:30

3.... 3 ......... ... 20060

4...... 8. నాలుగు
5.... .H
મ. అయిదు
6...... ‫ع‬ Bew
7..........
..ఏడు
8...........
....... DDDD
9 .....
-తొమ్మిది
10....... ....... no .... పది

12....... .....
.పన్నెండు
13........
•.03 .... పదమూడు
2 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR .

English Figure. Teloogoo Figure . Neuter Name.

14........... .............
పధ్నాలుగు
15......... .............. పది హేను

16........ పదహారు

17..... ......02. .... పదిహేడు

18 ......
పద్ధెనిమిది
19 ....... ...
• పందొమ్మిది
20....... ..... .......ఇరువై

30... ·30...... ముఫ్పై

.
........8.0 .......... .నలుభై

50 ......................

......
60..
అరువై
70....... ·20 .....

80 ....
.ఎనభై
90 .....
.... తొంభై
100 ... .నూఱు

200 ...
ఇన్నూఱ
9 ు
300.... ·300 ......
మున్నూలు
400 .... 800 ........ ......
..నన్నూఱు
500 ..... .200 .... ఏనూలు .
600.
ఆఱన్నాయి .
700 ..... 200

800...... యెనమన్
నూలు
900...... 00
తొమ్మన్
నూయి
1,000..... •.0000. •
వెయ్యి
100,000 •nooooo . లక్ష
10,000000.... ....... ౧౦౦౦౦౦౦౦ కోటి
 APPENDIX . 3

The forms common to the masculine and feminine genders are derived

from the foregoing neuters in the following manner .

The numeral 2 one, when used as an adjective, is the same for all

genders: when used as a substantive , it has a separate form for each gen-

der ; vizt . 23 for the neuter, 2 c for the masculine, and 2 for

the feminine. The neuter 30 two, whether used as an adjective, or as

a substantive, becomes in the masculine and feminine ; the neuter

మూడు three becomes ముగ్గుగు, నాలుగు four becomes నలుగురు, and

all the other neuters, whether used substantively or adjectively, become

masculine or feminine by affixing the particle మంది ; thus, అయిదుమంది

five Sex six, dok seven &c. &c. & c,

In addition to these forms, the neuter numbers noted below admit, in the

masculine and feminine gender, of some irregular forms.

ఆలఱు ....... Sir may in the nasculine and feminine form become
M గుor అలుగురు
seven ·
...ఏడువురు or ఏడుగురు
JD XA ...... eight .ఎనమండ్రు

Janin .
e తొమ్మండ్ర
పది ..... .....ten . పదుగురు
cas ...twelve....
పన్నిద్దరు
thirteen...
“ పదముగ్గుగు
exfourteen·
పధ్నాలు · పధ్నలు గురు
The neuter .cardinals రెండు two, మూడు three, and నూలలు ahundred,

when used as substantives, make in the singular inflexion 306 -Lr6-

respectively, and are declined in the same manner as the irregular

nouns: the masculine w§2_c one is declined like the regular

nouns of the 1st, declension, the feminine 20 and the neuter

4 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

2 one, with all other cardinal numbers, when used as substantives

are declined according to the rules for the third declension ; except mas-
culines and feminines ending in x , which in the singular inflexion
change that termination into 8 ; thus, nominative e four, in-
flexion co8 , dative Sec¤
› ds to four &c . &c .

2d. ORDINAL NUMBERS ,

The ordinals are formed by changing the final vowel ofthe neuter car-

dinal numbers into in the superior dialect, and into inthe com-
mon dialect, the first cardinal number excepted, which in the cardinal form ,
becomes in both dialects, as shewn below.
Neuter cardinal Ordinal number.
number. superior dialect. common dialect.

ఒకటి
23. ...... .....• మొదటి .... ....first.

Bo
రెండు............
........... 80 %
రెండవ ............ 30 ....................
రెండో ....... second .

మూడు ....... .............మూడవ............ మూడో .

మూడో ....... .......third.

నాలుగు .... నాలుగవ నాలుగో . .... fourth.

అయిదు ..... ...... అయిదవ .. ..... అయిదో ......... fifth.

etv........... .... ... ఆఱవ .. .............. • sixth. ,

ఏడు JBL ......... ....ఏడో ........ seventh.

ఎనిమిది.. .... IDDLL

................ N.............. eighth,

....
తొమ్మిది .. ............తొమ్మిదవ.............తొమ్మిదో .

LO.............
పది ..... పదియవ ....... పదొ ..... tenth.

3d. FRACTIONS.

The subdivision of unity is carried to a great extent ; in common prac-

tice, among the people of Telingana . Their fractions descend by fours , in

the same manner that our decimal fractions descend by tens, and the four
thousand and ninety sixth part of an integer often occurs in a common
Teloogoo account.
 APPENDIX. 5

The following table exhibits the subdivisions of an unit.

English Figure. Teloogoo Figure . Name.

1 1 .... -ఒకటి

ముక్కాలు
or I 4 ..అర .
1 .కాలు

.వి ......... మువ్వీ సము

or వి .... పరక

వి .వీసము
16
3
కాలు
64 .ముక్కాని
1 కాల అరవీసము
or
32
...... 31 .కాని
61
3
256 E .....ముప్రియ
or • .... . అర కాని
256 128

256 ప్రియ
3
....∙Kory.. -మూడు సురలు
1024
2, 1.
or సు 4 . - రెండు సురలు
1024 512
1
1024 సు ! సుర

4096 ...మూడుగోక ర కానులు

2 or 1
4096 2048 .. రెండుగోకర కానులు
1
4096 .......
............5 5 8 3-2

It will be perceived that the subdivision of an unit into fourths is mar-

ked by perpendicular lines, and that into sixteenths by horizontal lines :
in either case, the number of these lines corresponds with the number of

fractional parts intended to be represented. Tlus , I is ‡, y is (or ) and

3
u 3 ; - is 1, 22, ( or 1 ) ; and = ; and in the further subdivi-
16 16
sion of unity , the number of fractional parts ( which in English vulgar
fractions we term the numerator ) is denoted, in the same manner, by a
 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR .

corresponding number oflines, alternately perpendicular and horizontal ,

The particular kind of parts into which the integer itself is divided,
which in our vulgar fractions is called the denominator, is marked in
Teloogoo, much in the same way as in our decimal fractions ; namely, by the
distance of the perpendicular and horizontal lines from the integer num-
ber; thus, uz 124-1321 3 2 and . It will here be observed
4 16 64 256 1024 4096

that the lines next the integer are fourths, those a degree further to the

right, sixteenths, then follow sixty fourths , next, two hundred and fifty
sixths, and so on . But when fractions are written separately from the in-
teger number, the denominator is marked by prefixing to all the lines, ex-
cept those of the first subdivision, a contraction of the Teloogoo word

which expresses the particular subdivision to which the fraction belongs ;

as for before the second subdivision , for before those
of the third subdivision , as specified in the foregoing table.

In accounts, if the whole of one subdivision be wanting, the deficien-

cy is marked by substituting for the perpendicular lines the mark call-
ed , and for the horizontal lines o, or a cypher ; Thus, goy

122 the first shews that fourths are wanting, the second denotes that
16 1024
sixty fourths are wanting, and the o shews the deficiency of two hundred
and fifty sixths.

Accounts of money are kept in Pagodas or Rupees, and Fanams: the

fractions ofthese are represented in the same manner as the fractions of
any other unit, but those ofa Pagoda as far as sixty fourths, those of a Ru-
pee as far as a sixteenth, and those of a Fanam as far as quarters, have names
different from the general fractions of an unit before specified .

The fractions of a Pagoda as far as sixty fourths are respectively named.

ths of a Pagoda. Xu ..ముప్పావు

or • ....· do ....... ..Xy ... ...
258
.... ...do......XI .....
... పావు
8
·do........... X.SE .ముద్దుగలము
 APPENDIX.

or ……..do ... .....ఛవలము

16
1
....do ……….. ..దుగలము
16 ·XC-.....
....do .. ...xgou . ముప్పాతిక
64
1 • బేడ
or 32 do ....... .X ..........
do.... ......... 95
..పాతిక
xgol
64
those of a Rupee as far as a sixteenth are called,
...
ths of a Rupee.. . ముప్పావులా

or
ior ..... .. do ....
.... ... .రూ 4 .... అధరరూసా

..రూ ....
... సావులా
... .అణా
16 do .......... రూకి-

and those of a Fanam as far as quarters are termed,

.5.1. ... 8
ths ofa fanam ......... 5⋅⋅ ముప్పాతిక
....
or ... do............... 5 4.........
5. 4 ...... అడ్డగ
.
........ .... ..... 51 .... పాతిక
4
In English accounts, Pounds Shillings and Pence are marked bythe let-
ters £ S D; in Teloogoo , Pagodas are distinguished by the letter X , Ru-
pees by the syllables & or , and Fanams by 5 prefixed to the integer

number.
OF MEASURES.

Measures, in Teloogoo called 3 , are divided into three sorts ;

viz . పరిమాణము - ఉన్మానము and ప్రమాణము . The first is that by

which the quantity of grain and the like articles is ascertained, and may
be termed the measure of capacity; the second , that which relates to weight;

and the third refers to the measurement ofextent, or to the length, breadth,

or width of any thing.

1st. OF 28 OR THE MEASURES OF CAPACITY .

The chief measure of this kind is that by which grain is usually mea-
sured, the largest of which is called , and is marked thus , If there be
one, two, three, or more such measures , the numeral figures, - - 3 & c.

are affixed to the 2 , and written thus , PO - P_0 - P3 & c. The is

8 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

divided into twenty smaller measures , called éves , which are named
and marked as follows .

éto
తూము200............
..... ..
దకౌలుము ..........
ఇద్దుము .......... 204-0
·పన్నిద్దుము ...
.......
..... 2. 3 ......
ముత్తుము .. ..2043
పదముత్తుము ...
నల్తుము ........... .......
పధ్నల్తుము ...
ఏదుము .......... ఖ olo ... పది హేదుము .
ఆగ్గుము .... ....ఖ olo
పదహార్డుము ... •poly?
..........
......201-0 ... 2014-0
ఎద్దుము పది పొద్దుము ....
ఎనమందుము - ఖం 13 .
:ప ద్దెశమందుము . ఖ ou3
........... పంధొమ్మందుముఖous
తొమ్మండుము .... ఖంls .......
పందుము .... ఖం40 ....
పుట్టి..... ఖగ

The తూము again is divided into four కుంచ ములు which are nanied
and marked in the following manner.

కుంచము ......... ........ ..... in

215 2NKY_ 2
...
28 ........ · ల 45 తూము ..... .....
The కుంచము is divided into four మానికలు ; thus ,
.... మాం ; మూడుమానికలు . ° 3
...25
...
...... మా ౨ : కుంచము......

The మానిక is subdivided into four సో లలు ; thus ,

60......
. ......... సొ ] , మూడుసోలలు ... ..సా
లు

తవ్వ | మానిక ..
సొ 4}
-సొ .... మాం
Thee is divided into four e; thus,
98
...... .....
... A- 3 మూడుగెద్దలు .
అరసోల..... ... ..
·· Z 5 సోల .......
2D OF ఉన్మానము OR WEIGHT .
The greatest Teloogoo weight is a or a Candy which is equiva-
lent to twenty మణుగులు or manunds .
Every మణుగు contains eight వీ శెలు .
Every five of or seers.
 APPENDIX . 9

Each seer is divided into quarters, which are marked thus,

......... ... BO ...... .....
..૨૦૫
శ్రీ అద్దరేగు ...........
801
ముప్పావు గేరు ..... శెంu ......... పావు శేరు .......
Every పావు పేరు contains two న వటాకులు or పలములు, and each నవ
టాకు is equivalent to three తులాలు ,
3d oF L L∞ OF EXTENT.

The greatest measurement of extent is a , more commonly

termed , which consists of four ses or es, termed by
us cosses.

Each కోసు or పగ Kు is equivalent to 1000 దండ ములు

do .... ………………………… ..do ………. ... to 2 .... revor fathoms .
do................. do .... to 2X Levor yards.
do....xxx .........
…………………………… do ........
………… to 2 .... des........or cubits .

do ....మూర ..... doto

do Kor feet .
2 ... అడుగు
to 15
......................... to
do .... 2-8 2 .... ............. or spans .

do .... అడుగు ... do ……………..to 12.... oxLxes • or inches .

................do …………….. to 9....Cox
do ... és.... xe .. or inches,
do .... అంగుళము ... .... one inch .

One కుచ్చెల has eight గొఱ్ఱాలు each of which consists of fifty కుంటలు .
OF THE DIVISION OF TIME.
The people of Telingana, following the astronomical system of the bra-
mins, divide what they term the infinity of time into four great ages ,
which they suppose to be in constant revolution ; these they denominate
Wwxzwev , or conjunctions ; periods , which seem to have been calcu-
lated, bythe Bramins, as the probable dates ofsome remote conjunctions of
of the heavenly bodies, which they assumed merely to assist astronomical
computations, but which have been implicitly adopted by the vulgar as real
eras
The first of these four ages is named FXXx referring , appar.
ently, to some conjunction which is supposed to have taken place at the
creation; for, according to the Hindoos , the SupremeBeing created
the world in the first age of this name. It consists of 1,728,000 years . The
10 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

second is denominated , the conjunction of the or

three sacrificial fires, so called , because the great sacrifice in which

these * fires are used is supposed to have been introduced during this pe-
riod , which contains 1,296,000 years . The third is named w

Xa compound of two and 8 the next,that which followed the

two first, viz . the third ; this comprises 8,64,000 years. The fourth or

present age is known by the name of x , properly signifying vi

cious or sinful ; to this age they assign a period of 4,32,000 years, of
which 4,916 are already elapsed . If the years in the fourth age be doubled,
the number of those in the third is given ; ifmultiplied by three, the length
of the second is found ; and if multiplied by four, the product is the length
of the first age .

Besides this grand division of time , common to all Hindoos , the peo-
ple of the Peninsula have another epoch which takes it's name from an
ancient prince named Jc Shalivahana , and commences a-
boutthe year ofChrist 78; the present year IS16 is therefore the 1737-8 of
this epoch. It is said that Shalivahana subdued Vikramarka ( Bikrma-
ject) whose era is still used in the north of Hindoostan, and substituted
his own era for that of his conquered enemy. The vulgar derive the name
ofShalivahana from T a heap of straw or Iv a certain kind oftree,
and a car ; viz, he whose car was a heap of straw or the
tree. In some encounter with Vikramarka, say they, Shalivahana was
obliged to mount this tree , or heap of straw; but all traditions respecting
this prince, are obscured in the most extravagant fables.

* These three fires are severally named గా హ ౯ పత్యము - దక్షిణాన్ని and

OJIDDIN The first is lighted, with particular ceremonies, in the west. The
person who celebrates the sacrifice is considered particularly to preside over this fire,
which being kept alive during his life, serves to light his funeral pile. From this fire,
also, the other two are lighted ; one of them is placed in the south, and offerings are
made in it to the deity of Fire , to the manes of the Pitris , or certain progenitors of man-
kind, and to a few other deities ; the other is placed in the East, and offerings are made
in it to the principal deitics presiding over the sacrifice, and to all the other gods.
 APPENDIX 11

The people of Telingana class the years of the two epochs above men-
tioned in cycles of sixty, giving to each ofthe sixty an appropriate name,
as shewn below.
......... is the....Ist, year of each cycle 50..is the..31st year of cach cycle.

2255
విభవ ....... do .... 2d do 2500 .... .... do 32d ………….do .

శుక్ల ....do 3d do ... 238 .........

………….. do… .. 33d ……………….do .
....
.. do ... 4th dors
మోదూత.. 8 ..
కార్వరి do ……..34th …………….do .
...do 35th...... do.
ప్రజోత్పత్తి .... do...-5th do .. ప్లవ ..
..
ఆంగెర స .......... do . 6th do.. శుభకృతు do36th .... do.
....
శ్రీ ముఖ ..........do....7th do శోభకృతు .... do .... 37th.....do.
¿ L………………………………..do ... 8th do ........... ...
...do .... 38th...... do.
యువ ............
Xv ..... .do ... 9th do .... I .......do .... 39th …………·· do .
ధాతు ....... .. do 10th do... ° L do .... 40th ..... do .
do 41st do .
ఈశ్వర .......... do..lth do .... ప్లవంగ ............
బహు ధాన్య...... do . 12th do ....కీలక .... ... do ... 42d ...do.

ప్రమా .......... do .. I3th do .... సౌమ్య ..... ……..do ... 43d ……………..do .
........ do....44th....... do.
వి క్రమ ............. do .. 14th do ....సాధారణ
....
విషు ................ do . 15th do ....విరోధికృతు do45th .... do .
…… ....
చిత్రభాను ........ do..16th do ... పరీధావి do 46th ...... do .
....
స్వభాను........ . -do- 17th do .... ప్రమాదీచ do47th ..... do .
Jord....... do 18th do.... 08....... ..do 48th... do.
...... • Er I
D& నావ .. .. do 19th do...
L. do ……… .49th …. ....
…….. do .
వ్యయ ..............do . 20th do నల ... ... do 50th ... do .

DJS 2 do 21st do ……..wox . ...

do 51 st ……………… do.
do....కాళయుక్తి ....... do.
సర్వ ధారి......... do .. 22d do52d ...
విరోధి ........... d ... 23d do సిద్ధాథినా ....
do53d do.
వికృతి . )...
do.24th do…..5° & .....do....54th ...... do .
28 . do . 25th do.... X ..... ... do 55th ... do .
నందన .... .. do..26th doowy... do ... 56th ...... do.
do … 26th do … so
Dz ............ do .. 27th do ...... ..-.- do …... 57th …… .. - do .
............. do 28th do .... 85 ..... do .... 58th ...... do .

మన్మధ . ......... do . 29th do ....క్రోధన . do 59th …. ....

…….. do .
Xy p ……………………..do 30th do…...... do .... 60th ... do ,
12 TELOO 00 GRAMMAR .

In Teloogoo, the whole of these years, whether of the cycle of sixty, of

Shalivahana , or of the Caleeyoogum , are calculated according to the lunar
system, which appears to have been the most ancient method ofcomputing
time in India ; and each year consists of twelve lunar months, reckon-
ed from new moon to new moon , not from full moon to full moon, as is
the practice at Benares ,

The ecliptic is divided into twenty seven Nutchatras or constellations,

each containing 13 ' 20 ' ' , and every lunar month takes it's name from the
particular Nutchatra near which the moon is observed to be generally
at the full .

The following are the names of the lunar months, and their correspond-
ing Nutchatras ,
Months. Nutchatras.
-
చైత్రము .... చిత్ర స్వాతి
·
వైశాఖము .... విశాఖ అనూరాధ
ము ....
జ్యేష్ఠము . కష మూల

ఆషాధము . ·పూర్వాషాధ - ఉత్తరాషాఢ

( శ్రా ) వణము .. శ్రవణము - ధనిష్ఠ

భాద్రపదము .......... శతభిష - పూర్వాభాద్ర ఉత్తరాభాద్ర

ఆశ్వయుజము ... రేవతి - అశ్విని - భరణి

కాతికాకము ..... కృత్తిక -రోహిణి

మాగశిరము ...... ... మృగశిర - ఆద్ర

పుష్యము ........... పునర్వసు పుష్యమి

మాసుము .... · ఆశ్లేష - మఘు

ఫాల్గునము ... పుబ్బ - ఉత్తర - హస్త

The moon is not always full inthe particular Nutchatra from which
the month derives it's name ; but either in that Nutchatra , or in the one
which follows or precedes it . This is the utmost extent ofthe variation ;
nevertheless , in whichever of the three the moon is full , the name of
the month remains unaltered . The moon ofthe month may be full
in the Nutchatra named , or in , or in S , but the name of
the montlı is always చైత్రము .
 APPENDIX. 13

Each lunar month is divided into two portions termed , ofwhich

one is named or the bright half, the other or a

బహుళ the
dark half; and each ofthese two portions contains fifteenes which

may be termed lunar days .

Thebright fortnight commences with the new moon , of which the or

lunar day is called or the 1st, and continues until or the

full moon : the dark fortnight then begins, in the same manner, with a 9

or lunar day named orthe 1st, and ends with DLS or

the change, when the moon, by it's conjunction with the sun, concludes
the lunar month ; thus,

The bright half or increase The dark half or decrease

ofthe moon, named

of the moon , termed కృష్ణపక్షము

పాడ్యమి ........... new moon . SDfirst lunar day ofthe dark

[fortnight.
విదియ ..second lunar day . విదియ .... ....second.

…………………..third.
5 DX …... తదియ ........ .......... third.

Wso fourth . చవుతి ........ ....fourth.

పంచమి ...... fifth. పంచమి ....... fifth. *

sixth . ...sixth .
షష్ఠి ... షష్ఠి ......
సప్తమి ... .....seventh. ..seventh .
సప్తమి .....

అష్టమి ...... eighth. అష్టమి ...... ...eighth.

ILD............ ninth. నవమి ........ .....ninth.

దశమి .....
BZD............ tenth . దశమి ..... ...tenth .

ఏకాదశి . -eleventh. ఏకాదశి ...... ... eleventh.

....
DS 8 twelfth . ద్వాదశి ........ twelfth .

8... thirteenth : త్రయోదశి ........... thirteenth.

14 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

WOL
చతుర్F8........
దశి.. fourteenth చతుదశి... .... fourteenth .

పున్నమ .......... full moon అమావాస్య :...lunar day of the

[ moon's change.
A or lunar day by no means corresponds with the solar day; accord-
ing to the Hindoos it is that period during which the moon travels through
twelve degrees of her path, it may commence in the morning, at noon, inthe
evening, or at midnight, and contains a number ofXev , or Teloogoo
hours of 24 English minutes each, varying from 54 to 66 according tothe
length of the .

Although the lunar day is of variable length , it's subdivision , the Teloogoo
hour, does not vary, but consists precisely of 24 English minutes . The peo-
ple measure this space of time by an empty vessel of a certain size placed in
water ; there is a small hole at the bottom of the vessel, through which
the water is allowed to enter ; and the size both ofthe hole and ofthe vessel
is so proportioned , that, if care be taken , the vessel sinks at the terminati-

on ofevery 24 English minutes.

The orb of the moon is divided into sixteen phases , named ; but

as one of these is considered constant, and the other fifteen are supposed
to revolve round it, like a garland of flowers on a string, each revolving
corresponds to a 3 or lunar day.

Twelve lunations form a lunar year, but it requires only about 354 solar
days to complete this period ; so that the lunar falls behind the solar year

(of365 solar days) more then 11 solar days every lunar year. To adjust the
lunar time to the solar computation intercalary months are inserted , and
this is regulated by assigning to each of the lunar months a particular
corresponding sign of the zodiac as explained below.

Lunar months Corresponding sign of the zodiac .

Aries.
: మేషము .......
చైత్రము .....
Taurus.
వైశాఖము ...... .... వృషభము .
•Gemini.
జ్యేష్ఠము . ....మిధునము ....
 APPENDIX . 15

..... కకాటకము .. .Cancer.

ఆషాఢము .....

ILM LN
శ్రావణమ ు ....... సింహము
20 .......
TL ....................... Leo .

Virgo.
భాద్రపదము ...... ..5 IS .........

తుల ...... Libra .

ఆశ్వయుజము .

కాతికాకము ........ వృశ్చికము Scorpio .

మాగ ౯ శిరము ........... ...·ధనుస్సు

My........................
.... Sagittarius .

పుష్యము ........ ....258200......................

...... మకరము ....... Capricornus .

మాఘుము ........ కుంభ ము ...... • Aquarius.

..మీనము .................. ..Pisces.

ఫాల్గునము ...

So often as the sun remains in the same sign of the zodiac during two
అమావాస్య Seలు or days of the moon's change, the month to which the
last belongs is named twice over ; it is first considered as
or intercalary, and after being completed is reckoned over again , un-
der it's proper name ; for example, suppossing the sun to have entered the

sign Aries on the last lunar day of the lunar month 3

, and to continue in the same sign during the last lu-
nar day of the next lunar month , the lunar month interven-
ing between the first and the last would be termed

వైశాఖము or intercalated వైశాఖము , and so soon as it expired , వైశా

2300 proper would commence anew.

In the course of a certain number of years, two intercalary months occur

within the space of one year ; in other words, two months are reckoned
over twice. In this case, the proper month intervening between the two is
called the wasted month, and is entirely omitted from
account. In every intercalary lunar month the sun does not enter into a
new sign ofthe zodiac ; in the course ofthe wasted month, he enters into
two signs..
 16 TELOOGOO GRAMMAR .

The new moon or in the bright fortnight of the lunar month

3 isthe first or commencement of the lunar year.

Besides the lunar years , months, and days, the people of Telingana use
that subdivision of solar time which we term the week, the days of which
they reckon from sun rise to sun rise, and name after the Sun, † Moon ,

Mars, Mercury, Jupiter, Venus and Saturn , in the following manner.

ఆదివారము-- or ..భానువారము. or · రవివారము....... Sunday .

సోమవారము .... ఇందువారము... చంద్ర వారము ... Monday.

మంగళవారము ...కుజవార ము ....... అంగారకవారము Tuesday .

........ Wednesday.
బుధవారము ........ సౌమ్యవారము...

గురువారము ...... బృ హ స్పతివారము .Thursday .

శుక్రవారము...... భృగువారము .......భాగ౯ వవారము... Friday .

శనివారము ........ ష్ఠి రవారము ....... మందవారము ...... Saturday :

In a few of the most southern districts, the people of Telingana, from

their intercourse with the inhabitants of the Tamil Country, have adopt-

ed their solar computation of the year, of which, therefore, some brief

notice seems to be necessary .

+ I subjoin for the information of the reader a list of the Planets, as enumerated in
Teloogoo books.

BSc .the Sun.

చంద్రుఁడు ...the Moon.

COTOOLCE ....Mars, the son ofthe earth..
evão cão ………………… ……….. Mercury, the son of the moon by the Hyades.
.........

s I........ Jupiter, son of Angerasa one of the seven great sages, and the
బృహస్పతి ..
aj
[preceptor ofthe gods.
Wc K) .......... Venus, the son of Bhrigu, and the preceptor of thegiants.

XD.................. Saturn, the offspring of the sun by Ch'húyú shade.

 APPENDIX. 17

Every Tamil solar year has twelve ees or months which are named as
follows.

చిత్రి . April ......October.

అల్ప శి .......
·May . 33... November.
వయ్యారి....
ఆని ....... June, LJXE .... December.

· July . ....January.
రైయి ....
ఆవణి..... ... 28 .................. February.
August.
పెరటాశి ................Sept
.. LOXε
పంగుణి ... ......... March.
ember.

The Tamil calendar is not adjusted by intercalary days acccording to

the European method ; these months, therefore , do not correspond entire-
ly with the English months by which they are represented . The Tamil
year commences on the sun's entrance into Aries, and each month proper-
ly contains as many days, and fractional parts of a day, as the sun remains
in each sign. The civil solar month , however, always commences at sun
rise, and continues until the first sun rise in the following month ; and to
dispose of the fractional parts of a day, the following computation is
adopted . If the sun should enter a new sign of the Zodiac between sun
rise and midnight, the day of his entrance is the first of the month ; but
ifhe enters a new sign between midnight and sun rise, the month com-
mences at the following sun rise.

A & or solar day of 24 english hours is divided into sixty X

e each of which is equivalent to twenty four minutes : seven Xe
and a half, or three english hours , make one & the corruption of the
sanscrit word యామము ,

రాహు..........
ovov ...... Son of Sinhica, the moon's ascending node, reckoned the 8th planet.
కేతు ....... The moon's descending node, reckoned the 9th planet.

A Star is termed…….. నక్షత్రము

..
.... 1X250 220
A planet......
An eclipse........... గ్రహణము
 18 TELOOGOO GRAM MAR .

The solar year is also divided into two wes , each of which
consists of six solar months ; it has also six 2005 or seasons, each

of which consists of two months ; viz. 205W the spring com-

prehending చి త్రి and వయ్యాశి , శ్రీష్మఋతువు the hot season compriz-

ing ఆని and లేది , వష ఋతువు the rainy season including ఆవణి and

రటా శి , శరదృతువు the sultry season comprehending అల్పి 8 and కాతిగా

కి, హేమంతఋతువు the winter season containing మా X and తైయి ,

and the cold season comprehending 8 and o³.

When day is used in contradistinction to night it is expressed in Teloo-

goo by ; thus wɔ he read day and night . A

day of four and twenty hours is expressed by the words దిన ము orవారము ,

but these terms are not synonymous ; & implies simply a day, with-

out reference either to the date or the day of the week ; thus, AADL

ల వెనక వస్తున్నాను I will come after ten days ; వారము is applicable

to the day of the week only ; for instance, were I to ask, on what day of
the week you intend to set out for Combaconum, I should say in Teloo-

goo మీగుయేవార ముకుంభకోణానికిపోతారు , and if instead of వా

8 , I were to use & , in this instance, the person addressed would

not understand that the day of the week was meant to be expressed .

ఉషఃకాలము or తెల్లవారి means the dawn, the morning , మ ధ్యాహ్న

ము midday, noon, సాయంకాలము the evening , రాత్రి the night, and అ
అ

ధ ౯ రాత్రి midnight .

I shall conclude the appendix with a list of the principal points of the

compass, over each of which a particular genius is understood to preside .

 APPENDIX. 19

POINTS OF THE COMPASS . GUARDIANS.

& T S W&Lv ev దిక్పాలకులు

← A8 Lు North ... ☎&c .... Thegod ofriches.

ఉత్ తరమ

దక్షిణము ....... •South ….c .... Regent ofdeath, andjudge of

[departed souls.
East ... oc . Regent of the sky.
తపు
………………………. ..West....
పడమర ........... & ... Regent of water.

JDxSávu.N. West …........ The ruler of the wind .

ఈశాన్యమూల. N. East ... ఈ శానుఁడు. The destroyer and reprodu-

[cer.
28 ... S. West Prince of demons .

72 La..S ... ......

SR2D200 ... East.
….S D ……….. The genius offire.

TINIS
 F

ign
 UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN

3 9015 02317 9990

3 *1

37